Vor der Beschreibung der von Haiku mitgelieferten Anwendungen, eine Erklärung wie man Programme installiert und deinstalliert, die man sich z. B. von Webseiten heruntergeladen hat, die auf der Willkommen Seite gelistet sind.
+
Vor der Beschreibung der von Haiku mitgelieferten Anwendungen, eine Erklärung wie man Programme installiert und deinstalliert, die man sich zum Beispiel von Webseiten heruntergeladen hat, die auf der Willkommen Seite gelistet sind.
Archive sollten immer unter Haiku entpackt/installiert werden. Packt man sie zum Beispiel unter Linux oder Windows aus, und kopiert später einfach nur den Ordner nach Haiku, gehen wichtige Attribute verloren. Diese werden von anderen Betriebssystemen in der Regel ignoriert.
@@ -69,8 +70,8 @@ Handelt es sich um ein ZIP Archiv, öffnet ein Doppelklick den
Dieser Unterschied wird natürlich erst relevant, sobald Haiku ein Mehrbenutzersystem geworden ist.
Ist das Archiv entpackt, sollte man einen Blick in das neue Verzeichnis werfen. Oft enthält es ReadMe Dateien oder andere interessante Informationen.
-
Einige Programme benötigen noch weitere Konfiguration. So müssen z.B. Tracker Add-Ons, Translatoren und andere Erweiterungen in besonderen Ordnern abgelegt werden. Oft findet man dazu ein kleines Skript (meistens mit der Endung .sh) wie install, das nach einem Doppelklick alles nötige erledigt.
-Manchmal findet man auch Ordner, die mit dem entsprechenden Zielort verlinkt sind und z.B."drag [filename] here..." heißen. Man folgt also einfach dieser Anweisung, macht also ein Drag&Drop der entsprechenden Datei auf den Ordner und verschiebt sie so.
+
Einige Programme benötigen noch weitere Konfiguration. So müssen zum Beispiel Tracker Add-Ons, Translatoren und andere Erweiterungen in besonderen Ordnern abgelegt werden. Oft findet man dazu ein kleines Skript (meistens mit der Endung .sh) wie install, das nach einem Doppelklick alles Nötige erledigt.
+Manchmal findet man auch Ordner, die mit dem entsprechenden Zielort verlinkt sind und zum Beispiel "drag [filename] here..." heißen. Man folgt also einfach dieser Anweisung, macht also ein Drag&Drop der entsprechenden Datei auf den Ordner und verschiebt sie so.
Meistens ist sowas aber nicht nötig und es bleibt beim einfachen Entpacken.
In den Kapiteln Deskbar und LaunchBox ist beschrieben wie man Verknüpfungen zu den neu installierten Anwendung herstellt.
@@ -114,7 +115,7 @@ Andernfalls löscht man einfach den Ordner der Anwendung.
Diese Befehle werden benutzt um Attribute einer Datei aufzulisten, anzuzeigen, hinzuzufügen, zu entfernen und zu kopieren. Diese Metadaten werden momentan nur auf BFS formattierten Medien unterstützt. Schiebt man die Dateien auf andere Dateisysteme, gehen alle Attribute verloren!
+
Diese Befehle werden benutzt, um Attribute einer Datei aufzulisten, anzuzeigen, hinzuzufügen, zu entfernen und zu kopieren. Diese Metadaten werden momentan nur auf BFS formatierten Medien unterstützt. Schiebt man die Dateien auf andere Dateisysteme, gehen alle Attribute verloren!
All diese Befehle sind im Kapitel Attribute im Terminal beschrieben.
@@ -79,7 +80,7 @@ Soll eine Verknüpfung erstellt werden?" "Auf dem Desktop" "In der Deskbar" "Nei
filepanel
-
filepanel öffnet einen Öffnen- oder Speicher-Dialog, in dem der Benutzer eine Datei oder Verzeichnis auswählen kann. Der Rückgabewert ist der gewählte Datei- oder Ordnerpfad. Es stehen diverse Parameter zur Verfügung um beispielsweise einen Startordner oder einen Fenstertitel zu setzen, oder einen Dateinamen beim Speichern vorzugeben oder erlaubte Dateitypen einzuschränken. Zum Beispiel:
+
filepanel öffnet einen Öffnen- oder Speicher-Dialog, in dem der Benutzer eine Datei oder Verzeichnis auswählen kann. Der Rückgabewert ist der gewählte Datei- oder Ordnerpfad. Es stehen diverse Parameter zur Verfügung, um beispielsweise einen Startordner oder einen Fenstertitel zu setzen, oder einen Dateinamen beim Speichern vorzugeben oder erlaubte Dateitypen einzuschränken. Zum Beispiel:
Solange die Übersetzung dieser Seite noch nicht ganz fertig ist, erscheint für die noch fehlenden Teile die englische Version.
-
MediaPlayer
+
Media-Player
Deskbar:
Applications
Ort:
/boot/system/apps/MediaPlayer
Einstellungen:
~/config/settings/MediaPlayer
-
MediaPlayer is an application used for viewing multimedia files such as music or video files. It supports different formats.
-
-
Interface
-
-
MediaPlayer is easy-to-use because of its interface. There's no difference in interface while playing music or video.
-
+
Media-Player ist die Standardanwendung zum Abspielen aller Audio- und Videodateien. Da es auf ffmpeg basiert, werden eine Unmenge an verbreiteten Formaten untersctützt. Die einfache Oberfläche enthält alle Bedienelemente, die man so erwartet:
+
Mit dem Zeiger auf dem Fortschrittsbalken lässt sich schnell zur gewünschten Position springen. Hält man den Mauszeiger über den Balken, wird die aktuelle und verbleibende Zeit für diesen Clip eingeblendet. Klicke auf die Zeitanzeige rechts davon, lässt sie zwischen Gesamtzeit, momentaner Zeit und Restzeit wechseln.
+Darunter befinden sich die üblichen Tasten um zum vorigen Clip zu springen, Wiedergabe/Pause, Stopp und um zum nächsten Clip zu springen. Daneben befindet sich ein Lautstärkeregler (das Lautsprechersymbol schaltet stumm) und eine Pegelanzeige.
-
You can control playing media using a set of buttons - previous, play/pause, stop, next. Also, there is a progress bar, a volume controler and even an oscilloscope.
+
Wiedergabe von Audio- und Videodateien
+
Weil es keine Features gibt, die nur auf Audio zutreffen, geht's gleich weiter mit den allgemeinen bzw. Videofunktionen.
+
+
Für alle Medien zeigt Datei Info... (ALTI) Informationen wie Spieldauer oder Details zu Audio/Video Track und den verwendeten Codecs der aktuellen Datei.
+
Die meisten der oft benutzten Befehle aus den Menüs stehen auch in einem Kontextmenü mittels Rechtsklick auf die Videofläche zur Verfügung. Praktisch vor allem im Vollbildmodus.
+Unter Video befinden sich Befehle, um das Fenster auf verschiedene Größen zu zoomen oder das Seitenverhältnis auf diverse Standardwerte erzwingen zu können. Für korrekt erstellte Dateien fährt man mit Stream-Einstellungen am besten.
+
Media-Player kann Untertitel im SRT Format darstellen. Damit sie unter Untertitel auftauchen, muss ihr Dateiname identisch zu der Videodatei sein, allerdings mit einem angehängten Sprachkürzel und der Endung ".srt" statt der Videoformat-Endung. Also:
Mehrere Audiotracks, meist für unterschiedliche Sprachen innerhalb einer Videodatei benutzt, finden sich im Audiospur Menü. Videospur bietet das entsprechend falls mehrere Videostreams vorhanden sind.
+
Mittels Vollbild mode (ALTRETURN oder F oder einen Doppel-Linksklick) lässt sich in den Vollbildmodus wechseln, Oberfläche ausblenden (ALTH oder ein Doppel-Rechtsklick) blendet Media-Players Fensterrahmen und Bedienelemente aus, und durch Immer im Vordergrund (ALTA) schwebt der Media-Player immer über allen anderen Fenstern.
-
Once you play a video file, you can double right-click on the display to hide interface. Double left-click instead causes displaying video in full-screen mode.
+
Playlisten
+
Media-Player | Playliste... (ALTP) öffnet ein Fenster mit allen Dateien die zur Wiedergabe anstehen. Ein Doppelklick auf einen Eintrag startet die Wiedergabe.
+
+
Um weitere Dateien anzufügen, lässt man sie einfach über der Liste fallen und ändert ihre Position per Drag & Drop. Aus dem Bearbeiten Menü lässt sich eine Zufällige Reihenfolge erzeugen oder einzelne Einträge aus der Liste Entfernen (ENTF). Die eigentliche Datei lässt sich auch direkt von hier In Papierkorb verschieben (ALTT).
+
Natürlich lässt sich eine Playliste auch Speichern und später wieder Öffnen. Oder man startet die Wiedergabe gleich mit einem Doppelklick auf eine Playlist-Datei.
-
Playing media
+
Einstellungen
+
Am Verhalten des Media-Players lässt sich mit ein paar Einstellungen drehen:
+
+
Die ersten Optionen unter Wiedergabe mode sind ziemlich selbstsprechend. Wiedergabe automatisch starten, Fenster nach vollendetem Abspielen schließen, oder Clips in Endlosschleife spielen.
+
Es folgen Einstellungen zur Darstellung.
+Man kann Hardware-Overlay verwenden (falls vorhanden), was die CPU-Last senkt, aber nur für ein einziges Fenster möglich ist und auch erstmal vom Grafikkartentreiber unterstützt werden muss.
+Es lässt sich ein Zoom mit hoher Qualität einschalten (allerdings nicht im Overlay-Modus), was durch ein sehr schnelles Filtern Stufenbildung vor allem bei vergrößerter Darstellung und im Vollbildmodus mindert.
+Durch Bedienelemente im Vollbildmodus vergrößern werden die Bedienelemente etwas größer dargestellt, vielleicht sitzt man bei bildfüllendem Video ja etwas weiter weg vom Bildschirm.
+Dann folgen Optionen zur Untertitelgröße und Untertitelplazierung. Sie können Unten im Video eingeblendet werden, wodurch sie immer im Bild sind. Oder Unten im Fenster, was es erlaubt die Fensterhöhe so zu ändern, dass die Untertitel immer unten im schwarzen Balken erscheinen.
+
Die letzte Option bestimmen in welcher Lautstärke Clips abgespielt werden, deren Fenster gerade nicht im Vordergrund sind. Entweder alle spielen immer Volle Lautstärke, mit weniger nervende Niedrige Lautstärke oder ganz Stumm geschaltet.
-
There are options especially useful while watching DVD video or other files which include different audio/video tracks or have subtitles included. You can change audio tracks from Audio | Track just as Video | Track for various video tracks. You can also make use of subtitles, MediaPlayer supports .srt format. All available subtitles are showed as options in Video | Subtitles menu. The player gets names for this positions from the filename, eg. videoclip.english.srt shows as "english" in the menu.
+
Tastenkürzel
+
Media-Player kennt einige nützliche Tastenkürzel um die Wiedergabe zu steuern ohne die Maus zu benutzen.
+
+
Y
Zum vorigen Track springen
+
X
Wiedergabe
+
C
Pause
+
V
Stopp
+
B
Zum nächsten Track springen
+
+
Diese Tasten sind den Funktionen der entsprechenden Bedienknöpfe zugeordnet. Es sind immer die Tasten unten rechts auf der Tastatur, das bedeutet sie sind unabhängig vom verwendeten Tastaturlayout. Die genannten Tasten entsprechen einer deutschen Standard-Tastatur.
+
+
→
Vorwärts spulen
+
SHIFT→
10 Sekunden vorwärts springen
+
ALT→
30 Sekunden vorwärts springen
+
←
Rückwärts spulen
+
SHIFT←
10 Sekunden rückwärts springen
+
ALT←
30 Sekunden rückwärts springen
-
+
↑
Lauter
+
↓
Leiser
-
You can change the scale by resizing the window or simply from the Video menu. There are 50%, 100%, 200%, 300% and 400% options. There is an option to change the player to full-screen mode or to change ratio of the display.
-
-
Playlists
-
-
MediaPlayer supports playlists. You can either select a few files in Tracker using ALT and launched the application or add other files after launching the one using the drag and drop method. You can get to the playlist from menu - choose MediaPlayer | Playlist and the playlist window will pop-up.
-
-
-
-
You can save the current playlist or open one from the playlist window, of course. There is also a function that lets you to randomize your playlist. Use either Edit | Randomize menu position or ALTR shortcut. You can also both remove any file from playlist and remove it from playlist and put into Trash. This functions are available from Edit menu, too.
-
-
Other options
-
-
If you would like to rate a file, you can do this directly from MediaPlayer, too! Choose a rate from 1 to 10 from Attributes | Rating menu.
-
-
MediaPlayer is also able to show you some information about the file you play. It is available from MediaPlayer | File info... menu.
-
-
-
-
You can configure the application from MediaPlayer | Settings. There are some interesting options concerning looping playback, closing window when playback finishes, size and placement of subtitles or volume level while playing in the background.
-
-
Shortcuts
-
-
There are plenty of shortcuts for this application. SPACEBAR is used to play/pause the playback. You can control the whole playback with one hand, because alternate keys are used - Z to go to the previous track, X to play, C to pause and V to go to the next track. Left/Right cursors are used to seek, they cause 10 seconds seeking while ALT is pressed at the same time. Up and down cursors controls the volume and cause going to the previous/next track while ALT is pressed.
-
-
ALTF activates full-screen mode, ALTP pops-up playlist window, ALTI shows file information, ALTH hides interface, ALTA causes MediaPlayer is always on top, ALTS moves you to the settings window and ALTQ quits the application.
+
ALT↑
Zum vorigen Track springen
+
ALT↓
Zum nächsten Track springen
+
LEERTASTE
Wiedergabe/Pause umschalten
+
ALTRETURN
Vollbild-Modus umschalten (auch durch Doppelklick ins Bild)
Dieses Thema wurde noch nicht beschrieben. Wer daran arbeiten möchte, meldet sich bitte auf der Documentation Mailingliste.
+
Wie der Name schon verrät, dient der MidiPlayer zum Abspielen von Midi-Dateien. Midi-Dateien sind insofern besonders, als sie nicht digitalisierte und irgendwie kodierte Musik enthalten, sondern nur eine Beschreibung von ihr: Halte diese Note für soundso lang mit dieser Lautstärke und benutze Dafür Instrument X.
+Während die so zustande kommenden Dateien sehr klein sind, folgt daraus auch, dass sich das Ergebnis je nach verwendeter Instrumentenbibliothek (der "SoundFont") stark unterscheidet. Diese SoundFont-Dateien sind meistens recht groß; um so größer, je höher die Qualität und Anzahl der Instrumenten-Samples ist.
+
Haiku kommt ohne vorinstallierte SoundFonts, weil sie so groß sind und sie nur relativ wenige Leute wirklich brauchen. Und die, die tatsächlich welche einsetzen, besitzen meist schon einen eigenen SoundFont hochwertiger Instrumente. Um aber zumindest irgendwas zu hören, kann ein frei verfügbarer mit einem optionalen Paket installiert werden. Im Terminal schreibt man dazu: installoptionalpackage TimGMSoundFont
+
Um einen anderen SoundFont zu benutzen, legt man eine Verknüpfung auf ihn in /boot/system/data/synth an und nennt sie big_synth.sy.
+
+
Die Oberfläche des MidiPlayers ist sehr einfach gehalten. Wird eine Midi-Datei doppelgeklickt oder auf dem Fenster fallen gelassen, beginnt automatisch die Wiedergabe. Mit einem Regler wird die Lautstärke geändert und aus einem Hall Menü lassen sich Effekte zuschalten. Zur Visualisierung kann eine Wellenform oben im Fenster angezeigt werden.
Solange die Übersetzung dieser Seite noch nicht ganz fertig ist, erscheint für die noch fehlenden Teile die englische Version.
-
WebPositive
Deskbar:
Applications
Ort:
/boot/system/apps/WebPositive
Einstellungen:
~/config/settings/WebPositive/ - Konfigurationsdateien, Cookies, Cache und Surf-Historie
-
~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks - Speicherort für Lesezeichen
+
~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks - Alle Lesezeichen als einzelne Dateien
WebPositive, oder kurz Web+, ist Haikus eigener Webbrowser. Ein Teil des Namens ist eine kleine Hommage an BeOS' einfachen NetPositive, der andere bezieht sich auf das moderne Fundament des Browsers: das WebKit. Diese open source HTML Render-Bibliothek ist auch das Herzstück einiger anderer Mainstream Browser, wie Safari unter Mac OS X und Googles Chrome. Die Nutzung des sich ständig weiter entwickelnden WebKits ermöglicht, dass Web+ auch den zukünftigen Web-Technologien gewappnet sein wird.
-
-
-
You'll control your Web browsing with the Locator bar. To go to a Web page, type the URL into the Locator box and either press RETURN or click the Go button to the right of the Locator box. Web+ will suggest previous URLs as you type; you can go through previously typed URL with the UP and DOWN arrow keys. The icons on the Locator bar give you control over the current page, allowing you to go back, forward, stop loading, or return to your Start page.
-
-
If you need to quickly locate content in a page, Web+ includes in-page search. Use Edit | Find or ALTF to call up the Find bar, then type your search phrase and press RETURN. Further presses of RETURN or ALTG will go through the matches on the page. The Match case option restricts matches to those with the same spelling as your search phrase. Besides in-page search, the Edit menu also includes clipboard functions: cut, copy, and paste.
-
-
The View menu offers several functions to set the display of Web pages. First, View | Reload refreshes the Web page so you can see any changes. You set the font size and zoom level of the Web page here as well; you can also choose whether to apply zoom to images as well as text. If you need more room to view the page, you can move into fullscreen mode with View | Fullscreen. Finally, if you want to view the HTML source code of the current page, View | Page source opens up an external editor to edit the source.
-
-
In case you need to find a page you've already accessed, Web+ has the History menu. This menu contains the Back and Forward commands which are in the Locator bar, but it also has a list of all pages in your browsing history, organized by day.
-
-
Last, the Bookmarks menu lets you add the current page as a bookmark and manage your bookmarks in Tracker. It also lets you see all the bookmarks themselves.
-
-
Right-clicking on your Web page or on elements in the page brings up a context menu. In this menu, you can Stop page loading. If you right-click a link, you can Download link to disk, Open, or Open in new tab. You can also Copy link to clipboard for use elsewhere. You can take similar actions with right-clicked images embedded in Web pages: Download image to disk, Copy image to clipboard, or Open image in new window. Right-clicking selected text allows you to Copy to the clipboard.
-
-
In the Status bar at the bottom of WebPositive's interface, you can preview where links will take you. Hover over a link in a Web page and its destination URL will appear in the Status bar. This bar will also show you progress as Web+ loads a new Web page.
You can access the Web+ settings dialog from Window | Settings.
-
-
-
Many of the options are self-explanatory. The WebPositive Start page and Search page can be set here. You can also change which pages appear in new windows and tabs. Finally, you can change the default fonts and add a proxy server in this dialog.
-
The Auto-hide interface in fullscreen mode option will cause the interface to roll out of view if you don't use it for a short time while in fullscreen mode. Likewise, the Auto-hide mouse pointer option removes the mouse pointer from view when you are scrolling through a Web page.
-
-
Web+ currently only uses the Search page as a possible default page for new tabs and windows. It doesn't have built-in Web search; you have to go to your search engine and type in your query there.
These are some commonly used keyboard shortcuts in WebPositive:
+
WebPositives Oberfläche ist recht übersichtlich: Unter der Menüleiste befindet sich eine weitere Leiste mit Symbolen, um in der Historie der angesurften Seiten zurück und vorzuspringen, das Laden einer Seite abzubrechen und (optional) um zur Startseite zu springen.
+Daneben folgt ein Textfeld zur Eingabe einer Zieladresse (URL).
+Unter dieser Navigationsleiste werden die Webseiten angezeigt. Es lassen sich mehrere Seiten parallel öffnen, indem man sie in eigene Reiter lädt.
+Ganz unten im Fenster befindet sie eine Statusleiste, in der die URL der gerade ladenden Seite angezeigt wird, oder auch die Zieladresse eines Links, über dem sich der Mauszeiger gerade befindet. Während eine Seite geladen wird, erscheint rechts ein Fortschrittsbalken.
+
Einstellungen
+
Aus dem Window Menü lässt sich ein Panel Settings öffnen, um einige Konfigurationen für WebPositive vorzunehmen.
+
+
Der erste Reiter, General, betrifft allgemeine Einstellungen: Welche Datei oder URL dient als Startseite (Start page), welche als Suchseite (Search page), in welchem Ordner (Downloads folder) sollen Downloads aus dem Netz gespeichert werden.
+Mittels zweier Menüs lässt sich entscheiden welche Seite mit neuen Fenstern oder Reitern geladen oder ob eine leere Seite angezeigt werden soll.
+Die Reiterleiste lässt sich ausblenden wenn sowieso nur eine einzelne Seite geöffnet ist. Die gesamte Oberfläche kann im Vollbildmodus automatisch ausgeblendet werden, und der Mauszeiger kann automatisch verschwinden nachdem die Maus für kurze Zeit nicht bewegt wird.
+Schließlich lässt sich das Symbol für die Startseite in der Navigationsleiste ein- und ausblenden und die Anzahl der Tage einstellen, die sich der Browser die angesurften Orte in der Historie merkt.
+
Im zweiten Reiter können Schriftarten für Standard, Serifen, Non-Serifen und Schriften mit fester Breite und deren Größen ausgewählt werden.
+
Der letzte Reiter zur Konfiguration eines Proxyservers.
+
Bilder durchsehen
+
Wer schon mal einen Browser benutzt hat, dürfte mit WebPositive keine großen Überraschungen erleben. Anstatt jedes Menü und Feature durchzugehen, hier nur einige der interessanteren Punkte.
+
+
+
Neue Reiter können mit dem + Symbol rechts in der Reiterleiste geöffnet werden oder durch einen Doppelklick auf eine freie Fläche neben den Reitern, falls dafür noch Platz ist. Sind mehr Reiter geöffnet als in die Leiste passen, werden die <> Symbole aktiv, mit denen die Reiterleiste nach rechts und links gescrollt werden kann. Zur noch schnelleren Navigation dient das ∨ Symbol ganz rechts, das ein Menü mit allen vorhandenen Reitern öffnet.
+
Ein Klick mit der mittleren Maustaste öffnet einen Link in einem neuen Reiter, ohne den aktuellen Reiter zu verlassen.
+
Mit Zoom in und Zoom out aus dem View Menü kann der Inhalt einer Seite vergrößert und verkleinert werden. Bei aktivem Zoom text only wird nur der Text vergrößert, alle Bilder bleiben in Originalgröße.
+
Ist die Einstellung zum Ausblenden der Oberfläche aktiviert, verschwindet beim Wechsel in den Vollbildmodus nach kurzer Zeit. Um sie kurzzeitig wieder einzublenden, muss man nur mit der Maus zum oberen Bildschirmrand fahren.
+
+
Während man eine Adresse in das Textfeld eingibt, sucht der Browser dazu passende URLs von Webseiten, die früher schon mal besucht wurden und listet sie unter dem Textfeld auf. Entweder man fügt weitere Buchstaben hinzu, um die Liste zu verkürzen oder wählt einen Eintrag mit ↑ oder ↓ aus. RETURN lädt die Seite. Oder man klickt das Symbol ganz rechts in der Leiste, das auch zum Aktualisieren der Seite dient.
+Eingaben, die nicht als URL erkannt werden, dienen als Suchbegriff für eine Google-Suche. Das Textfeld kann also auch für eine schnelle Websuche genutzt werden.
+
Ein Rechtsklick öffnet ein Kontextmenü, mit dem, abhängig vom angeklickten Objekt, beispielsweise ein Link in einem neuen Fenster oder Reiter geöffnet, oder das Objekt runtergeladen werden kann etc.
+
Edit | Find öffnet eine Suchleiste unten im Fenster, um Begriffe auf der aktuellen Seite zu suchen. Die Fundstellen werden farbig hinterlegt.
+
+
Nach einer Weile kann es vorkommen, dass Webseiten immer langsamer geladen werden. Das ist nicht wirklich ein Bug, eher liegt das an einer ineffektiven Verwaltung von Cookies. Wie auch immer, bis dieses Problem gelöst ist, muss man selbst Hand anlegen. Und zwar an der Datei ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Cookies.curl. Sie speichert die Cookies von Webseiten und wächst beim Surfen langsam an. Erreicht sie eine Größe von ein paar dutzend Kilobytes, wird das Surfen immer schwerfälliger. An dieser Stelle kann man die Datei einfach löschen, und alles läuft wieder fix, wie gewohnt.
+
Lesezeichen
+
WebPositives Lesezeichen werden als einzelne Dateien und Ordner in ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/ verwaltet. Fügt man ein neues Lesezeichen hinzu, wird dort eine neue Datei erstellt. Dieser Ordner lässt sich bequem mit Manage Bookmarks... öffnen.
+
+
Man kann URL, Name und Titel eines Lesezeichens ändern und Begriffe als "Keywords" eingeben, wie bei jeder Datei mit Attributen. Dazu müssen in Trackers Attribute Menü nur all diese Spalten angezeigt werden. Dann markiert man eine Datei, drückt ALT E und editiert das Attribut. Spalten werden mittels TAB gewechselt. Lesezeichen lassen sich in selbst angelegte Ordner einsortieren.
+
Weil der Tracker zur Verwaltung von Lesezeichen verwendet wird, lassen sich seine einzigartigen Features nutzen, um schnell zu finden was man sucht.
+Ist das Filtern während der Eingabe in den Trackereinstellungen aktiviert, lässt sich die Liste der Lesezeichen im Handumdrehen so verkürzen, dass nur noch die gezeigt werden, die die eingegebene Zeichenkette enthalten. Noch ein paarmal ↑ oder ↓ drücken, um das entsprechende Lesezeichen zu markieren und ein RETURN öffnet die Seite. Dabei sollte man alle Attributspalten eingeblendet haben, damit der Filter auch auf Name, Titel, URL und Keywords angewendet wird.
+
Damit das gut funktioniert, sollten alle Lesezeichen direkt in ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/ abgelegt und nur Kopien in Unterordner einsortiert werden, um sie in WebPositives Bookmarks Menü zu nutzen (wenn überhaupt). Befüllte "Keywords" Attribute helfen übrigens auch...
+
Downloads
+
Window | Downloads öffnet ein Fenster mit allen vergangenen und laufenden Downloads:
+
+
+
Gerade laufende Downloads werden mit einem Fortschrittsbalken dargestellt und zeigen, wie bei Kopieraktionen in Tracker, Informationen zu Downloadgeschwindigkeit, Dateigröße und voraussichtliche Endzeit. Rechts davon sind Buttons, um den Download abzubrechen (Cancel) oder neu zu starten (Restart) oder die Datei zu öffnen (Open) und ihren Eintrag von der Liste zu entfernen (Remove). Remove missing und Remove finished unter der Liste tun dies für alle Einträge. "Missing" sind Dateien, die in der Zwischenzeit gelöscht wurden.
+
Wird eine Datei in den Papierkorb verschoben noch während sie heruntergeladen wird, wird der Download abgebrochen. Außerdem erscheint ihr Icon halb-transparent.
+Sowieso ist WebPositive sehr tolerant, wenn es um Dateioperationen in Tracker geht. Dateien können umbenannt und verschoben werden, noch während sie heruntergeladen werden, und auch nachdem der Download abgeschlossen ist, werden solche Änderungen in den Einträgen im Downloads-Fenster weiter berücksichtigt.
+
Wer wollte nicht schon mal wissen, von welcher Webseite ein bestimmtes Paket, Bild oder sonst eine Datei heruntergeladen wurde? Das lässt sich herausfinden, indem man die Datei in DiskProbe öffnet und einen Blick in ihr META:url Attribute wirft.
+
Tastaturkürzel
+
Hier einige der wichtigsten Tastaturkürzel:
-
ALTT
Opens a new tab.
-
ALTW
Closes the current tab.
-
ALTN
Opens a new window.
-
SHIFTALTW
Closes the current window.
-
CMD click
Opens the clicked link in a new background tab.
-
ALTR
Refreshes the current page.
-
ALTB
Bookmarks this page.
-
ALTLEFT
Goes back to the last Web page.
-
ALTF
Opens the Find bar for in-page searching.
+
ALTT
Öffnet einen neuen Reiter.
+
ALTW
Schließt den aktuellen Reiter.
+
ALTN
Öffnet ein neues Fenster.
+
SHIFTALTW
Schließt das aktuelle Fenster.
+
ALTRETURN
Wechselt in/aus Vollbildmodus
+
ALTR or F5
Aktualisiert die aktuelle Seite.
+
ALTH
Öffnet die Startseite.
+
ALTD
Blendet das Downloads-Fenster ein und aus.
+
ALTF
Blendet die Suchleiste ein (Ausblenden mit ESC).
+
ALTB
Legt ein Lesezeichen an.
+
ALTM
Öffnet den Bookmarks-Ordner zum Verwalten von Lesezeichen.
One of WebPositive's unique features is its handling of bookmarks.
-
-
-
Web+ stores your bookmarks as files in Haiku's file system, and you can manage them with Tracker: ALTM will bring up your Bookmarks folder in Tracker. The files themselves are blank. Instead, Web+ stores each bookmark's URL and page title as attributes.
-
There are a number of advantages to this format; attribute storage is easy to filter and edit. Make sure that you first make the bookmark attributes visible from the Attributes menu in Tracker first. To add keywords to a bookmark, just right-click the bookmark in Tracker and choose Edit name, then use TAB to navigate to the keywords field. Once you're editing that field, type in your new keywords and press RETURN. You can edit the names, page titles and URLs of existing bookmarks with the same process.
-
-
WebPositive's approach toward bookmarks allows for quick searching. In Window | Preferences in Tracker, go to the Windows tab and choose Enable type-ahead filtering. Now, whenever you are in a bookmark-filled folder in Tracker, you can type phrases from the title, URL, or keywords of the bookmark you want and filter through the results. This tip is especially helpful if you fill in keywords beforehand. Note that it only works for flat folders and not hierarchies, so you will need to copy your bookmarks into one folder to use this.
Web+ also supports managing your downloads in a similar way. The Downloads window appears when you begin a download; you can call it up manually from the Windows menu. From here, you can open, restart, or remove previous downloads.
-
-
-
Much like it does with bookmarks, Web+ stores information about each download as an attribute. The original URL of the download remains an attribute of the file, so you can always return to the source of the file.
-
Web+ will update and adjust to changes to the downloaded files. Notice that sunday.pdf was deleted, so its icon was ghosted out in the Downloads window. documents.html was renamed from its original name of documents, and the Downloads window updated accordingly.
-
-
-
In the Web+ Settings, you can choose a default folder for downloads. However, if you need a download in a different place, just move it while downloading, and Web+ will continue to download. Moving the file to the Trash will cancel the download.
-
Closing Web+ will cancel your current downloads! Web+ will pop up a warning dialog if you have an ongoing download and try to quit.
Attribute sind Datenfelder, die zu einer Datei gehören ohne dabei ein Teil von ihr zu sein. So werden sie nicht zur Dateigröße dazugerechnet und können kopiert oder geändert werden ohne die Datei selbst anzufassen. Das System benutzt diese Attribute, um z.B. Größe, Dateityp oder das Datum der letzten Änderung zu speichern. Soweit ist das ähnlich wie bei anderen Betriebssystemen und deren Dateisystem.
-
Der Unterschied liegt darin, dass jede Art von Attribut an jedwede Datei gehängt werden kann und es in einem Trackerfenster dargestellt oder auch bearbeitet werden kann. Dazu muss nur die Art des Attributs definiert werden, das einem Dateityp hinzugefügt werden soll - z.B. Text, Zahl oder Zeit - und ein Name und eine Beschreibung vergeben werden.
+
Attribute sind Datenfelder, die zu einer Datei gehören ohne dabei ein Teil von ihr zu sein. So werden sie nicht zur Dateigröße dazugerechnet und können kopiert oder geändert werden ohne die Datei selbst anzufassen. Das System benutzt diese Attribute, um zum Beispiel Größe, Dateityp oder das Datum der letzten Änderung zu speichern. Soweit ist das ähnlich wie bei anderen Betriebssystemen und deren Dateisystem.
+
Der Unterschied liegt darin, dass jede Art von Attribut an jedwede Datei gehängt werden kann und es in einem Trackerfenster dargestellt oder auch bearbeitet werden kann. Dazu muss nur die Art des Attributs definiert werden, das einem Dateityp hinzugefügt werden soll - zum Beispiel Text, Zahl oder Zeit - und ein Name und eine Beschreibung vergeben werden.
Die Datei selbst muss dabei nicht mal einen Inhalt haben. People Dateien sind ein Beispiel dafür:
-
Wie man sieht, sind das alle 0 byte große Dateien mit angehängten Attributen. Das E-mail Attribut von "John Nox" wird gerade direkt im Tracker bearbeitet.
+
Wie man sieht, sind das alle 0 byte große Dateien mit angehängten Attributen. Das E-mail Attribut von "John Nox" wird gerade direkt im Tracker bearbeitet.
Werden diese Attribute indiziert, wie das mit People, Email oder Audio Dateien von Hause aus der Fall ist, kann man sie mit Haikus schnellem Query System durchsuchen.
Attribute werden ähnlich wie in einer Datenbank oder Tabellenkalkulation dargestellt. Im Tracker kann ausgewählt werden welche Attribute gezeigt werden sollen (Spalten) und die Dateiliste (Reihen) anschließend entsprechend sortiert werden.
-
Dazu öffnet man ein Trackerfenster und wählt aus dem Attributes Menü die darzustellenden Attribute aus. Oder man führt einen Rechtsklick auf einen Spaltentitel aus und wählt die entsprechenden Einträge aus dem Kontextmenü. Die Spalten können durch Ziehen der Spaltentitel verschoben werden. Um Spalten die man nicht braucht schnell zu entfernen, zieht man sie einfach ganz aus dem Fenster.
+
Attribute werden ähnlich wie in einer Datenbank oder Tabellenkalkulation dargestellt. Im Tracker kann ausgewählt werden, welche Attribute gezeigt werden sollen (Spalten), und die Dateiliste (Reihen) anschließend entsprechend sortiert werden.
+
Dazu öffnet man ein Trackerfenster und wählt aus dem Attributes Menü die darzustellenden Attribute aus. Oder man führt einen Rechtsklick auf einen Spaltentitel aus und wählt die entsprechenden Einträge aus dem Kontextmenü. Die Spalten können durch Ziehen der Spaltentitel verschoben werden. Um Spalten, die man nicht braucht, schnell zu entfernen, zieht man sie einfach ganz aus dem Fenster.
Ein Doppelklick auf die Trennlinie zweier Spaltentitel stellt automatisch die optimale Breite ein.
Klickt man auf einen Spaltentitel, ändert sich die Sortierreihenfolge von auf- zu absteigend. Hält man SHIFT gedrückt während man auf einen Spaltentitel klickt, lässt sich eine zweite Sortierung einrichten. So kann man zum Beispiel seine People Dateien nach Firmen sortieren und innerhalb dieser Sortierung nach Kontaktnamen. Obiger Screenshot zeigt ein Beispiel dafür. Die zweite Sortierordnung ist mit einem helleren Pfeil neben dem Titel gekennzeichnet.
Diese Attribute zu bearbeiten ist genauso einfach wie das Umbenennen einer Datei: Entweder klickt man auf einen Eintrag oder drückt ALTE und bewegt sich zwischen den Attributen mit TAB und SHIFTTAB. ESC verlässt den Bearbeitungsmodus ohne die Änderungen zu übernehmen.
Für alle, die die Kommandozeile bevorzugen oder vor haben mit vielen Dateien via Skript zu arbeiten, gibt es eine Reihe von Befehlen, um Attribute vom Terminal aus zu bearbeiten.
+
Für alle, die die Kommandozeile bevorzugen oder vorhaben, mit vielen Dateien via Skript zu arbeiten, gibt es eine Reihe von Befehlen, um Attribute vom Terminal aus zu bearbeiten.
"Skripten" bezeichnet die Technik Prozesse zu automatisieren, indem
Befehle aneinandergereiht werden und das Ganze als Textdatei, ein
-sogenanntes "Skript", abgespeichert wird. Jedes mal wenn so ein Skript
+sogenanntes "Skript", abgespeichert wird. Jedes Mal wenn so ein Skript
aufgerufen wird, werden die Befehle nacheinander so ausgeführt, als ob
man sie per Hand ins Terminal eingegeben hätte.
Skripte können zum einfachen Ausführen weniger Befehle in einer
@@ -66,7 +67,7 @@ auch komplexe Aufgaben lösen.
Da Skripten natürlich stark auf die Konsole für die sie geschrieben wurden aufbauen, sollte man sich zuerst mit der BASH vertraut machen, die von Haiku benutzt wird. Dank ihrer weiten Verbreitung, existieren für diese Konsole viele Ressourcen online. Johan Jansson's Introduction to bash - a tutorial for bash under BeOS ist ein lesenswertes Dokument.
+
Da Skripten natürlich stark auf die Konsole für die sie geschrieben wurden aufbauen, sollte man sich zuerst mit der BASH vertraut machen, die von Haiku benutzt wird. Dank ihrer weiten Verbreitung existieren für diese Konsole viele Ressourcen online. Johan Janssons Introduction to bash - a tutorial for bash under BeOS ist ein lesenswertes Dokument.
@@ -81,7 +82,7 @@ Falls sie noch nicht existieren, muss man die benötigten Dateien selbst anlegen
/boot/home/config/boot/UserBootscript wird ausgeführt nachdem das System komplett hochgefahren wurde. Man kann zum Beispiel einige Programme aufrufen, die dann nach jedem Hochfahren automatisch gestartet werden:
+
/boot/home/config/boot/UserBootscript wird ausgeführt, nachdem das System komplett hochgefahren wurde. Man kann zum Beispiel einige Programme aufrufen, die dann nach jedem Hochfahren automatisch gestartet werden:
Mit dem "Haiku Boot Loader" kann man zum einen unterschiedliche Haiku-Installationen starten, zum anderen hardware-spezifische Probleme umgehen. Ebenso ist es damit möglich, während einer Software-Installation hinzugefügte Systemerweiterungen vorübergehend zu deaktivieren (über den unten bezeichneten Punkt Disable user add-ons), um eventuell aufgetretene Fehler zu beheben.
-
Um zum Bildschirm der Boot Loader Optionen zu gelangen, muss man noch vor Beginn des Boot-Prozesses SHIFT gedrückt halten. Ist ein Bootmanager installiert, kann man das bereits tun bevor man dort den Haiku-Eintrag auswählt. Ist Haiku das einzige Betriebssystem auf dem Rechner, kann die Taste schon gehalten werden während noch die BIOS Meldungen zu sehen sind.
+
Um zum Bildschirm der Boot Loader Optionen zu gelangen, muss man noch vor Beginn des Boot-Prozesses SHIFT gedrückt halten. Ist ein Bootmanager installiert, kann man das bereits tun, bevor man dort den Haiku-Eintrag auswählt. Ist Haiku das einzige Betriebssystem auf dem Rechner, kann die Taste schon gehalten werden, während noch die BIOS Meldungen zu sehen sind.
Im Boot Loader hat man vier Auswahlmöglichkeiten:
@@ -88,16 +89,16 @@
Nach der Auswahl einer oder mehrerer Optionen kann man über das Hauptmenü den eigentlichen Boot-Vorgang starten. Es erscheint daraufhin folgender Bildschirm:
-
Wenn Haiku ordnungsgemäß bootet, leuchten nacheinander alle Icons auf und das System wechselt zum Desktop.
+
Wenn Haiku ordnungsgemäß bootet, leuchten nacheinander alle Icons auf, und das System wechselt zum Desktop.
Die unterschiedlichen Symbole repräsentieren die verschiedenen Phasen des Boot-Vorganges:
Atom
Die einzelnen Kernel-Module werden geladen.
Laufwerk + Lupe
Die Boot-Partition wird gesucht und spezielle Dateisysteme angelegt (rootfs: / und /dev).
-
Steckkarte
Der Geräte-Manager, der sich um die Zuteilung von Systemressourcen an die einzelnen Hardware-Komponenten kümmert wird geladen.
+
Steckkarte
Der Geräte-Manager, der sich um die Zuteilung von Systemressourcen an die einzelnen Hardware-Komponenten kümmert, wird geladen.
Boot-Laufwerk
Die vorher gefundene Boot-Partition wird in das Dateisystem eingebunden.
Chip
Spezielle Hauptprozessor-Module werden geladen.
Ordner
Alle Subsysteme werden aktiviert.
-
Rakete
Die Boot-Skripte werden abgearbeitet und anschließend der Desktop gestartet.
+
Rakete
Die Boot-Skripte werden abgearbeitet, anschließend wird der Desktop gestartet.
Solange die Übersetzung dieser Seite noch nicht ganz fertig ist, erscheint für die noch fehlenden Teile die englische Version.
NetworkStatus
@@ -59,20 +58,20 @@
Ort:
/boot/system/apps/NetworkStatus
Einstellungen:
keine
-
NetworkStatus shows the status of your network connections. If not yet running, launching the applet will ask if it should open in window mode or live in the Deskbar. In window mode you're able to resize the icon by resizing the window and use the Replicant handle to drag it to the Desktop.
-Wherever installed, it's operated via a right-click context menu.
-
-The first section contains all network devices' names and their state. Clicking on such an entry brings up a window showing its IP, broadcast and netmask address.
-Below is a list of all wireless networks found by the first wireless adapter and an indicator of their signal strength.
-Lastly, you can Open network preferences... to change your network configuration or Quit the applet.
+
NetworkStatus informiert über den aktuellen Zustand der Netzwerkverbindung. Wenn das Programm nicht schon läuft, kann man beim Start entscheiden, ob das Applet in einem Fenster laufen oder in die Deskbar installiert werden soll. Im Fenstermodus kann die Symbolgröße geändert werden, indem man die Fenstergröße anpasst, bevor man es am Replikanten-Symbol packt und auf den Desktop zieht.
+Wo das Applet auch installiert ist, bedient wird es per Rechtsklick über ein Kontextmenü.
+
+Der oberste Bereich zeigt alle Netzwerkgeräte und deren momentaner Zustand. Der Klick auf einen Eintrag öffnet ein Fenster mit dessen IP-, Broadcast- und Netzmasken-Adresse.
+Darunter befindet sich eine Liste aller vom ersten Wifi-Adapter gefundenen Funknetzwerke und deren Signalstärke.
+Zu guter Letzt lassen sich aus dem Menü noch die Netzwerkeinstellungen öffnen... um die Netzwerk-Konfiguration zu ändern und das Applet Beenden.
Solange die Übersetzung dieser Seite noch nicht ganz fertig ist, erscheint für die noch fehlenden Teile die englische Version.
PowerStatus
Deskbar:
Desktop Applets
Ort:
/boot/system/apps/PowerStatus
-
Settings:
~/config/settings/PowerStatus settings
+
Einstellungen:
~/config/settings/PowerStatus settings
-
PowerStatus shows information about the battery level, so it's only useful on mobile computers. If not yet running, launching the applet will ask if it should open in window mode or live in the Deskbar. In window mode you're able to resize the icon by resizing the window and use the Replicant handle to drag it to the Desktop.
-Wherever installed, it's operated via a right-click context menu.
-
Note: PowerStatus requires a working ACPI support.
+
PowerStatus zeigt den Ladezustand des Akkus, ist also nur für Mobile Computer relevant. Wenn das Programm nicht schon läuft, kann man beim Start entscheiden, ob das Applet in einem Fenster laufen oder in die Deskbar installiert werden soll. Im Fenstermodus kann die Symbolgröße geändert werden, indem man die Fenstergröße anpasst, bevor man es am Replikanten-Symbol packt und auf den Desktop zieht.
+Wo das Applet auch installiert ist, bedient wird es per Rechtsklick über ein Kontextmenü.
+
PowerStatus setzt übrigens eine funktionierende ACPI-Unterstützung voraus.
-
The context menu offers these options:
+
Das Kontextmenü beherbergt die folgenden Optionen:
-
Show text label
Shows battery level in percent or remaining time.
-
Show status icon
Shows icon of the applet.
-
Show percent / time
Switch between showing battery level in percent or remaining time (Show text label has to be active).
-
Battery info...
Shows the extended battery info window.
-
About...
Shows the About window.
-
Quit
Quits the PowerStatus applet.
+
Show text label
Zeigt den Ladezustand in Prozent oder als verbleibende Laufzeit.
+
Show status icon
Zeigt das Symbol des Applets.
+
Show percent / time
Anzeige entweder in Prozent oder als verbleibende Laufzeit (Show text label muss dazu aktiviert sein).
+
Battery info...
Zeigt weitere Informationen über den Akku.
+
About...
Zeigt Informationen über PowerStatus.
+
Quit
Beendet das PowerStatus Applet.
-
When Show text label is active, the battery level is shown in brackets while charging.
+
Ist Show text label aktiviert, wird der Ladezustand während des Aufladens in Klammern dargestellt.
Im ersten Reiter, Colors, lassen sich die Farben einiger Teile der Oberfläche einstellen. In das Farbfeld können Farben per Drag & Drop aus anderen Programmen, wie z.B. WonderBrush, Icon-O-Matic oder dem Backgrounds Panel, gezogen werden.
+
Im ersten Reiter, Colors, lassen sich die Farben einiger Teile der Oberfläche einstellen. In das Farbfeld können Farben per Drag & Drop aus anderen Programmen, wie zum Beispiel WonderBrush, Icon-O-Matic oder dem Backgrounds Panel, gezogen werden.
@@ -78,7 +79,7 @@ Glyph Hinting
Hinting: aus
Hinting: an
-
Es sei angemerkt, dass alle Magnify Fenster auf dieser Seite natürlich auch selbst mit den verschiedenen Optionen dargestellt werden. So bekommt man einen echten Eindruck der Einstellungen, indem man z.B. die fetten Titel der Fensterreiter vergleicht, oder den Text "33 x 15 @ 8 pixels/pixel".
+
Es sei angemerkt, dass alle Magnify Fenster auf dieser Seite natürlich auch selbst mit den verschiedenen Optionen dargestellt werden. So bekommt man einen echten Eindruck der Einstellungen, indem man zum Beispiel die fetten Titel der Fensterreiter vergleicht, oder den Text "33 x 15 @ 8 pixels/pixel".
@@ -99,8 +100,8 @@ Antialiasing Typ
Ganz unten im Fenster befinden sich zwei Buttons:
-
Defaults
stellt die Standardwerte wieder her.
-
Revert
setzt wieder die Werte, die aktiv waren als das Appearance Panel gestartet wurde.
+
Standardwerte
setzt alles auf Standardwerte zurück.
+
Anfangswerte
setzt wieder die Werte, die aktiv waren, als das Appearance Panel gestartet wurde.
Für jeden Ordner und für den Desktop von jedem Workspace, lassen sich eigene Hintergrundfarben oder -grafiken auswählen.
-
Im Menü ganz oben lässt sich einstellen, ob die Änderungen nur für den aktuellen Workspace, alle Workspaces, einem bestimmten Ordner oder für alle neu angelegten Ordner gelten sollen.
-
Unter "Image" kann ein Hintergrundbild ausgewählt werden. Ein Bild lässt sich auch in die Vorschau links ziehen; es wird dann automatisch übernommen. Wählt man im Menü None bekommt man einen einfachen einfarbigen Hintergrund.
-
Wird ein Hintergrundbild verwendet, kann unter "Placement" dessen Plazierung eingestellt werden:
+
Im Menü ganz oben lässt sich einstellen, ob die Änderungen nur für den aktuellen Workspace, alle Workspaces, einen bestimmten Ordner oder für alle neu angelegten Ordner gelten sollen.
+
Unter "Image" kann ein Hintergrundbild ausgewählt werden. Ein Bild lässt sich auch in die Vorschau links ziehen; es wird dann automatisch übernommen. Wählt man im Menü None, bekommt man einen einfachen einfarbigen Hintergrund.
+
Wird ein Hintergrundbild verwendet, kann unter "Placement" dessen Platzierung eingestellt werden:
Manual
Das Bild kann in der Vorschau verschoben werden. Zur genaueren Positionierung lassen sich auch X- und Y-Koordinaten eingeben.
Center
Zentriert das Bild in der Bildschirmmitte.
@@ -74,7 +75,7 @@
Ob die Icon-Beschriftung auf dem Desktop schwarz oder weiß dargestellt wird, entscheidet der Farbeinsteller. Eine dunkle Farbwahl erzeugt weißen Text, eine helle umgekehrt schwarzen. Wenn man also beispielsweise ein sehr helles Hintergrundbild verwenden will, sollte man auch den Farbeinsteller entsprechend hell einstellen, damit der Icon-Text in schwarz erscheint. (Oder man benutzt die erwähnte Kontur-Option.)
Die ausgewählte Farbe findet sich auch im Workspaces Applet wieder, welches eventuell benutzte Hintergrundbilder ignoriert.
-
Revert
setzt die Einstellungen auf die Werte zurück, die beim Start des Backgrounds Panels aktiv waren.
+
Anfangswerte
setzt die Einstellungen auf die Werte zurück, die beim Start des Backgrounds Panels aktiv waren.
Haiku verwendet systemweit drei verschiedene Schriftarten. Sie können hier unter "Plain font" (normale Schrift), "Bold font" (fett) und "Fixed font" (Schrift mit fester Buchstabenbreite) festgelegt werden. Daneben kann auch noch die Schriftart für Menüs eingestellt werden.
-
Defaults
stellt die Standardwerte wieder her.
-
Revert
stellt den Zustand wieder her, der beim Start von "Fonts" aktiv war.
+
Standardwerte
setzt alles auf Standardwerte zurück.
+
Anfangswerte
stellt den Zustand wieder her, der beim Start von "Fonts" aktiv war.
Neue Schriftarten werden installiert, indem sie an ihren Platz im Dateisystem kopiert werden. Diese sind: /boot/common/fonts/, beziehungsweise /boot/home/config/fonts/ (unter Filesystem Layout wird der Unterschied dieser beiden Speicherorte näher erläutert).
+
Neue Schriftarten werden installiert, indem sie an ihren Platz im Dateisystem kopiert werden. Diese sind: /boot/common/data/fonts/, beziehungsweise /boot/home/config/data/fonts/ (unter Filesystem Layout wird der Unterschied dieser beiden Speicherorte näher erläutert).
Hier kann die Wiederholrate für einen Tastendruck und die Verzögerung eingestellt werden, die das System wartet, bis eine gedrückte Taste wiederholt wird. Die Einstellungen können in dem Textfeld getestet werden.
-
Defaults
stellt die Standardwerte wieder her.
-
Revert
stellt die Einstellungen wieder her, die aktiv waren als Keyboard gestartet wurde.
+
Standardwerte
setzt alles auf Standardwerte zurück.
+
Anfangswerte
stellt die Einstellungen wieder her, die aktiv waren als Keyboard gestartet wurde.
Im ersten Auswahlmenü werden alle konfigurierbaren Netzwerk-Adapter angezeigt.
Nach der Auswahl des Netzwerk-Adapters kann über das zweite Auswahlmenü die Art der Netzwerk-Konfiguration gewählt werden. Entweder per DHCP oder mittels einer statischen Netzwerk-Adresse. Bei letzterem müssen dann die für die jeweilige Netzwerk-Umgebung richtigen Werte bei IP-Adresse, Netmask, Gateway und DNS-Server eingetragen werden.
-
Revert
die Werte und Einstellungen, die beim Öffnen von Network aktiv waren werden wieder hergestellt.
+
Anfangswerte
die Werte und Einstellungen, die beim Öffnen von Network aktiv waren werden wieder hergestellt.
Jeder Workspace kann seine eigene Bildschirmauflösung und Farbtiefe haben.
Im oberen Dropdown Menü kann ausgewählt werden, ob Änderungen nur den derzeitigen oder alle Workspaces betreffen. In den anderen beiden Dropdown Menüs können, abhängig von der Grafikkarte, alle unterstützten Bildschirmauflösungen und Farbtiefen gewählt werden.
-
Nach einem Klick auf Apply werden die Änderungen sofort übernommen und es erscheint eine Alarmmeldung ob die Einstellungen behalten werden, oder rückgängig gemacht werden sollen. Falls nach 12 Sekunden keine Antwort erfolgt ist, werden alle Änderungen auf den vorherigen Stand zurückgesetzt. Hilfreich, falls der Monitor die gewählten Einstellungen nicht unterstützt, und die Alarmmeldung nicht sichtbar ist.
+
Nach einem Klick auf Apply werden die Änderungen sofort übernommen, und es erscheint eine Alarmmeldung, ob die Einstellungen behalten werden oder rückgängig gemacht werden sollen. Falls nach 12 Sekunden keine Antwort erfolgt ist, werden alle Änderungen auf den vorherigen Stand zurückgesetzt. Hilfreich, falls der Monitor die gewählten Einstellungen nicht unterstützt, und die Alarmmeldung nicht sichtbar ist.
Auf der linken Seite kann die Anzahl der Workspaces gewählt werden und diese in Spalten und Zeilen eingeteilt werden, sowie die Hintergrund Einstellungen geöffnet werden.
-
Revert setzt alle Einstellungen auf die Werte zurück die beim starten der Bildschirmeinstellungen aktiv waren.
+
Revert setzt alle Einstellungen auf die Werte zurück, die beim Starten der Bildschirmeinstellungen aktiv waren.
@@ -69,8 +69,8 @@ Je größer die Beschleunigung, desto schneller scrollt eine Liste wenn man den
Wer mit diesem Feature zurecht kommt, der kann auf Scroll-Bereiche verzichten und das gesamte Touchpad zum normalen Navigieren nutzen
Ganz unten ist noch ein Regler zum einstellen der Berührungsempfindlichkeit. Werden Klicks per Antippen immer wieder ignoriert, sollte man die Empfindlichkeit erhöhen. Werden im Gegenteil immer irgendwelche Klicks registriert, obwohl eigentlich nur der Mauszeiger bewegt werden soll, sollte sie verringert werden.
-
Defaults
stellt die Standardwerte wieder her.
-
Revert
setzt wieder die Werte, die aktiv waren als das Touchpad Panel gestartet wurde.
+
Standardwerte
setzt alles auf Standardwerte zurück.
+
Anfangswerte
setzt wieder die Werte, die aktiv waren als das Touchpad Panel gestartet wurde.
Folgender Tip bezieht sich nicht so sehr auf dieses Einstellungs Panel, sondern auf die Nutzung von Touchpads allgemein:
Wusstest Du, dass man ein Drag & Drop nur per Touchpad ausführen kann, also ohne die Tasten zu benutzen? Dazu macht einfach einen Doppelklick, ohne jedoch den Finger nach dem zweiten Klick anzuheben. Das so aufgenommene Icon hängt nun am Mauszeiger und kann mit dem Finger auf dem Touchpad umher bewegt werden. Hebt man den Finger, wird das Icon fallen gelassen.
Das Auslagern von RAM-Inhalten in einen virtuellen Hauptspeicher und das Zurückschreiben hat natürlich sehr viele Festplattenoperationen zur Folge. Hierdurch kann die Systempartition verlangsamt werden. Wenn im System eine weiter Festplatte vorhanden ist, bietet es sich an, den virtuellen Hauptspeicher auf diese zu legen.
Für virtuellen Hauptspeicher im Vergleich zu echtem RAM gilt: mehr RAM ist immer besser als mehr virtueller Speicher.
-
Defaults
stellt die Standardwerte wieder her.
-
Revert
setzt die Werte auf den Wert zurück, die aktiviert waren, als VirtualMemory gestartet wurde.
+
Standardwerte
setzt alles auf Standardwerte zurück.
+
Anfangswerte
setzt die Werte auf den Wert zurück, die aktiviert waren, als VirtualMemory gestartet wurde.
Mit dem Twitcher kann auf einfache Weise zwischen laufenden Anwendungen und ihren Fenstern gewechselt werden.
-
Mit CTRLTAB wechselt man zwischen der aktuellen und der zuletzt aktiven Anwendung. Wenn CTRLTAB schnell mehrfach gedrückt wird, wechselt man durch alle Anwendungen. Durch Drücken und Halten von CTRLTAB kann man mittels wiederholtem Drücken von TAB oder ← / → zum gewünschten Programm wechseln. Zu einem speziellen Fenster einer Anwendung gelangt man, durch Drücken von ↑ oder ↓ wenn das Anwendungs-Icon hinterlegt ist.
-
Man kann durch alle Fenster einer Anwendung im aktuellen Workspace wechsenl, indem man CTRL~ drückt. Die Tilde ist je nach Tastaturlayout an unterschiedlichen Stellen; im Deutschen ist sie neben der Return-Taste).
+
Mit CTRLTAB wechselt man zwischen der aktuellen und der zuletzt aktiven Anwendung. Wenn CTRLTAB schnell mehrfach gedrückt wird, wechselt man durch alle Anwendungen. Durch Drücken und Halten von CTRLTAB kann man mittels wiederholtem Drücken von TAB oder ← / → zum gewünschten Programm wechseln. Zu einem speziellen Fenster einer Anwendung gelangt man durch Drücken von ↑ oder ↓, wenn das Anwendungs-Icon hinterlegt ist.
+
Man kann durch alle Fenster einer Anwendung im aktuellen Workspace wechseln, indem man CTRL~ drückt. Die Tilde ist je nach Tastaturlayout an unterschiedlichen Stellen; im Deutschen ist sie neben der Return-Taste.
Es ist auch möglich, den Twitcher über CTRLTAB aufzurufen, und dann das gewünschte Programm, beziehungsweise das Programmfenster mit der Maus auszuwählen; hierbei ist aber die CTRL-Taste gedrückt zu halten.
Der Twitcher hat zusätzlich noch einige Tastaturkürzel:
ESC
Beendet den Twitcher und das letzte aktive Programm ist wieder aktiviert.
Zuerst sollten wir uns Gedanken machen, welche Dateitypen und Attribute benötigt werden. Ursprünglich war geplant, Bookmark-Dateien mit einem Link zum Eintrag des Films in der IMdB zu verwenden. Da aber Haiku bislang noch keinen Browser hat, der mit solchen Bookmark-Dateien umgehen kann (im Gegensatz zu NetPositive unter BeOS), verwenden wir ein JPEG-Bild für das DVD-Cover.
+
Zuerst sollten wir uns Gedanken machen, welche Dateitypen und Attribute benötigt werden. Ursprünglich war geplant, Bookmark-Dateien mit einem Link zum Eintrag des Films in der IMDb zu verwenden. Da aber Haiku bislang noch keinen Browser hat, der mit solchen Bookmark-Dateien umgehen kann (im Gegensatz zu NetPositive unter BeOS), verwenden wir ein JPEG-Bild für das DVD-Cover.
An dieses Bild hängen wir eine Reihe von Attributen. Hier müssen wir uns entscheiden, welche Art von Attributen wir verwenden - Zahlen oder Text - und welche davon in einer Suchabfrage gefunden werden sollen.
This page is currently only a first draft. Please check back later for a refined version.
-
-
MediaPlayer is an application used for viewing multimedia files such as music or video files. It supports different formats.
-
-
Interface
-
-
MediaPlayer is easy-to-use because of its interface. There's no difference in interface while playing music or video.
-
+
MediaPlayer is the default player for all audio and video files. Thanks to it's ffmpeg backend, a plethora of widely used formats are supported. Its simple interface has all the controls you'd expect:
+
The slider of the progress bar allows you to quickly skim to a position, resting the mouse over it shows the current and remaining time of the clip. Clicking on the time display to the right of it, toggles between length, current and remaining time.
+Below that you find the usual controls to skip to the previous track, play/pause, stop and jump to the next track. Then comes a volume control (clicking the speaker symbol toggles muting) and a VU meter.
-
You can control playing media using a set of buttons - previous, play/pause, stop, next. Also, there is a progress bar, a volume controler and even an oscilloscope.
+
Audio and video playback
+
Since there aren't any specific features for for audio playback, we'll go straight to video or general features.
+
+
Available to all media is the File info... (ALTI). It shows information about the currently loaded file, like playing time or details of the audio/video track and its codec.
+
Most of the often used commands from the menus are also available from a right-click context menu on the video area. Convenient when in full-screen mode.
+Under Video you'll find options to zoom the window to various levels or force the aspect ratio to some standard values. Leaving the aspect ration to the default Stream settings should work best for correctly encoded files.
+
MediaPlayer supports subtitles in SRT format. To have them show up under Subtitles, their filenames have to be identical to their video file, with a suffixed language name and ".srt" instead of the video's extension. For example:
Multiple audio tracks, most often used for several languages inside one video file, are available from the Audio track submenu. The Video | Track submenu offers the same when having multiple video streams available.
+
You can toggle the Full screen mode (ALTENTER or F or a double left-click), hide MediaPlayer's window borders and controls with Hide interface (ALTH or a double right-click) or have it's window Always on top (ALTA).
-
Once you play a video file, you can double right-click on the display to hide interface. Double left-click instead causes displaying video in full-screen mode.
+
Playlists
+
MediaPlayer | Playlist... (ALTP) opens a window with the files currently queued up for playback. Double-clicking an entry starts playing it.
+
+
You can add more files by dropping them into the list and rearrange their position via drag & drop. From the Edit menu you can Randomize or Remove (DEL) an entry from the list or delete the actual file with Move to Trash (ALTT).
+
Of course, you can Save a playlist and later Open it again, or start it with simply double-clicking the playlist file.
-
Playing media
+
Settings
+
There are several settings to fine-tune MediaPlayer's behavior:
+
+
The first batch, Play mode, is pretty self-explaining. Start playback automatically, close windows when finished or play clips in a loop.
+
Next are different View options.
+You can opt to Use hardware overlay if available, which cuts down CPU usage but only works for one video window and needs a supporting video card driver.
+You can Scale movies smoothly (when not in overlay mode) which uses very fast filtering to smooth over otherwise blocky pixels when zooming video or watching in full-screen mode.
+Scale controls in full-screen mode if you prefer slightly bigger controls, maybe because you watch the screen from a bit farther away when in full-screen mode.
+Then there are settings for Subtitle size and Subtitle placement. They can be shown at the Bottom of video, which will always have them overlayed over the picture. Or Bottom of window, which allows you to resize the window vertically and have the subtitles appear in the black bar at the bottom instead.
+
The last setting determines the volume of clips whose windows are not currently active. You can have them all blaring at Full volume, at less confusing Low volume or quietly Muted.
-
There are options especially useful while watching DVD video or other files which include different audio/video tracks or have subtitles included. You can change audio tracks from Audio | Track just as Video | Track for various video tracks. You can also make use of subtitles, MediaPlayer supports .srt format. All available subtitles are showed as options in Video | Subtitles menu. The player gets names for this positions from the filename, eg. videoclip.english.srt shows as "english" in the menu.
+
Keyboard controls
+
MediaPlayer offers convenient key combinations to control playback without using the mouse.
+
+
Z
Skip to previous track
+
X
Play
+
C
Pause
+
V
Stop
+
B
Skip to next track
+
+
These keys are assigned to the functions of the control buttons. They are always the bottom left letter keys on the keyboard, i.e. they are used independently of your current keymapping. The above keys correspond to a standard US-american keymap.
+
+
→
Seek forwards
+
SHIFT→
Jump forwards 10 seconds
+
ALT→
Jump forwards 30 seconds
+
←
Seek backwards
+
SHIFT←
Jump backwards 10 seconds
+
ALT←
Jump backwards 30 seconds
-
+
↑
Increase volume
+
↓
Decrease volume
-
You can change the scale by resizing the window or simply from the Video menu. There are 50%, 100%, 200%, 300% and 400% options. There is an option to change the player to full-screen mode or to change ratio of the display.
-
-
Playlists
-
-
MediaPlayer supports playlists. You can either select a few files in Tracker using ALT and launched the application or add other files after launching the one using the drag and drop method. You can get to the playlist from menu - choose MediaPlayer | Playlist and the playlist window will pop-up.
-
-
-
-
You can save the current playlist or open one from the playlist window, of course. There is also a function that lets you to randomize your playlist. Use either Edit | Randomize menu position or ALTR shortcut. You can also both remove any file from playlist and remove it from playlist and put into Trash. This functions are available from Edit menu, too.
-
-
Other options
-
-
If you would like to rate a file, you can do this directly from MediaPlayer, too! Choose a rate from 1 to 10 from Attributes | Rating menu.
-
-
MediaPlayer is also able to show you some information about the file you play. It is available from MediaPlayer | File info... menu.
-
-
-
-
You can configure the application from MediaPlayer | Settings. There are some interesting options concerning looping playback, closing window when playback finishes, size and placement of subtitles or volume level while playing in the background.
-
-
Shortcuts
-
-
There are plenty of shortcuts for this application. SPACEBAR is used to play/pause the playback. You can control the whole playback with one hand, because alternate keys are used - Z to go to the previous track, X to play, C to pause and V to go to the next track. Left/Right cursors are used to seek, they cause 10 seconds seeking while ALT is pressed at the same time. Up and down cursors controls the volume and cause going to the previous/next track while ALT is pressed.
-
-
ALTF activates full-screen mode, ALTP pops-up playlist window, ALTI shows file information, ALTH hides interface, ALTA causes MediaPlayer is always on top, ALTS moves you to the settings window and ALTQ quits the application.
+
ALT↑
Skip to previous Track
+
ALT↓
Skip to next Track
+
Spacebar
Toggle play/pause
+
ALTENTER
Toggle full-screen mode (also done by double left-clicking the video area)
This page is currently only a first draft. Please check back later for a refined version.
-
MidiPlayer is a audio player that supports playback of .mid music files.
-
Two ways to play a MIDI file in MidiPlayer can be either:
-
-
using drag&drop technique and moving music file over the black area saying “Drop MIDI file here”
-
opening a midi file right away by double clicking on it.
-
+
As the name suggests, MidiPlayer is used to playback midi music files. Midi files are special, as they don't contain the actual digitized and in some way encoded music, but only a description of it: Hold this note for that long with this volume and use instrument X for it.
+While this keeps file sizes pretty small, it also follows that depending on the instrument library (the so-called "SoundFont") the results can differ hugely. Also, these SoundFonts tend to be quite large, increasingly so with the number and quality of the instrument samples.
+
Haiku doesn't come with a SoundFont installed, because they are so large and only few people generally need one. Most of those who do, already have high quality or custom SoundFonts. To be able to at least hear something you can install a free one from an optional package. In Terminal, enter: installoptionalpackage TimGMSoundFont
+
To use any other SoundFont, create a link to it in /boot/system/data/synth and name it big_synth.sy.
-
MidiPlayer comes with some additional features that extend the end user experience.
-
Besides volume slider you can apply some sound enhancements such as garage or cavern reverb or choose from available live audio input sources (not shown in example above).
-
Enabling a scope during a song playback applies a visualization of a track in a form of oscilloscope running on the black area.
+
MidiPlayer's interface is very simple. Just double-click or drag & drop a midi file and playback starts. You control the volume with the slider and add reverb effects from the Reverb pop-up menu. Activating the scope will show a visualization in form of an oscilloscope running at the top.
@@ -56,44 +56,54 @@ double-clicking a supported file.
Settings:
~/config/settings/ShowImage_settings
-
This page is currently only a first draft. Please check back later for a refined version.
-
ShowImage is an application used for viewing images in various formats. Its funcionality is not limited only to viewing photos, it can also crop images, show slideshows, rotate and flip images.
-
-
If you want to launch this application, simply double-click on some image on your computer.
-
-
Browse photos
-
-
You are not limited to viewing only the image you used to launch application. You can go both to previous or to next image from the folder using arrows on keybord. You can also zoom using either mouse scroll or shortcuts - ALT+ for zooming in and ALT- for zooming out. High-quality zooming is set by default, but you can disable this function unchecking View | High-quality zooming. This function does very fast bilinear filtering.
-
-
There is a possibility to simply zoom picture to the original size or to fit to the window size. Use View menu or shortcuts - ALT1 to get back to the original size or ALT0 to fit to the window size. From the same menu you can also enable stretching an image to the window.
-
-
-
-
ShowImage does support multiple-page files, such as TIFF. It means you can turn pages while browsing any multiple-page image. Make use of Browse menu or use shortcuts (see screenshot above) for this function.
-
-
To change mode to full-screen, simply choose ALTENTER shortcut.
-
-
Slide show
-
-
You can run slideshow using menu, simply choose View | Slide show. There is an option for changing slide delay from 3 to 20 seconds. Default value is a 3 second delay, but you can change it from View | Slide delay menu.
-
-
Flip and rotate images
-
-
This function is also built-in. If you would like to rotate some image, choose proper position from Image menu or use shortcuts - ALTR will rorate your image clockwise and SHIFTALTR counterclockwise.
-
-
You can also flip images. Image | Flip left to right will flip your image horizontally and Image | Flip top to bottom vertically.
-
-
Set background
-
-
You can set your desktop background directly from ShowImage. Just choose Image | Use as background... and Backgrounds preflet will pop-up.
-
-
Drag and drop
-
-
There is an option to select a piece of an image and create new image file from the selection. Simply press CTRL or ALT and select a fragment you would like to use as a new file and drag the selection to desktop. Also, you can change mode to selection mode, so you will be able to select parts of images using just a left mouse button. This option is available from Edit | Selection Mode
-
-
-
-
Once you use right mouse button to drag the selection, an image-format menu pops-up.
+
ShowImage allows you to view images in all formats that are supported through DataTranslators. New formats are automatically recognized when their translator is added to the system. This has been done for Haiku's vector icon files, WonderBrush images or when WebM images became available, for example.
+ShowImage provides minimal editing features to crop, rotate and flip images and to save them in another format.
+
Viewing
+
+
The View menu offers to start a Slide show of all images in a folder (or query result window) and set a Slide delay from 2 to 20 seconds.
+
Other commands apply to the currently displayed image (without changing the size of the window):
+Original size shows the image with a 100% zoom factor.
+Fit to window shrinks the image back into the window fame, e.g. after having zoomed into it or after resizing the window.
+Zoom in and Zoom out move into and out of the image in 10% steps. Zooming is also done with the mouse wheel; to pan an image bigger than the window, simply left-click and drag your mouse around.
+
Two settings don't just apply to the currently displayed image and are remembered when browsing from one image to the next:
+High quality zooming applies a very fast filter when zooming to reduce jagged lines and produce a smoother result.
+Stretch to window will stretch smaller images to fill the current window frame.
+
Then there's a Full screen mode with an option to Show caption in full screen mode which overlays the file name at the bottom of the image.
+
Lastly, Show tool bar will show/hide the graphical controls:
+
+
From left to right: Previous image, next image, start slide show (in full screen mode), selection mode, original size, fit to window, zoom in, zoom out.
+
Most of the more often used commands are also available from a right-click context menu on the image. Convenient when in full-screen mode.
+
Browsing
+
+
After opening an image you can quickly browse through all the other images in its folder (or query result window) by pressing ↑/↓ or ←/→. You can see the selection change accordingly in the Tracker window.
+
There is a quick way to open the folder of the current image and even navigate to its parent and subfolders. It works just like with drill-down navigating in Tracker by clicking in the info area in the status bar that shows size and format of the current image.
+
Looking at the Browse menu, shows another type of browsing: Some image formats, like TIFF, can contain several pages in one file. Commands like First page and Next page let you navigate those pages.
+
Editing
+
+
The Image menu offers the few image manipulations necessary for an image viewer: rotating and flipping the image. Note however, that the actual image data won't be changed. Only an attribute is added to the file so it'll be shown rotated or flipped the next time you open it.
+
Use as backgroud... will open the Backgrounds preferences to set the current picture as image for your workspaces.
+
Cropping is another feature that's needed sometimes. To define the frame to cut to, you can switch to Selection mode from the Edit menu and drag out a box with your left mouse button. If you don't want to change modes first, you can create this box in "normal mode" by simply holding CTRL while left-click-dragging, which otherwise would just pan the image around.
+Clear selection or ESC will remove the selection box.
+
The following chapter shows how to actually save the cropped area.
+
Saving and converting
+
To save or convert an image into any available format, you can invoke the normal Save as... item from the File menu, select the format and choose a file name.
+Often quicker, especially when the Tracker window with the destination folder is already open, is using drag & drop.
+
+
This is also how the above mentioned cropping is finalized. Either select a frame as described above, or choose Edit | Select all for the whole image. Then drag & drop the selection onto the Desktop or any Tracker window to create a new image clipping in the same format of the original image.
+
To save in another file format, do the dragging with the right mouse button and choose a format from the context menu when dropping the image.
+
Keyboard shortcuts
+
Here's a list of the most useful shortcuts:
+
+
← / ↑
Previous image
+
→ / ↓
Next image
+
DEL
Move to Trash
+
+
Zoom in
+
-
Zoom out
+
0
Original size (100% zoom)
+
1
Fit to window
+
ALTENTER
Toggle full screen mode (also via doubleclick)
+
CTRL
While holding CTRL you can create a selection frame without explicitly switching to selection mode.
~/config/settings/Terminal
-~/.profile - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/system/etc/profile
-~/.inputrc - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/system/etc/inputrc
+~/.profile - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/common/etc/profile
+~/.inputrc - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/common/etc/inputrc
The Terminal is Haiku's interface to bash, the Bourne Again Shell.
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@
Double-clicking into the emtpy part of the tab bar opens a new tab; onto a tab opens a dialog to rename its title. There are several %-designated variables that are explained with a tooltip when you hover the mouse over the text field.
By default, %1d: %p, a tab shows the current directory and, separated by a :, the name of the currently running process (or -- if it's just bash running, probably idling). The screenshot above shows the first tab with a FTP session in the Desktop folder and a second tab idling at home.
-Via Edit|Window title... the Terminal window's title can be edited in a similar way.
+Via Edit | Window title... the Terminal window's title can be edited in a similar way.
Right-clicking a tab shows a context menu to Close tab, Close other tabs or, like double-clicking, Edit tab title....
A Terminal window can be resized like any other window or you use the presets from the Settings | Window size menu. ALTENTER toggles fullscreen mode.
Changed window size and text encoding are only kept choosing Settings | Save as default.
@@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Pressing OK will save the current settings as defaul
Bash customization
Coming from Unix, there are countless possibilities to customize the bash itself. There are two files that are especially important to the user: .profile and .inputrc
-Both files can be created in the home/ folder and add or override the system defaults that are defined in /boot/system/etc/.
+Both files can be created in the home/ folder and add or override the system defaults that are defined in /boot/common/etc/.
.profile
The .profile is loaded every time you open a new Terminal. It sets all kinds of aliases and variables that will affect bash's behavior and appearance. You'll find many online resources that will detail all possibilities.
~/config/settings/WebPositive/ - Configuration files, cookies, cache and browsing history
-
~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks - Stores every bookmark as a file
+
~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks - All bookmarks as single files
WebPositive, or Web+ for short, is Haiku's native web browser. One part of its name is a tip of the hat to BeOS' simple NetPositive, the other points to its modern foundation: the WebKit. This open source HTML rendering library is at the heart of other mainstream browsers as well, like Safari of Mac OS X and Google's Chrome. By using the ever evolving WebKit, Web+ will be able to keep up with new web technologies.
-
-
-
You'll control your Web browsing with the Locator bar. To go to a Web page, type the URL into the Locator box and either press RETURN or click the Go button to the right of the Locator box. Web+ will suggest previous URLs as you type; you can go through previously typed URL with the UP and DOWN arrow keys. The icons on the Locator bar give you control over the current page, allowing you to go back, forward, stop loading, or return to your Start page.
-
-
If you need to quickly locate content in a page, Web+ includes in-page search. Use Edit | Find or ALTF to call up the Find bar, then type your search phrase and press RETURN. Further presses of RETURN or ALTG will go through the matches on the page. The Match case option restricts matches to those with the same spelling as your search phrase. Besides in-page search, the Edit menu also includes clipboard functions: cut, copy, and paste.
-
-
The View menu offers several functions to set the display of Web pages. First, View | Reload refreshes the Web page so you can see any changes. You set the font size and zoom level of the Web page here as well; you can also choose whether to apply zoom to images as well as text. If you need more room to view the page, you can move into fullscreen mode with View | Fullscreen. Finally, if you want to view the HTML source code of the current page, View | Page source opens up an external editor to edit the source.
-
-
In case you need to find a page you've already accessed, Web+ has the History menu. This menu contains the Back and Forward commands which are in the Locator bar, but it also has a list of all pages in your browsing history, organized by day.
-
-
Last, the Bookmarks menu lets you add the current page as a bookmark and manage your bookmarks in Tracker. It also lets you see all the bookmarks themselves.
-
-
Right-clicking on your Web page or on elements in the page brings up a context menu. In this menu, you can Stop page loading. If you right-click a link, you can Download link to disk, Open, or Open in new tab. You can also Copy link to clipboard for use elsewhere. You can take similar actions with right-clicked images embedded in Web pages: Download image to disk, Copy image to clipboard, or Open image in new window. Right-clicking selected text allows you to Copy to the clipboard.
-
-
In the Status bar at the bottom of WebPositive's interface, you can preview where links will take you. Hover over a link in a Web page and its destination URL will appear in the Status bar. This bar will also show you progress as Web+ loads a new Web page.
You can access the Web+ settings dialog from Window | Settings.
-
-
-
Many of the options are self-explanatory. The WebPositive Start page and Search page can be set here. You can also change which pages appear in new windows and tabs. Finally, you can change the default fonts and add a proxy server in this dialog.
-
The Auto-hide interface in fullscreen mode option will cause the interface to roll out of view if you don't use it for a short time while in fullscreen mode. Likewise, the Auto-hide mouse pointer option removes the mouse pointer from view when you are scrolling through a Web page.
-
-
Web+ currently only uses the Search page as a possible default page for new tabs and windows. It doesn't have built-in Web search; you have to go to your search engine and type in your query there.
These are some commonly used keyboard shortcuts in WebPositive:
+
WebPositive's interface is pretty straight forward: Under a menu bar is another bar with buttons to navigate to the previous and next sites in your browsing history, to stop the loading of a page and (optionally) a button to jump to your starting page.
+Then comes the locator field to enter a site's URL.
+Below this navigating bar appear the webpages. You can open many pages in parallel by loading them into their own tab.
+At the bottom of the window is a status bar, showing the URL of the site being loaded or of the link the mouse pointer is hovering over. While a page is being loaded, a progress bar appears to the right.
+
Settings
+
From the Window menu you can open a Settings panel to configure a few essentials of WebPositive.
+
+
The first tab deals with general settings: What file or URL serves as a Start page, what's used as a Search page, what Download folder is used for stuff you get from the net.
+Two pop-up menus let you decide what page to load - if any - when opening a new window or tab.
+Via the following checkboxes you can avoid showing the tab bar when there's only one page open anyway. WebPositive's interface can be told to automatically hide in full screen mode, and the mouse pointer can be automatically hidden whenever it's not moved for a while.
+Finally, you can decide to include the "Home" button in the navigation bar and set the number of days the browser remembers the sites you have visited in its history.
+
In the second tab you can choose the fonts used for standard, serif, non-serif and monospaced fonts and set their default sizes.
+
The last tab is used to configure a proxy server.
+
Browsing
+
If you have used any browser before, WebPositive shouldn't provide too many surprises. Instead of going through every menu item and feature, let's have a look at just a few points.
+
+
+
New tabs are created with the + button to the right in the tab bar or, if there's still enough space, by double-clicking into an empty area of it. If there are more tabs open than fit into the bar, the <> scroll-buttons become active, allowing you to scroll the tab bar left and right. The ∨ button to the far right hosts a pop-up menu with all open tabs for even quicker navigation.
+
Clicking on a link with the middle mouse button opens the page in a new tab in the background.
+
From the View menu you can Zoom in and Zoom out of a page. There's also an option to Zoom text only, leaving all images with their original size.
+
If you switch to full screen mode and have activated the setting to hide the interface, it will disappear after a second. To slide it temporarily back in, simply move the mouse pointer to the top of the screen.
+
+
While you type in the locator text field, the browser matches the string to sites you have visited in the past and lists them below the text field. You either keep adding more letters to shorten the list of possible sites, or choose an entry with ↑ or ↓. ENTER will load the page. You can also use the button to the far right which also serves to reload a page.
+Strings not recognized as URLs will get looked up with Google, so the locator field doubles as quick shortcut to web searches.
+
Right-clicking opens a context menu which, depending on the object you've clicked on, offers to open the link in a new window or a new tab, download the object etc.
+
Edit | Find shows a find bar at the bottom to start an in-page search. Matches are highlighted in the page.
+
+
After a while you may experience web pages being loaded slower and slower. Not really a bug in the truest sense, it's more an effect of a deficient handling of cookies. Either way, until that is fixed you'll have to manually intervene: Have a look at ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Cookies.curl. This file stores cookies from webpages and slowly grows while surfing the web. Once it's a few dozen kilobytes in size, it starts to slow down browsing. Just delete the file at that point to start with a clean slate.
+
Bookmarks
+
WebPositive's bookmarks are managed as files and folders in ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/. Adding a bookmark will create a new file there. You can quickly open the folder with Manage Bookmarks....
+
+
You can change a bookmark's URL, name, title and enter keywords just like with any other file with attributes. Just make sure you have all their columns displayed via Tracker's Attributes menu, then select a file, press ALTE and start editing the attribute; change attribute columns with TAB. You can sort bookmarks into different folders you create yourself.
+
By using Tracker to manage and navigate bookmarks you can lift its unique features to quickly find what you're looking for.
+Activating Type-ahead filtering in Tracker's preferences, you can instantly trim down your list of bookmarks to matches of your filter-string. A few more ↑ or ↓ to move the selection and pressing ENTER opens the site. Make sure to display all attribute columns to have the filter applied to name, title, URL and keywords.
+
For this to work, all bookmarks should be kept in the ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/ folder and only copies should be sorted into custom subfolders for usage in WebPositive's Bookmarks menu (if at all). Also, actually filling the keywords attribute helps...
+
Downloads
+
Window | Downloads opens a window listing all past and ongoing downloads:
+
+
Currently downloading files are shown with a growing progress bar and, similar to copying files in Tracker, information on the download speed, file size and expected finishing time. Buttons to the right let you Cancel and Restart a download, or Open the file, or Remove its entry from the list. The Remove missing and Remove finished buttons at the bottom do this for all entries in this list. "Missing" are files that were deleted in the meantime.
+
Moving a file that is currently being downloaded to Trash will stop the download. You'll also notice, that its icon becomes "ghosted".
+Generally, WebPositive is very tolerant when it comes to managing files with Tracker. Files can be renamed or moved even while they are being downloaded and even after the download is finished, these changes are reflected in the Downloads window.
+
Ever wondered from what site you downloaded a particular package, image or any other file? You can track that down by opening the file with DiskProbe and have a look at its META:url attribute.
+
Want to have the URL permanently shown in your downloads folder? Just copy a bookmark into it, have the bookmark's URL attribute column displayed and remove the bookmark again.
+
Keyboard shortcuts
+
Here are some useful keyboard shortcuts:
-
ALTT
Opens a new tab.
+
ALTT
Opens a new tab.
ALTW
Closes the current tab.
ALTN
Opens a new window.
SHIFTALTW
Closes the current window.
-
CMD click
Opens the clicked link in a new background tab.
-
ALTR
Refreshes the current page.
+
ALTENTER
Toggles full screen mode.
+
ALTR or F5
Refreshes the current page.
+
ALTH
Opens the home page.
+
ALTD
Shows/hides the Downloads window.
+
ALTF
Shows the find bar for in-page searching (hide with ESC).
One of WebPositive's unique features is its handling of bookmarks.
-
-
-
Web+ stores your bookmarks as files in Haiku's file system, and you can manage them with Tracker: ALTM will bring up your Bookmarks folder in Tracker. The files themselves are blank. Instead, Web+ stores each bookmark's URL and page title as attributes.
-
There are a number of advantages to this format; attribute storage is easy to filter and edit. Make sure that you first make the bookmark attributes visible from the Attributes menu in Tracker first. To add keywords to a bookmark, just right-click the bookmark in Tracker and choose Edit name, then use TAB to navigate to the keywords field. Once you're editing that field, type in your new keywords and press RETURN. You can edit the names, page titles and URLs of existing bookmarks with the same process.
-
-
WebPositive's approach toward bookmarks allows for quick searching. In Window | Preferences in Tracker, go to the Windows tab and choose Enable type-ahead filtering. Now, whenever you are in a bookmark-filled folder in Tracker, you can type phrases from the title, URL, or keywords of the bookmark you want and filter through the results. This tip is especially helpful if you fill in keywords beforehand. Note that it only works for flat folders and not hierarchies, so you will need to copy your bookmarks into one folder to use this.
Web+ also supports managing your downloads in a similar way. The Downloads window appears when you begin a download; you can call it up manually from the Windows menu. From here, you can open, restart, or remove previous downloads.
-
-
-
Much like it does with bookmarks, Web+ stores information about each download as an attribute. The original URL of the download remains an attribute of the file, so you can always return to the source of the file.
-
Web+ will update and adjust to changes to the downloaded files. Notice that sunday.pdf was deleted, so its icon was ghosted out in the Downloads window. documents.html was renamed from its original name of documents, and the Downloads window updated accordingly.
-
-
-
In the Web+ Settings, you can choose a default folder for downloads. However, if you need a download in a different place, just move it while downloading, and Web+ will continue to download. Moving the file to the Trash will cancel the download.
-
Closing Web+ will cancel your current downloads! Web+ will pop up a warning dialog if you have an ongoing download and try to quit.
This page is currently only a first draft. Please check back later for a refined version.
-
The Locale Kit provides a set of tools for internationalizing, localizing and translating software. This includes not only replacing string with their translations at runtime, but also more complex tasks such as formatting numbers, dates, and times in a way that match the locale preferences of the user.
-
Currently there are more than 50 translations available for Haiku OS and applications. Unfortunately, some of them were not yet fully translated. For this reason, you can choose more than one language for “Preferred languages” category. Translated interface will be based on descending order of languages set up on this page. English is, by default, always active (also when not listed). In this example, language is set to Spanish.
-
+
Haiku's localization system does not only include replacing texts with their translations, but also more complex tasks such as formatting numbers, dates, and times in a way that matches your Locale preferences.
+
If you would like to help with translations or start with a language that is currently missing, please get in contact on the Haiku-i18n mainling list.
+
+Language
+
Haiku has been translated to dozens of languages, unfortunately some translations are not complete yet. For that reason, you can choose more than one language as “Preferred languages”. If some text is missing in a translation, it's replaced with the words of the next preferred language. English is the default fallback (also when not listed).
-
-
On the Formatting tab you can set up date and time preferences, like 12/24 hour clock or translation of day/month names to desired language. The list on the left contains some default preferences for supported languages. In this example, formatting preferences are set to Spanish (Spain).
-
+
In this example, the preferred language is set to Spanish. The first fallback is Italian, and if the text is missing there too, it's back to default English.
+As you can see, expanding a language entry on the left side reveals sub-entries for specific variations or dialects of a language (if available).
+
+Formatting
+
On the Formatting tab you can set up the formatting of date, time, number and currency formats independently from the settings of your preferred language.
-
To apply the changes, close the Locale and reboot your system.
+
You may be a Spanish fellow located in the Italian speaking part of Switzerland. So, you'd prefer your system in Spanish, but numbers and currency formatted like at work: Swiss/Italian.
+If you're more comfortable with your Spanish names for days and months (think of the modified dates of files, for example), you can override this time-specific formatting with the checkbox at the top to Use month/day-names from preferred language.
+
Granted, the above example is maybe not the most common scenario, but it demonstrates the flexibility of the system.
+
+Options
+
The last tab provides an option that will Translate application and folder names in Deskbar and Tracker. Disable the checkbox if you prefer the graphical interface localized, while retaining the original English names for preference panels, applications and standard folder names.
+
+
Changes are applied immediately, though currently running applications may require to be closed and restarted before showing the new setting.
+
+
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
+
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Locale preferences.
By dragging the red vertical or horizontal lines on the touchpad representation, you set the scroll area (slightly reddish against the grey general touch area). Moving your finger on that part of the pad will move the scrollbars of a window accordingly.
+
By dragging the red vertical or horizontal lines on the touchpad representation, you set the scroll area (slightly reddish against the gray general touch area). Moving your finger on that part of the pad will move the scrollbars of a window accordingly.
To the right are sliders to set the general scroll acceleration and the vertical and horizontal scrolling speed.
The acceleration setting decides how much quicker a list scrolls by if you swish over the scroll area very fast. The scrolling speeds control the general speed when using the scroll area in a "normal" way.
Below the touchpad graphic are checkboxes to enable "Two finger scrolling" for vertical and horizontal scrolling. Move two fingers in parallel vertically or horizontally to move the scrollbars of a window. At least for me, it works best if with one finger from the left and one from the right hand.
diff --git a/userguide/en/preferences/tracker.html b/userguide/en/preferences/tracker.html
index 7497a33b..9cc5e1bb 100644
--- a/userguide/en/preferences/tracker.html
+++ b/userguide/en/preferences/tracker.html
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@
@@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Les points sléectionnés peuvent être supprimés en tapant S
Transform
T
Place les points sélectionnés dans une boîte de transformation, afin que vous puissez les déplacer, redimensionner et tourner ensemble. Ceci fonctionne comme pour les formes, décrites plus loin.
Split
Duplique chaque points sélectionnés, en plaçant la copie au dessus de l’original.
Flip
Effectue une rotation de 180° des points sélectionnés. A uniquement un effet sur les points des courbes de Bézier.
crée de manière fiable un fichier temporaire ou un répertoire.
-
modifiers
Prints currently (un)pressed modifier keys.
+
modifiers
Affiches les touches modificatrices actuellement pressées ou relâchées.
more
Voir less.
mount
Monte un système de fichier.
mount_nfs
Monte un volume NFS.
mountvolume
Mounte un volume par son nom.
mv
Déplace ou renomme un fichier.
netcat
Utilitaire TCP et UDP.
-
netstat
Prints network connections, routing tables, interface statistics, masquerade connections and multicast memberships.
+
netstat
Affiche les connexions réseau, les tables de routage, les statistiques des interfaces, les correspondances pour chaque connexions et les abonnements aux diffusions.
nl
Affiche chaque fichier en ajoutant les numéros de lignes.
nohup
Exécute une commande insensible aux signaux de déconnexions.
nproc
Affiche le nombre d'unités de traitement disponibles.
@@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ Voici une liste de touts les programmes en ligne de commande qui sont livrés av
open
Ouvre une application ou un document à partir de l’interpréteur de commandes. (spécifique à Haiku)
P
passwd
Change le mot de passe de l'utilisateur.
-
paste
Prints lines consisting of the sequentially corresponding lines from each file, separated by tabs.
+
paste
Affiche séquentiellement les lignes de chacun des fichiers en entré, en les séparant par des tabulations.
patch
Applique un correctif (diff) au fichier d'origine.
pathchk
Diagnostique les noms de fichiers invalides ou non portables.
pc
Calculatrice du programmeur
@@ -230,22 +230,22 @@ Voici une liste de touts les programmes en ligne de commande qui sont livrés av
playfile
Joue un fichier audio.
playsound
Joue un fichier audio.
playwav
Joue un fichier WAV.
-
pr
Paginates or columnates files for printing.
+
pr
Pagine ou met en colonnes des fichiers pour l'impression.
printenv
Affiche la valeur d'une variable d'environnement.
printf
Formate et affiche des données.
prio
Change la priorité d'un processus.
-
profile
Profiles threads.
+
profile
Analyseur de performances des tâches.
ps
Liste les processus en cours d'exécution.
-
ptx
Outputs a permuted index, including context, of the words in the input files.
+
ptx
Génère un index permuté, incluant le contexte, des mots contenus dans le fichier d'entrée.
pwd
Affiche le répertoire courant.
-
query
A shell utility emulating Tracker's "Find by formula" functionality. (Haiku specific)
+
query
Un utilitaire en ligne de commande pour émuler la fonction de "Find by formula" (recherche par formule) du Tracker. (spécifique à Haiku)
quit
Quitte une application.
rc
Compilateur de ressources.
-
readlink
Prints the path to the destination of a symbolic link.
-
reindex
Puts attributes of existing files into newly created indexes. (Haiku specific)
+
readlink
affiche le chemin cible d'un lien symbolique.
+
reindex
Met les attributs des fichiers existants dans l'index nouvellement créé. (spécifique à Haiku)
release
Libère un sémaphore.
renice
Modifie la priorité d'un processus en cours.
-
rlog
Prints log messages and other information about RCS files.
+
rlog
Affiche les messages de journalisation et autres informations sur les fichiers RCS.
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Le déplacement de votre doigt sur cette partie de la plaque déplacera les barr
Si vous vous sentez à l'aise avec cette fonctionnalité, vous pouvez vous passer des zones de défilement et ainsi utiliser toute la zone de contact pour la navigation normale.
Le curseur du bas sert à régler la sensibilité du tapotement pour le clic. Si vos tapotement sont ignorés, augmentez la sensibilité. Si le système génère sans arrêt des clics, alors que vous souhaitez juste déplacer le curseur de la souris, essayez de la diminuer.
-
Defaults
restaure toutes les valeurs par défaut.
+
Defaults
réinitialise toutes les valeurs par défaut.
Revert
restaure les réglages qui étaient actifs quand vous êtes entré dans le panneau de préférences du Touchpad.
Voici une astuce qui n'est pas liée aux préférences du touchpad, mais qui traite d'un sujet plus général :
diff --git a/userguide/fr/preferences/tracker.html b/userguide/fr/preferences/tracker.html
index b10d0b94..1be58141 100644
--- a/userguide/fr/preferences/tracker.html
+++ b/userguide/fr/preferences/tracker.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
En temps normal, le fichier d'échange (qui contient la mémoire virtuelle) est écrit sur la partition de démarrage. Les opérations de lecture/écriture sur le disque dur concerné seront ralenties lorsque le système utilisera la mémoire virtuelle. Si vous rencontrez des problèmes, vous pouvez essayer d'utiliser une partition sur un autre disque dur pour la mémoire virtuelle. Utiliser une autre partition du disque dur de démarrage ne suffira pas.
Augmenter la quantité de RAM de votre ordinateur sera bien sûr plus efficace…
-
Defaults
restaure toutes les valeurs par défaut.
+
Defaults
réinitialise toutes les valeurs par défaut.
Revert
rétablit les réglages qui étaient actifs quand vous avez démarré les préférences VirtualMemory.
Il software per Haiku, è sempre distribuito sotto forma di archivio, la maggior parte delle volte si tratta di un file ZIP, mentre alcuni vecchi pacchetti per BeOS sono nel formato PKG di Sofware Valet, quindi dopo un doppio click sul file bisogna semplicemente scegliere una cartella di installazione ed il programma si preoccuperà di fare tutto il lavoro poiché Software Valet era in grado di eseguire automaticamente degli script di installazione.
-Se si tratta di un archivio in formato ZIP, effettuando un doppio click si aprirà Expander dove è possibile impostare la destinazione ed infine estrarlo. Come spiegato nel capitolo Filesystem layout, questa destinazione può essere :
+
Il software per Haiku, è sempre distribuito sotto forma di archivio, la maggior parte delle volte si tratta di un file ZIP, invece alcuni vecchi pacchetti per BeOS sono nel formato PKG di Sofware Valet che era in grado di eseguire automaticamente degli script di installazione. Quindi dopo un doppio click sul file, bisogna semplicemente scegliere una cartella di installazione e il programma si preoccuperà di fare tutto il lavoro.
+Se si tratta di un archivio in formato ZIP, effettuando un doppio click si aprirà Expander dove sarà possibile impostare la destinazione ed infine estrarlo. Come spiegato nel capitolo Filesystem layout, questa destinazione può essere :
/boot/common/apps/
per le applicazioni disponibili a tutti gli utenti
/boot/home/apps/
per applicazioni disponibili solo all'utente
@@ -70,8 +70,8 @@ Se si tratta di un archivio in formato ZIP, effettuando un doppio click si aprir
Quando l'archivio è stato estratto, si consiglia di guardare all'interno della cartella appena creata, è possibile trovare dei file ReadMe ed altra documentazione utile.
-
Alcuni programmi hanno bisogno di una successiva configurazione, i componenti utili ad estendere il sistema come gli Add-On del Tracker ed i Translator, devono essere inseriti nelle cartelle corrette. In alternativa è possibile trovare uno script (spesso con estensione.sh, per esempio install) che con un semplice doppio click si preoccupa di di installare il programma.
-E' anche possibile trovare delle cartelle che puntano alla destinazione corretta, come "drag [filename] here...". In questo caso basta semplicemente trascinare il file nella cartella.
+
Alcuni programmi hanno bisogno di una successiva configurazione, i componenti utili ad estendere il sistema come gli Add-On del Tracker e i Translator, devono essere inseriti nelle cartelle corrette. In alternativa è possibile trovare uno script (spesso con estensione.sh, per esempio install) che con un semplice doppio click si occupa di di installare il programma.
+E' anche possibile trovare delle cartelle che puntano alla destinazione corretta, come "drag [filename] here...". In questo caso basta semplicemente trascinare il file indicato nella cartella.
Naturalmente, estraendo l'archivio la maggior parte delle volte non è necessario niente di tutto questo.
I Capitoli La Deskbar oppure LaunchBox spiegano come aggiungere dei comandi rapidi alla nuova applicazione.
Haiku viene fornito con un set di applicazioni per lo più piccole ed essenziali. Puoi trovarle in /boot/system/apps/ oppure in /boot/common/apps/. Possono essere trovate nel menu Applicazioni della Deskbar le applicazioni che solitamente non vengono avviate tramite il doppio click su di un file (ad esempio ShowImage per i file di immagini).
+
Haiku viene fornito con un set di applicazioni per lo più piccole ed essenziali. Si possono trovare in /boot/system/apps/ oppure in /boot/common/apps/. Le applicazioni che di solito non vengono lanciate tramite un doppio click sul file (ad esempio ShowImage per i file immagine) possono essere trovate nel menu della Deskbar Applicazioni.
E' possibile monitorare l'utilizzo delle risorse del sistema lanciando ActivityMonitor e attivando le diverse voci che interessano.
+
È possibile monitorare l'utilizzo delle risorse del sistema eseguendo ActivityMonitor e attivando le diverse voci che possono interessare all'utente.
-
Cliccando con il tasto destro sulla finestra, potete attivare o disattivare la visualizzazione di tutti i tipi di risorse:
-Used/Cached Memory, Swap Space, CPU Usage, Network Receive/Send, Page faults, Semaphores, Ports, Threads, Teams, Running Applications, Raw/Text Clipboard Size, Media Nodes.
-
Sotto i grafici c'è una legenda (nascondibile dal menù contestuale). E' possibile cambiare i colori dei grafici e quello dello sfondo effettuando il drag&drop da qualsiasi color picker, ad esempio: da Icon-O-Matic.
-
Potete aggiungere più viste dal menù File se i grafici risultano troppo affollati.
-
Il menù Settings apre un pannello in cui potete settare l'intervallo di aggiornamento.
-
Ogni vista ha la sua manina Replicante e cosi può essere sistemata, ad esempio, sul desktop.
+
Cliccando con il tasto destro sulla finestra, è possibile attivare o disattivare la visualizzazione di tutti i tipi di risorse:
+Memoria utilizzata e nella cache, Spazio swap, Uso della CPU, Invio e ricezione di rete, Page fault, Semafori, Porte, Thread, Team, Applicazioni in esecuzione, Dimensione degli appunti, Nodi multimediali.
+
Sotto i grafici c'è una legenda (che può essere nascosta dal menù contestuale). E' possibile cambiare i colori dei grafici e quello dello sfondo trascinando un colore da un qualsiasi color picker, ad esempio: Icon-O-Matic.
+
Dal menu File è possibile aggiungere più modalità di visualizzazione se i grafici risultano troppo affollati.
+
Il menù Impostazioni apre un pannello dal quale è possibile impostare l'intervallo di aggiornamento.
+
Ogni vista ha la sua manina Replicante che può essere quindi sistemata, ad esempio, sul Desktop.
La traduzione di questa pagina non è stata completata. Per questo motivo le parti non tradotte sono visibili in inglese.
BePDF
-
Deskbar:
Applications
-
Posizione:
/boot/apps/BePDF/BePDF
+
Deskbar:
Applicazioni
+
Locazione:
/boot/apps/BePDF/BePDF
Documentazione:
/boot/apps/BePDF/docs/*
Impostazioni:
/boot/common/settings/BePDF
-
BePDF is a fast launching PDF viewer. Besides viewing, it supports annotating and user-defined bookmarking for unencrypted PDFs. It's fully localized for 20 languages at the moment with additional languages being easily added via text files.
-
Documentation is available as HTML or PDF. The latter will also open from the menu Help | Show Help....
+
BePDF è un veloce lettore di documenti PDF. È possibile visualizzarli e aggiungere notazioni, ha inoltre la possibilità di creare dei segnalibri definiti dall'utente per i PDF non criptati. Al momento è tradotto nella sua interezza in 20 lingue con la possibilità di aggiungere lingue addizionali tramite file di testo.
+
La documentazione è disponibile sia in formato HTML sia in PDF. Quest'ultima è visualizzabile tramite il menù Help | Show Help....
La traduzione di questa pagina non è stata completata. Per questo motivo le parti non tradotte sono visibili in inglese.
CDPlayer
-
Deskbar:
Applications
-
Posizione:
/boot/system/apps/CDPlayer
+
Deskbar:
Applicazioni
+
Locazione:
/boot/system/apps/CDPlayer
Impostazioni:
~/cd/* - Immagazzina i dettagli di tutti i CD identificati.
@@ -64,9 +65,9 @@
-->
-
Usage is pretty much what you'd expect from looking at the control buttons.
-Activate the Repeat button to the left of Shuffle to loop the complete CD.
-
Se avete bisogno di più funzioni, come ad esempio una playlist, provate MediaPlayer.
+
L'uso è piuttosto intuitivo.
+Per eseguire la riproduzione ciclica di un CD, basta attivare il pulsante Repeat situato sulla sinistra del pulsante Shuffle.
+
Se si necessita di più funzioni, come ad esempio una playlist, è consigliato l'uso di MediaPlayer.
La traduzione di questa pagina non è stata completata. Per questo motivo le parti non tradotte sono visibili in inglese.
CharacterMap
-
Deskbar:
Applications
-
Posizione:
/boot/system/apps/CharacterMap
+
Deskbar:
Applicazioni
+
Locazione:
/boot/system/apps/CharacterMap
Impostazioni:
~/config/settings/CharacterMap settings
-
CharacterMap will show you the UTF-8 code of every character a font supports.
+
CharacterMap mostra il codice UTF-8 di ogni carattere supportato dal font.
-
To the left you have the standardized blocks, together with a handy filter function. Optionally, you can choose to also Show Private Blocks from the View menu. The right shows the actual characters in these blocks, using the font specified in the Font menu. Below that you can change the font size. And below that, the values of the character currently under the mouse pointer is displayed in hex, decimal and UTF-8 notation.
-
You can drag&drop a character directly from the character map into a text editor, or right-click on one to either Copy Character (ALTC) or Copy As Escaped Byte String (SHIFTALTC). Resulting in, e.g. either € or \xe2\x82\xac.
+
Sulla sinistra ci sono i blocchi standardizzati insieme a una pratica funzione di filtraggio, è possibile selezionare anche Mostra blocchi privati dal menù View. Sulla destra vengono mostrati i caratteri presenti in questi blocchi, utilizzando il font specificato nel menù Font mentre sotto questi c'è un cursore per variare la dimensione del font sotto il quale sono visualizzati i valori del carattere sul quale si trova il mouse in esadecimale, in decimale e secondo la notazione UTF-8.
+
È possibile trascinare direttamente un carattere da CharacterMap in un editor di testo, in alternativa si può cliccare col tasto destro su Copy Character (ALTC) altrimenti si può usare Copy As Escaped Byte String (SHIFTALTC). In questo modo si otterranno ad esempio € oppure \xe2\x82\xac.
La traduzione di questa pagina non è stata completata. Per questo motivo le parti non tradotte sono visibili in inglese.
-
Haiku-specific commandline applications
+
Applicazioni su riga di comando specifiche per Haiku
-
Location:
/boot/system/bin /boot/common/bin ~/config/bin
+
Locazione:
/boot/system/bin /boot/common/bin ~/config/bin
-
All commandline applications shipped with Haiku are in either /boot/system/bin or /boot/common/bin. Your own or additionally installed commandline apps should go in ~/config/bin. All these locations are part of the PATH variable and are therefore automatically found.
-The following isn't an exhaustive list of all Haiku-specific CLI apps, it serves just to highlight a few of the most useful to give you a taste. Feel encouraged to explore what's in the bin/ folders on your own a bit. Executing an app with the parameter --help shows the usage of the command and all its various options.
+
Tutte le applicazioni su riga di comando fornite con Haiku si trovano in /boot/system/bin oppure in /boot/common/bin. Le applicazioni dell'utente, insieme a quelle addizionali, dovrebbero risiedere in ~/config/bin. Tutti questi percorsi fanno parte della variabile PATH e pertanto sono trovati automaticamente.
+La seguente lista non comprende tutte le applicazioni su riga di comando specifiche per Haiku, serve semplicemente per evidenziare le più utili e per dare un'idea. È consigliato esplorare il contenuto delle cartelle bin/ per conto proprio, eseguendo un'applicazione con il parametro --help viene mostrato l'uso e tutte le sue opzioni.
These commands are used to display, read out, add and remove attributes of files. Remember that these meta data are currently only available on BFS formatted volumes. Moving files onto other file systems will strip all attributes!
-All these commands are described in topic Attributes in Terminal.
Questi comandi servono per visualizzare, leggere, aggiungere o rimuovere attributi dai file.
+È importante ricordare che questi metadati sono attualmente supportati soltanto dai volumi formattati in BFS, spostare questi file su un altro filesystem eliminerà tutti gli attributi.
+Tutti questi comandi sono descritti nel capitolo Gli attributi nel Terminale.
With these commands you list, make, reindex and remove attributes to BFS' index. Every volume has it's own index, remember that when copying files from one volume to another.
-These commands are described in topic Index.
Con questi comandi è possibile visualizzare, creare, reindicizzare e rimuovere attributi dall'indice del BFS.
+Ogni volume ha il proprio indice, è utile tenerlo a mente quando si copia un file da un volume all'altro.
+Questi comandi sono descritti nel capitolo L'indice del filesystem.
Ecco qui alcune applicazioni particolarmente utili nello scripting (leggere il capitolo La bash e lo "scripting").
alert
-
alert conjures up the typical alert window with a pre-defined icon, explanatory text and up to three buttons. It will return the title of the pressed button and an exit status (starting with 0). For example, this is made of the line:
+
alert si occupa di far apparire una semplice finestra di notifica con un'icona predefinita, del testo esplicativo e un massimo di tre pulsanti. Ritornerà il titolo del pulsante premuto e lo stato di uscita (che comincia con uno 0), l'esempio è stato creato con la riga:
alert --idea "FantasticApp(tm) installed successfully!
Would you like a link to it?" "On Desktop" "In Deskbar" "No thanks"
filepanel
-
filepanel displays a load or save file panel and lets the user choose a file or location. As a return value you'll get the chosen file or folder's path. There are several parameters available, for example to set a starting directory, a window title, a default name when saving or restrictions to the allowed types of files. This is an example of
+
filepanel visualizza una finestra che permette di selezionare un percorso utilizzato per aprire o salvare file. Come valore di ritorno si otterrà il percorso del file o della cartella selezionata. Esistono diversi parametri utilizzabili, ad esempio per impostare la cartella di partenza, il titolo della finestra, il nome di default per il salvataggio oppure le restrizioni ai diversi tipi di file selezionabili. Ecco qui un esempio:
filepanel -s -t "Save your logfile" -d ~/config/settings -n Fantastic.log
waitfor
-
waitfor is a nice way to wait for a particular application or thread to be started or to have ended.
+
waitfor è un semplice metodo per aspettare che una particolare applicazione venga avviata o terminata.
query
-
query is the commandline version of the Find panel. In fact, a quick way to generate the search term is to build a query in the Find panel, switch to by formula, add double quotes (") in front and back and paste the whole string after your query command in Terminal or your script.
-
+
query è la versione su riga di comando del pannello Trova. Infatti, un modo rapido per generare i termini di ricerca è creare una query nel pannello Trova, selezionando per formula, e aggiungendo le doppie virgolette (") in testa e in coda, successivamente si incolla l'intera stringa dopo il comando query nel Terminale o nello script che si sta realizzando.
checkfs is an important tool to check for errors in your file system. Simply add the volume or device name and it'll run through every file and correct inconsistencies where possible.
-
+
checkfs è un'applicazione importante per verificare la presenza di errori nel filesystem. Basta aggiungere il nome del volume o del dispositivo e il programma esaminerà ogni file e correrreggerà eventuali inconsistenze dove possibile.
open
-
open is a very handy little tool. With it you open any file with its preferred application, or start a specific application by its signature without the need to know its exact path. It also works with URLs and even with the "virtual" directories . for the current directory and .. for the parent, opening the folder in Tracker.
-
+
open è un'applicazione semplice ma anche molto pratica. Permette di aprire qualsiasi file con la sua applicazione preferita o avviare uno specifico programma a partire dalla sua firma senza la necessità di conoscerne l'esatto percorso. Il comando funziona anche con gli URL e con le cartelle "virtuali" (. indica la cartella corrente e .. indica la cartella superiore) aprendo la cartella direttamente nel Tracker.
desklink
-
desklink can install an icon for any file, folder, query or application in the Deskbar tray. It also offers the option to provide a context menu when right-clicking an icon to execute special actions. As an example, try this to add the commandline app screenshot with various options (the "\" in the first line is just for the line break in Terminal):
+
desklink può aggiungere un'icona per qualsiasi file, cartella, query o applicazione da mostrare nella Deskbar. Offre anche un'opzione che permette di mostrare un menù contestuale quando, per eseguire azioni speciali, si fa clic con il tasto destro su un'icona. Per esempio, digitate nel terminale quanto segue per aggiungere alla Deskbar il programma su riga di comando screenshot con le varie opzioni (il "\" nella prima riga serve semplicemente per segnalare l'andata a capo al Terminale):
La traduzione di questa pagina non è stata completata. Per questo motivo le parti non tradotte sono visibili in inglese.
CodyCam
-
Deskbar:
Applications
-
Posizione:
/boot/system/apps/CodyCam
+
Deskbar:
Applicazioni
+
Locazione:
/boot/system/apps/CodyCam
Impostazioni:
~/config/settings/codycam
-
With CodyCam you take pictures at a specified interval from a connected webcam or any other video-in device and save it via FTP.
+
Con CodyCam è possibile acquisire immagini con uno specifico intervallo da una webcam o da un dispositivo video-in caricandole un su server via FTP.
-
To the left under the preview, you set the filename that'll be suffixed with an increasing number for every picture taken. Beneath that you decide on the file format and the rate the pictures are taken.
-
To the right you choose either FTP or sFTP (if SSH is available) and enter the needed data to save the images on a server.
+
Sotto l'anteprima, sulla sinistra, è possibile impostare il nome dell'immagine il cui suffisso sarà incrementato per ogni acquisizione effettuata; sotto invece si possono impostare il formato dell'immagine e l'intervallo di acquisizione.
+
Sulla destra bisogna scegliere se utilizzare il protocollo FTP o sFTP (se SSH è installato) e inserire i dati necessari per salvare le immagini sul server.
DeskCalc è una semplice calcolatrice dotata, sebbene non si noti a prima vista, di caratteristiche interessanti.
+
Sebbene non si noti a prima vista, DeskCalc è una semplice calcolatrice dotata di caratteristiche interessanti.
DeskCalc comprende molto più di quanto il tastierino suggerisca.
@@ -66,20 +67,20 @@ Oltre gli operatori +, -, *, /, %,
Quando viene immesso dell'input, DeskCalc è piuttosto tollerante: /, :, \ vengono tutti interpretati come operatori di divisione, *, x sono simboli validi per le moltiplicazioni.
-Bisogna fare attenzione nell'uso di . e di , che vengono entrambi interpretati come separatori delle cifre decimali, questo implica che non è possibile usarli per la suddivisione in migliaia.
+Bisogna fare attenzione nell'uso di . e di , che vengono entrambi interpretati come separatori delle cifre decimali, ma questo implica che non è possibile usarli per la suddivisione in migliaia.
Cliccando col tasto destro vengono offerte le seguenti opzioni:
-
Enable Num Lock on start up
attiva automaticamente il Num Lock nonappena viene avviato DeskCalc
-
Show Keypad
nasconde il tastierino se disattivato
+
Attiva il Bloc Num all'avvio
attiva automaticamente il Bloc Num non appena viene avviato DeskCalc
+
Mostra il tastierino
nasconde il tastierino se disattivato
-
È possibile ridimensionare a piacimento la finestra della calcolatrice e poi posizionarla come Replicant sul Desktop tramite un drag&drop del simbolo nell'angolo in basso a destra. È necessario assicurarsi che Show Replicants sia attivato nella Deskbar.
-
Il testierino può essere colorato con un semplice drag&drop da qualsiasi colore, preso per esempio da Icon-O-Matic.
+
È possibile ridimensionare a piacimento la finestra della calcolatrice e poi posizionarla come Replicante sul Desktop trascinando il simbolo nell'angolo in basso a destra. È necessario assicurarsi che Mostra Replicanti sia attivato nella Deskbar.
+
Il tastierino può essere colorato semplicemente trascinandovi sopra qualsiasi colore, preso per esempio da Icon-O-Matic.
È possibile muoversi nella cronologia dei calcoli svolti con ↑ e ↓.
È possibile selezionare il contenuto di DeskCalc per poi trascinarlo in un'altra applicazione. È anche possibile trascinarlo in una finestra del Tracker o sul Desktop, in questi casi verrà creato nella posizione corrente un file di testo contenete la selezione.
Diversamente, è possibile anche l'inverso:
-Creare dei ritagli di testo come descritti nei vari passaggi del calcolo e rilasciarli con un drag&drop in DeskCalc.
-È anche possibile fare il drag&drop in DeskCalc di calcoli contenuti in email.
-
DeskCalc può essere utilizzata all'interno del Terminale. Basta racchiudere l'espressione tra le virgolette doppie come mostrato:
+Creare dei ritagli di testo come descritto nei vari passaggi del calcolo e trascinarli in DeskCalc.
+È anche possibile trascinare in DeskCalc dei calcoli contenuti in una email.
+
DeskCalc può essere utilizzata all'interno del Terminale. Basta racchiudere l'espressione tra le virgolette doppie come mostrato qui di seguito:
La vista principale mostra sempre un blocco di dati la cui dimensione può essere variata con View | BlockSize. Sulla sinistra è mostrato l'offset dall'inizio del blocco, al centro vengono visualizzati i dati in esadecimale e sulla destra vengono visualizzati gli stessi valori espressi in caratteri ASCII.
È possibile muoversi da un blocco all'altro usando il cursore in alto o i tasti ALT← e ALT→ e passare dalla colonna dell'esadecimale a quella dell'ASCII con TAB.
-
Block | Selection non solo mosterà la selezione secondo i diversi
+
Block | Selection non solo mostrerà la selezione secondo i diversi
endianess (o in modalità esadecimale o in quella decimale, impostata da View | Base), ma interpreterà anche la selezione come blocco al quale è possibile saltare. Questo apparirà grigio se la posizione non è presente all'interno del file o del dispositivo.
-Questa è una caratteristica piuttosto utile quando si esplorano i file system dal momento che spesso contengono puntatori ad altri blocchi.
+Questa è una caratteristica piuttosto utile quando si esplorano i filesystem dal momento che spesso contengono puntatori ad altri blocchi.
Se il file che si sta esaminando include degli attributi, è possibile usare il menù Attributes per aprirli in una nuova finestra di DiskProbe. Qui è mostrato l'attributo copyright dell'applicazione AboutSystem:
-
In base al tipo di attributo, veranno visualizzate schede differenti accanto al sempre presente Raw Editor. Ad esempio ci sono editor per le stringe e per i MIME type o un visualizzatore di icone per l'attributo vectoricon.
+
In base al tipo di attributo, verranno visualizzate schede differenti accanto al sempre presente Raw Editor. Ad esempio ci sono editor per le stringhe e per i MIME type o un visualizzatore di icone per l'attributo vectoricon.
La traduzione di questa pagina non è stata completata. Per questo motivo le parti non tradotte sono visibili in inglese.
DiskUsage
-
Deskbar:
Applications
-
Posizione:
/boot/system/apps/DiskUsage
+
Deskbar:
Applicazioni
+
Locazione:
/boot/system/apps/DiskUsage
Impostazioni:
~/config/settings/DiskUsage
DiskUsage si occupa di mostrare graficamente come è utilizzato lo spazio sui volumi.
-Un'applicazione piuttosto utile per ripondere alla domanda, "Che fine ha fatto tutto lo spazio libero sul disco?".
+Un'applicazione piuttosto utile per rispondere alla domanda, "Che fine ha fatto tutto lo spazio libero sul disco?".
-
I cerchi concentrici rappresentano i diversi livelli nella gerarchia del filesystem. Sopra, il cerchio centrale rappresenta la cartella /boot/home/. Ogni segmento dell'anello immediatamente successivo a quello centrale è un file o una cartella presente sotto /boot/home/. Ogni segmento sempre più esterno rappresenta un livello inferiore nella gerarchia dei file. È possibile ridimensionare la finestra in modo che vengano mostrate anche le cartelle dei livelli più bassi.
-
Above the graphic is a pop-up menu that lets you switch between all mounted volumes. Before the disk usage of a volume can be displayed, it has to be scanned. As this can take a while for larger disks, you can examine another volume while that scan is done in the background.
+
I cerchi concentrici rappresentano i diversi livelli nella gerarchia del filesystem. Nell'immagine qui sopra, il cerchio centrale rappresenta la cartella /boot/home/. Ogni segmento dell'anello immediatamente successivo a quello centrale è un file o una cartella presente sotto /boot/home/. Ogni segmento sempre più esterno rappresenta un livello inferiore nella gerarchia dei file. È possibile ridimensionare la finestra in modo che vengano mostrate anche le cartelle dei livelli più bassi.
+
Sopra il grafico è visibile un menù a tendina che permette di spostarsi tra i vari volumi montati. È necessario scansionare un volume prima di poterne visualizzare l'utilizzo. Dal momento che questa procedura è più lunga per i dischi più capienti, è possibile analizzare un altro volume mentre ne viene effettuata la scansione.
-
If the graphical representation of a file or folder comprises less than about 2° of a circle, it is excluded from the display.
-
The number of files that's reported for a folder includes files in subfolders too. A folder counts as a file.
-
DiskUsage ignores symbolic links.
+
Se la rappresentazione grafica di un file o cartella è resa con meno di 2° circa, sarà tralasciata nella visualizzazione.
+
Il numero dei file che sono riportati all'interno di una cartella, include anche i file nelle sottocartelle. Le cartelle contano come file.
+
DiskUsage ignora i link simbolici.
-
As you move the mouse over a segment, information about that file or folder appears in the status bar at the bottom.
-
Right-clicking a segment offers a context menu to Get Info, Open (with Tracker), Open With another suitable application or Rescan that particular folder.
-Left-clicking a segment makes that file/folder the center circle.
-Left-clicking the center circle moves you up one level.
-
You can drag files and folders from DiskUsage to other applications or to the Desktop or other Tracker windows for copying. Vice versa, dropped volumes and folders on DiskUsage's window will zoom directly to them, making them the new center circle.
+
Spostando il mouse su un segmento, è possibile visualizzare nella barra di stato in basso informazioni su quel file o cartella.
+
Cliccando col tasto destro su un segmento, apparirà un menù contestuale con Get Info, Open (col Tracker), Open With un'altra applicazione adatta o Rescan quella cartella in particolare.
+Cliccando col tasto sinistro su un segmento, il cerchio centrale sarà dato da quel file o cartella.
+Cliccando col tasto sinistro il cerchio centrale, si passerà al livello superiore.
+
È possibile trascinare file e cartelle da DiskUsage su altre applicazioni o sul Desktop o in altre finestre del Tracker per copiarle. Al contrario, trascinando volumi e cartelle nella finestra di DiskUsage si passerà direttamente a loro rendendoli il cerchio centrale.
La traduzione di questa pagina non è stata completata. Per questo motivo le parti non tradotte sono visibili in inglese.
DriveSetup
-
Deskbar:
Applications
-
Posizione:
/boot/system/apps/DriveSetup
+
Deskbar:
Applicazioni
+
Locazione:
/boot/system/apps/DriveSetup
Impostazioni:
~/config/settings/DriveSetup
-
DriveSetup is a tool to create, delete and initialize partitions. At this time it can't resize or move existing partitions, so that you'll either need an unpartitioned volume (perhaps an external USB drive or another harddisk) or do the initial setup with a tool like the GParted LiveCD to provide the space for another partition.
+
DriveSetup è un'applicazione che serve a creare, eliminare e inizializzare partizioni. Al momento non è possibile ridimensionare o spostare le partizioni esistenti, per questo motivo sarà necessario un volume non partizionato o si dovrà effettuare il setup preliminare con un'applicazione come GParted LiveCD per fornire spazio ad un'altra partizione.
-
At the top is a graphical representation of all partitions inside the device chosen in the list below it. Besides a maximum of 4 primary partitions, each of those can contain a number of extended/logical partitions. You may have to expand such a list with the +/- widget that appears in that case in front of that device to see the details of every logical partition.
-
You can select a partition from the list and mount and unmount them with the commands in the Partition menu or by pressing ALTM or ALTU.
-
You can also completely delete a partition with Partition | Delete.
-Which brings us to this:
-
Dealing with creating/deleting/initializing partitions is very dangerous business. Always check twice to be sure you're working with the right one and always keep an up-to-date backup of your data in case something goes wrong!
+
Nella parte alta è visibile una rappresentazione grafica di tutte le partizioni presenti nel dispositivo selezionato nella lista appena sotto. Possono esserci un massimo di 4 partizioni primarie, ciascuna delle quali può contenere un qualsiasi numero di partizioni logiche o estese. Espandendo la lista e premendo i pulsanti + e - del widget che appaiono vicini al dispositivo, è possibile vedere i dettagli di ogni singola partizione logica.
+
Una volta selezionata una partizione è possibile montarla o smontarla con il comando nel menù Partition oppure premendo ALTM o ALTU.
+
È anche possibile cancellare completamente una partizione con Partition | Delete.
+Tenete presente che:
+
Avere a che fare con la creazione, eliminazione o inizializzazione di partizioni è un compito piuttosto pericoloso. Bisogna essere sempre sicuri di lavorare sulle partizioni giuste e tenere sempre da parte delle copie di backup aggiornate dei dati nel caso qualcosa vada storto.
If you plan to use the entire drive as one partition, e.g. a USB stick or a Compact Flash card, you can skip the creation of a partition and proceed right to Initializing.
-
When you found unformatted space on a drive, like the above <empty>, you can create a new partition in this space with Partition | Create...(ALTC).
Se si ha in mente di utilizzare l'intero dispositivo come partizione unica, ad esempio una penna USB o una scheda Compact Flash, è possibile saltare la creazione delle partizioni e passare all'Inizializzazione.
+
Se si trova dello spazio non formattato su un dispositivo, quello marcato con <empty>, è possibile crearvi una partizione con Partition | Create...(ALTC).
-
You're prompted with this dialog that lets you adjust the partition size and type. Choose Be File System if you want to use the partition for an Haiku installation or if you want to use all the interesting Haiku features with it, like attributes and queries. Note, that other operating systems might not be able to access such a partition.
-
If you have created a primary partition instead of just another extended/logical partition within one, the above dialog also displays an Active Partition checkbox. You'll have to check that, if you'll use that partition to boot a Haiku installation.
-
Before you can use, or even mount the newly created partition, it has to be initialized with a filesystem.
+
A questo punto ci si trova di fronte una finestra che permette di sistemare la dimensione e il tipo delle partizioni. Scegliere il Be File System se si intende usare la partizione per l'installazione di Haiku o se si intendono usare tutte le interessanti funzionalità offerte da Haiku come gli attributi e le query. Bisogna notare che gli altri sistemi operativi potrebbero non essere in grado di accedere a questo tipo di partizioni.
+
Se è stata creata una partizione primaria piuttosto che un'altra partizione estesa o logica, la finestra di sopra mostrerà anche una casella Active Partition. Bisognerà mettervi il segno di spunta se si intende usare quella partizione come boot per un'installazione di Haiku.
+
Prima di poter usare, o anche solo montare la partizione appena creata, questa deve essere inizializzata con un filesystem.
Solo le partizioni non montate possono essere inizializzate usando il menù Partition | Initialize.
-
Here you set the name for the partition and it's blocksize. 2048 bytes per block are recommended, but you can choose larger or smaller sizes if you have these very specific needs.
-Initializing will destroy all data on that partition!
+
Da qui è possibile impostare il nome per la partizione e le dimensioni di ogni blocco. Sono raccomandati 2048 byte per ciascun blocco ma, se si hanno necessità specifiche, si possono impostare valori più grandi o più piccoli.
+L'inizializzazione cancellerà permanentemente ogni dato presente su quella partizione!
Non presente, solitamente lanciato effettuando un doppio clic su un file supportato.
-
Posizione:
/boot/system/apps/Expander
+
Locazione:
/boot/system/apps/Expander
Impostazioni:
~/config/settings/Expander_Settings
-
Expander is a small tool to quickly unpack the most common archives, among them zip, gzip, bzip2, rar and tar.gz.
-Just double-click an archive to see this simple interface:
+
Expander è una semplice applicazione utile per decomprimere rapidamente gli archivi più comuni, tra questi zip, gzip, bzip2, rar e tar.gz.
+È sufficiente effettuare un doppio clic su un archivio per visualizzare la semplice interfaccia dell'applicazione :
-
Source
ALTS
will open a file dialog to find an archive to unpack.
-
Destination
ALTD
will open a file dialog to set the destination.
-
Expand
ALTE
will start the unpacking. It can be aborted with ALTK.
+
Source
ALTS
aprirà una finestra di selezione file per cercare un archivio da decomprimere.
+
Destination
ALTD
aprirà una finestra di selezione file per impostare una destinazione.
+
Expand
ALTE
darà inizio al processo di decompressione che può sempre essere annullato con ALTK.
-
You can toggle the display of the file listing by un/checking Show Contents or pressing ALTL.
-
Expander can only unpack whole archives.
-You can't select individual files to expand or add/remove files from the archive.
+
È possibile attivare o disattivare la visualizzazione dei file tramite l'impostazione di Show Contents o premendo ALTL.
+
Expander si occupa solamente di decomprimere interi archivi.
+Non è possibile né decomprimere singoli file né aggiungerne o rimuoverne da un archivio esistente.
Edit | Preferences... or ALTP opens a preference panel that offers some useful settings to adjust Expander's behavior.
The options are all self-explanatory:
Contrary to the BeOS, Haiku uses vector icons instead of bitmap icons. A special Haiku Vector Icon Format (HVIF) was developed that is highly optimized for small file sizes and fast rendering. That's why our icons are for the most part much smaller than either a bitmap or the widely used SVG format. Also, unlike BeOS' bitmap icons, Haiku isn't limited to an 8bit palette (256 colors).
-Take this icon of the Terminal, for example:
Contrariamente a BeOS, Haiku utilizza icone vettoriali al posto delle icone bitmap. È stato sviluppato uno speciale Formato di Icone Vettoriali per Haiku (HVIF) che è altamente ottimizzato per file di piccole dimensioni e per un rendering veloce. Ecco perché la maggior parte delle nostre icone sono molto più piccole di una bitmap o del più ampiamente usato formato SVG. Inoltre, a differenza delle icone bitmap di BeOS, Haiku non si limita a una tavolozza 8 bit (256 colori).
+Prendete questa icona del terminale, ad esempio:
Bitmap
SVG
HVIF
1,024 byte + 256 byte
7,192 byte
768 byte
-
Note that the BeOS used two versions of an icon, one 16x16 and one 32x32, to achieve good visuals in List and Icon View mode.
-
This trick isn't needed with vector icons. Besides only taking up a few hundred bytes in a file, vector icons also scale much better than bitmaps. (Note: BeOS offered only a 16x16 and 32x32 display.)
+
Notare che BeOS ha usato due versioni della stessa icona, una di 16x16 e l'altra di 32x32, per ottenere buone visualizzazioni in modalità lista e in modalità visuale icone.
+
Questo trucco non è necessario con icone vettoriali. Oltre ad occupare solo poche centinaia di byte in un file, le icone vettoriali scalano molto meglio di quelle bitmap. (Nota: BeOS offre solo una visualizzazione 16x16 e una 32x32.)
16x16
32x32
64x64
128x128
Bitmap
@@ -103,29 +106,29 @@ Take this icon of the Terminal, for example:
Icons are stored as an attribute with their file. However, that doesn't mean that every file has to have this attribute to appear with an icon in a Tracker window: data files inherit their icon from their filetype. To globally change the filetype's icon you use the FileTypes preferences. If you only want to add a special icon to an individual file, you use the FileType Add-On on it instead. See topic Filetypes for more information.
-
Being an attribute, it follows that only filesystems supporting metadata can retain a file's individual icon. So, if you move files off your BFS volume, consider zipping them up so you don't lose icons or other attributes.
Le icone sono archiviate come un attributo con i loro file. Tuttavia, ciò non significa che ogni file deve avere questo attributo per apparire con un'icona in una finestra del Tracker: i file di dati ereditano la loro icona dal loro tipo di file. Per cambiare globalmente l'icona del tipo di file utilizzazre le preferenze dei FileType. Se si vuole aggiungere soltanto un'icona speciale per un singolo file, si utilizza invece il FileType Add-On su di essa. Vedere il documento Filetypes per maggiori informazioni.
+
Essendo un attributo, ne consegue che solo i filesystem che supportano i metadati possono conservare singola icona di un file. Quindi, se si spostano i file da un volume BFS, si consigli di comprimerli in modo da non perdere gli attributi delle icone o di altro tipo.
Icon-O-Matic is Haiku's icon editor that can save your work as HVIF, SVG or PNG. The icon can also be directly attached as attribute to an existing file or exported as a resource or source file used by developers. Since the application was tailored to the optimized HVIF format, its usage reflects the inner workings of this format.
Icon-O-Matic è l'editor di icone di Haiku che può salvare il fle come HVIF, SVG o PNG. L'icona può anche essere collegata direttamente come attributo a un file esistente o esportata come file di risorse o come sorgente utilizzato dagli sviluppatori. Dato che l'applicazione è stata ottimizzata su misura per il formato HVIF, il suo uso riflette il funzionamento interno di questo formato.
Other than your normal vector graphics software, you don't deal with separate objects that each include all their specific properties like path, stroke width, stroke and fill color etc. Rather, you assemble your objects ("shapes") from shared paths and colors ("styles") and set certain properties. This re-using of elements is one secret of HVIF's efficiency. Although that imposes some constraints on the icon designer, there are a few advantages, too.
For example, by re-using a path, several objects can be modified together by manipulating this one path. Think of an object and its shadow. Modifying their shared path will change the object itself and automatically its (maybe slightly distorted/translated) shadow.
-
Here's a quick overview of Icon-O-Matic's window:
+
Ecco una rapida panoramica della finestra di Icon-O-Matic:
-
To create any visible object on the canvas, you need a shape with a path and a style. Conveniently, you can create one, two or all three of those together from the Shape menu. Every kind of object (Paths, Shapes, Transformers, and Styles) has a menu above its list of elements, offering various commands. Every element has certain options that are set in the Properties view.
+
Per creare qualsiasi oggetto visibile nella finestra di disegno, è necessaria una forma con un percorso e uno stile. È possibile crearli comodamente tutti insieme o anche uno per volta dal menù Shape. Ogni tipo di oggetto (Percorso, Forma, Transformatore, e Stile) ha un menù sopra la propria lista degli elementi, che offrono vari comandi. Ogni elemento ha alcune opzioni che vengono impostate dal menù Properties.
A path consists of several points which are connected with lines or Bezier curves. To add or change points, make sure the path is selected in the path list.
Un percorso è costituito da diversi punti che sono collegati con linee e curve di Bezier. Per aggiungere o modificare i punti, assicurarsi che il percorso sia selezionato nella lista dei percorsi.
-
Simply clicking in the canvas will set the first point. While setting a point, you decide if the resulting line will be straight or curved: a simple click and release produces a straight line, holding down the mouse button and moving the mouse will drag out the handles for a Bezier curve. Of course, you can also change it all later on.
+
Basta cliccare sulla finestra di disegno per posizionare il primo punto. Nell'atto di posizionare un punto, si decide se la linea risultante sarà dritta o curva: basta cliccare una volta e rilasciare per una linea retta, oppure tenere premuto il tasto del mouse e muoverlo per trascinare le maniglie di una curva di Bezier. Naturalmente, sarà possibile effettuare modifiche in seguito.
@@ -136,7 +139,7 @@ Vice versa, to go from Bezier to a corner-point, hold ALT
Selected points are deleted by pressing DEL or by clicking on any point while holding CTRL.
-
The mouse pointer indicates the current mode:
+
Il puntatore del mouse indica le seguenti modalità:
@@ -155,27 +158,27 @@ Selected points are deleted by pressing DEL or by click
Select points SHIFT
-
You can invoke a context menu by right-clicking a point or a selection of points:
+
È possibile richiamare un menu contestuale cliccando col tasto destro su un punto o una selezione di punti:
-
Select all
ALTA
Selects all points of the current path.
-
Transform
T
Puts all selected points in a transformation box, so you can move, resize and rotate them together. It works just like with shapes, described a bit further down.
-
Split
Splits selected points into two, one sitting on top of the other.
-
Flip
Rotates selected points by 180°. Only has an effect on Bezier points.
-
Remove
DEL
Deletes selected points.
+
Select all
ALTA
Seleziona tutti i punti del percorso corrente.
+
Transform
T
Pone tutti i punti selezionati in una casella di trasformazione in modo da poterli muovere, ridimensionare o ruotare contemporaneamente. Funziona come per le forme, descritte più avanti.
+
Split
Divide i punti selezionati in due, uno sopra all'altro.
+
Flip
Ruota i punti selezionati di 180°. Applicabile solamente ai punti Bezier.
The Path menu offers a few obvious entries to Add Rectangle and Add Circle or to Duplicate or Remove a path. Here are some that may need a bit more explaining:
Il menù Path offre poche ovvie voci per Add Rectangle e Add Circle o per Duplicate o Remove un percorso. Qui di seguito sono riportate quelle voci che potrebbero necessitare di qualche spiegazione in più:
Reverse
If your path isn't "closed" (see Path Properties below), a click into the canvas always creates a new point, connecting it with the last one. "Reverse" will reverse this order and your new point will connect to original start point instead.
Clean Up
Most useful with imported SVGs, this function will remove redundant points.
Rotate Indices Right
ALTR
Practically, this rotates the opening of a path. It's best seen when using a not-closed path with a style and a shape with a stroke transformer. Now, if your path looks like a ⊂ it will rotate like this: ⊂ ∩ ⊃ ∪.
Properties at the bottom left of the window offers all available settings of the currently selected object. A path only has two: a Name and if it's Closed or not.
Le Properties in basso a sinistra della finestra mostrano tutte le impostazioni disponibili per gli oggetti correntemente selezionati. Un percorso ne ha solo due: un Name e se è Closed o meno.
@@ -212,15 +215,15 @@ Selected points are deleted by pressing DEL or by click
If not, "Freeze Transformation" will apply the current shape transformation to the assigned path(s). A future "Reset Transformation" will then return to this new state.
@@ -236,36 +239,36 @@ With the LOD you control the visibility of a shape depending on its size. That w
For example, if Shape 1 were to be shown below 48px and Shape 2 from 48px upward (LOD: 48/64 = 0.75):
A style can either be a solid color or some type of gradient.
-Besides the predefined colors under Swatches, you can mix your own by clicking on the current color. Also, note the slider under the color spectrum which sets the alpha-channel (transparency).
Uno stile può essere dato un colore pieno oppure da alcuni tipi di gradiente.
+Oltre ai colori predefiniti sotto Swatches, è possibile crearne di propri facendo clic sul colore corrente. Inoltre, si faccia caso al cursore sotto lo spettro di colori, questo serve per impostare il canale alfa (trasparenza).
-
You quickly create a new style by mixing your color and simply drag&dropping it into the list of styles.
+
È possibile creare rapidamente un nuovo stile semplicemente mescolando il colore e trascinandolo all'interno della lista degli stili.
If you go for a gradient, you set the type (Linear, Radial, Diamond, Cone) and then define the start and end colors. This is done with a drag&drop from a color bucket into the respective color indicator under the gradient.
Of course you can move these indicators to change the gradient to your liking. You can also insert more indicators to add more colors by double-clicking into the gradient. Pressing DEL removes the selected indicator.
You can move, resize and rotate the representing box of a gradient on the canvas until it fits your needs. This works just like with shapes.
Anche qui in alto c'è la solita barra con File, Edit, Options. L'utilizzo è piuttosto intuitivo, pertanto si presterà attenzione soltanto a come salvare un lavoro.
File | Save As... will save in a special Icon-O-Matic format that retains additional information like the names of paths, shapes and styles. These will be stripped from the actual icon once you export it to save space. It's a good idea to back-up your work like this, because without named objects everything's named "<path>/<shape>/<style>" which makes specific changes tedious.
File | Export As... opens a familiar save panel with a file format pop-up menu at the bottom, offering these choices:
HVIF
Haiku Vector Icon Format
-
HVIF RDef
Saves as resource used by programmers
-
HVIF Source Code
Saves as source code used by programmers
-
SVG
Saves as SVG
-
PNG
Saves as a 64px sized PNG
-
PNG Set
Saves as 16, 32 and 64px sized PNGs
+
HVIF RDef
Salva come risorsa utilizzata dai programmatori
+
Codice sorgente HVIF
Salva come codice sorgente utilizzato dai programmatori
+
SVG
Salva come SVG
+
PNG
Salva come PNG di 64px di dimensioni
+
Set di PNG
Salva come PNG di 16, 32 e 64px di dimensioni
BEOS:ICON Attribute
Choose a file and set its icon attribute directly
META:ICON Attribute
Choose a file and attach the icon as mere meta data
@@ -307,13 +310,13 @@ Of course you can move these indicators to change the gradient to your liking. Y
Di seguito alcune cose che bisognerebbe tenere a mente quando si lavora con Icon-O-Matic e alcuni consigli per il suo utilizzo:
-
Read the Icon Guidelines to learn about important characteristics of Haiku icons, e.g. perspective, colors and shadows.
-
You should always try to minimize your use of paths, those are the most expensive, file size wise. Re-use paths wherever possible and work with manipulated shapes and their transformers instead. Smart use of gradients can also save space.
+
Leggere le Linee guida per le icone per imparare quali sono le caratteristiche importanti per un'icona di Haiku, ad esempio la prospettiva, i colori e le ombre.
+
Bisognerebbe sempre tentare di non abusare dell'utilizzo dei percorsi che risultano essere piuttosto costosi in termini di dimensione dei file. Riutilizzare i percorsi ove possibile e lavorare con forme manipolate o con i loro trasformatori. Si può risparmiare spazio con un uso adeguato dei gradienti.
Wherever possible, you should activate Snap-to-Grid from the Options menu when editing paths. Path points that align with the 64x64 pixel grid use less storage space. You'll also get the crispest look if points are set on exact pixel borders. For example, it is important to align the most prominent outlines with the 16x16 grid.
-
Check the preview to see if your icon still looks good in 16x16. You may want to use the Level Of Detail settings described in the Shapes section.
+
Controllare l'anteprima per verificare che l'icona 16x16 si veda ancora bene. Volendo, è possibile utilizzare le impostazioni del Livello di dettaglio descritte nella sezione delle Forme.
There's an easy way to produce letters, even if Icon-O-Matic doesn't provide such a tool. Just enter the text in a text editor such as StyledEdit, adjust font type and style, and drag&drop or copy&paste the selected text into Icon-O-Matic. This will create the according paths and shapes.
If you assign more than one path to a shape, their overlapping areas will cancel each other out. When one path is completely inside another, it practically creates a hole in the resulting shape.
You can zoom in and out of the canvas with the mouse wheel. Panning is done either by click&drag with the middle mouse button or with a normal left-click&drag while holding SPACE.
@@ -342,7 +345,7 @@ Of course you can move these indicators to change the gradient to your liking. Y
La traduzione di questa pagina non è stata completata. Per questo motivo le parti non tradotte sono visibili in inglese.
-
Installer
+
L'Installer
-
Deskbar:
Applications
-
Posizione:
/boot/system/apps/Installer
-
Impostazioni:
none
+
Deskbar:
Applicazioni
+
Locazione:
/boot/system/apps/Installer
+
Impostazioni:
nessuna
-
The Installer is used to copy Haiku onto another volume.
-Upon launch it displays a start window with important information. It's not a mindless EULA you're used to click away in the blink of an eye, it states:
+
L'installer è utile per copiare Haiku all'interno di un altro volume.
+Appena avviato, mostra in una finestra iniziale con importanti informazioni; questa non è la solita EULA da saltare in un batter d'occhio, essa afferma che:
-
This is alpha-quality software. Make backups or suffer the consequences!
-
The Installer needs a prepared partition. You may have to use a GParted LiveCD or a similar tool until Haiku's DriveSetup is mature enough to handle this task.
-
Haiku can be added manually to the bootmanager GRUB. In short, you have add an entry to /boot/grub/menu.lst of your Linux installation, similar to this:
+
Questo è un software in fase alpha. Raccomanda di effettuare un backup prima che sia troppo tardi.
+
L'installazione necessita di una partizione già pronta. Per questo compito si raccomanda l'uso di GParted LiveCD o di un'applicazione simile fino a che il DriveSetup di Haiku diventa abbastanza maturo da poter gestire questo lavoro.
+
Haiku può essere aggiunto manualmente al bootmanager GRUB. In poche parole, bisogna aggiungere a /boot/grub/menu.lst dell'installazione di Linux già esistente, qualcosa come:
# Haiku on /dev/sda7
title Haiku
rootnoverify (hd0,6)
chainloader +1
-
Once you acknowledged with Continue, you're presented with the main window:
+
Una volta che si è accettato con Continue, viene aperta la finestra principale:
-
In the first pop-up menu you choose the source for the installation. It can be a currently installed Haiku or can come from an install CD or USB drive, etc.
-The second pop-up menu specifies the target for the installation. This target partition/volume will be completely overwritten and has to be set aside beforehand by a partitioning tool like GParted.
-
Clicking the little expander widget will Show Optional Packages, if available, that you can choose to install in addition to the basic Haiku.
-
You should do a last check if you really picked the right target before starting the installation process. Click on Setup partitions... to open DriveSetup and have a look at the naming and layout of the available volumes and partitions.
-
Begin starts the installation procedure, which basically copies everything but the home/ and common/ folder onto the target volume and makes it bootable.
+
Nel primo menù a cascata è possibile selezionare la sorgente d'installazione. Questa può essere una versione di Haiku già installata, un CD d'installazione o una pennetta USB, ecc.
+Nel secondo menù a cascata è specificata la destinazione dell'installazione. Questa verrà completamente sovrascritta dopo essere stata preparata in un primo momento grazie a un'applicazione come GParted.
+
Cliccando sul widget Mostra pacchetti opzionali verranno mostrati, se presenti, i pacchetti addizionali tra i quali è possibile selezionare quelli da installare in aggiunta a quelli base di Haiku.
+
Prima di cominciare il processo d'installazione, è consigliabile controllare per l'ultima volta se si è scelta una destinazione corretta. Cliccare su Imposta partizioni... per aprire DriveSetup e dare un'occhiata ai nomi e alla configurazione dei volumi e delle partizioni disponibili.
+
Begin darà inizio alla procedura d'installazione, che fondamentalmente si occupa di copiare all'interno del volume di destinazione qualsiasi cosa tranne le cartelle home/ e common/, fatto questo lo rende avviabile.
At the end of the installation procedure, the partition is automatically made bootable. However, it can happen that some other operating system or partitioning tool (accidentally) overwrites the boot sector of your Haiku volume. In this case, boot your installation CD and start the Installer. Select your Haiku boot partition from the Onto: Please choose target menu and select Write boot sector from the Tools menu to make it bootable again.
-
The other item in the Tools menu is the Boot Manager that puts a menu in the boot sector to choose what operating system to boot.
-You don't need to run the Boot Manager if you already use a bootmanager like Grub, in which case you have to add Haiku manually (see above), or Haiku runs exclusively on your machine.
-
Boot Manager isn't yet tested very well and still has a few restrictions that it will complain about if they aren't met: the menu can only be installed on your first harddisk and there has to be a 2KiB space after the Master Boot Record (MBR).
-
You don't have to worry too much, however, the original MBR is saved. In order to uninstall the boot menu, you'll just boot from the install CD again, run the Installer and invoke the Boot Manager once more.
-The Boot Manager panel will guide you through installing or uninstalling the boot menu.
Dopo la procedura d'installazione, la partizione viene automaticamente resa avviabile. Tuttavia, può capitare che qualche altro sistema operativo o qualche applicazione di partizionamento sovrascriva (accidentalmente) il boot sector del volume di Haiku. In questo caso, avviare il CD di installazione e far partire l'Installer. Selezionare la propria partizione di boot di Haiku dal menù Su: Scegli destinazione e selezionare Scrivi settore d'avvio dal menù Strumenti per renderla nuovamente avviabile.
+
L'altro elemento che si trova nel menù Strumenti è Boot Manager che crea un menù nel boot sector dal quale scegliere quale sistema operativo avviare.
+Non c'è bisogno di eseguire Boot Manager se Haiku è l'unico sistema installato sulla macchina oppure si sta già utilizzando un bootmanager come Grub, in questo caso bisognerebbe aggiungere manualmente Haiku (si veda sopra).
+
Boot Manager non è stato ancora testato molto bene e necessita ancora di diversi requisiti che, se non sono soddisfatti, possono dare problemi: il menù può essere installato solo sul primo HardDisk e devono esserci 2KB di spazio libero dopo il Master Boot Record (MBR).
+
Ad ogni modo, non è necessario preoccuparsi troppo, il MBR originale viene salvato. Per disinstallare il menù di boot, basta avviare nuovamente il CD d'installazione, far partire l'Installer e selezionare nuovamente il Boot Manager.
+Il pannello del Boot Manager permetterà facilmente di installare o rimuovere il menù di boot.
diff --git a/userguide/it/applications/list-cli-apps.html b/userguide/it/applications/list-cli-apps.html
index efb7af26..c28177d3 100644
--- a/userguide/it/applications/list-cli-apps.html
+++ b/userguide/it/applications/list-cli-apps.html
@@ -10,12 +10,16 @@
* Authors:
* Daniel Marth
* Humdinger
+ * Translators:
+ * Francesco Franchina
+ * MichaelPeppers
+ * Barrett
*
-->
- List of commands
+ Lista dei comandi
@@ -32,7 +36,7 @@
La traduzione di questa pagina non è stata completata. Per questo motivo le parti non tradotte sono visibili in inglese.
-
List of all commandline applications
+
Lista di tutte le applicazioni su riga di comando
-
Location:
/boot/system/bin /boot/common/bin ~/config/bin
+
Locazione:
/boot/system/bin /boot/common/bin ~/config/bin
-
All commandline applications shipped with Haiku are in either /boot/system/bin or /boot/common/bin. Your own or additionally installed commandline apps should go in ~/config/bin. All these locations are part of the PATH variable and are therefore automatically found.
-Here's a list of all commandline applications that are shipped with Haiku. Each with only a short description of what it does, for more detailed information on its usage execute the command with the parameter --help.
+
Tutte le applicazioni su riga di comando fornite con Haiku si trovano in /boot/system/bin oppure in /boot/common/bin. Le applicazioni dell'utente, insieme a quelle addizionali, dovrebbero risiedere in ~/config/bin. Tutti questi percorsi fanno parte della variabile PATH e pertanto sono trovati automaticamente.
+Qui a seguire è presentata una lista di tutte le applicazioni su riga di comando fornite con Haiku. Ciascuna ha solamente una breve descrizione di quello che fa, per informazioni più dettagliate sul suo utilizzo, eseguire il comando con il parametro --help.
La traduzione di questa pagina non è stata completata. Per questo motivo le parti non tradotte sono visibili in inglese.
Magnify
-
Deskbar:
Applications
-
Posizione:
/boot/system/apps/Magnify
+
Deskbar:
Applicazioni
+
Locazione:
/boot/system/apps/Magnify
Impostazioni:
~/config/settings/Magnify_prefs
-
Magnify shows an enlarged version of the area around your mouse pointer.
+
Magnify visualizza una versione ingrandita della porzione di schermo in cui si trova il puntatore del mouse.
-
At the top you'll find the size and magnification level of the area. "32 x 32 @ 8 pixels/pixel" means that you look at a 32x32 pixel square around your mouse pointer and every pixel is enlarged by a factor of 8.
-
Below that is the color of the pixel that's marked by a red outline. Its color is presented as RGB and hex value.
-You can move the red outline with ← / → / ↑ / ↓.
-
To measure distances and align objects, you can add up to two blue crosshairs with ALTH. Their X/Y coordinates toward the top left corner and, if both are added, their X/Y distance from each other, are displayed at the bottom.
-They can also be moved with ← / → / ↑ / ↓. The active crosshair is marked with an "x".
-
You can move the mouse pointer pixel by pixel with OPT← / → / ↑ / ↓.
-
Clicking on the pop-up menu gives you a number of options:
+
In alto sono riportate la dimensione della porzione e il livello di ingrandimento. "32 x 32 @ 8 pixels/pixel" significa che la porzione attorno al puntatore del mouse è di 32x32 pixel e che ogni pixel risulta ingrandito per un fattore di 8.
+
Sotto questi dati è specificato il colore del pixel che è marcato con il bordo rosso il cui colore è espresso sia in RGB sia come valore esadecimale.
+È possibile spostare riquadro rosso con ← / → / ↑ / ↓.
+
Per misurare le distanze e allineare gli elementi, è possibile posizionare fino a due mirini blu con ALTH. In basso sono riportate le loro coordinate X ed Y calcolate a partire dall'angolo in alto a sinistra e, se sono posizionate entrambe, verrà visualizzata la distanza X ed Y l'una dall'altra.
+Queste possono anche essere spostate con ← / → / ↑ / ↓. Il mirino attivo è marcato con una "x".
+
Il puntatore del mouse può anche essere spostato pixel per pixel con OPT← / → / ↑ / ↓.
+
Cliccando sul menù pop-up, vengono visualizzate diverse opzioni:
-
Save Image
ALTS
Saves the current display as a resource file.
-
Copy Image
ALTC
Copies the current display to the clipboard.
-
Hide/Show Info
ALTT
Toggles the display of all the additional information.
-
Add a Crosshair
ALTH
Adds a crosshair you can drag around.
-
Remove a Crosshair
ALTSHIFTH
Removes the last added crosshair.
-
Hide/Show Grid
ALTG
Toggles the overlayed grid.
-
Freeze/Unfreeze image
ALTF
Stops/continues updating the magnification area.
-
Stick Coordinates
ALTI
Keeps updating the magnification area, but don't follow the mouse pointer any more.
-
Make Square
ALT/
Reverts back to a square display after resizing the window.
-
Decrease Window Size
ALT-
Shrinks the magnified area around the mouse pointer.
-
Increase Window Size
ALT+
Enlarges the magnified area around the mouse pointer.
-
Decrease Pixel Size
ALT,
Lowers magnification.
-
Increase Pixel Size
ALT.
Increases magnification.
+
Salva immagine
ALTS
Salva la visualizzazione corrente come file.
+
Copia immagine
ALTC
Copia la visualizzazione corrente egli appunti.
+
Nascondi/Mostra informazioni
ALTT
Attiva o disattiva la visualizzazione delle informazioni addizionali.
+
Aggiungi un mirino
ALTH
Aggiunge un mirino posizionabile.
+
Rimuovi un mirino
ALTSHIFTH
Rimuove l'ultimo mirino aggiunto.
+
Mostra/Nascondi griglia
ALTG
Attiva o disattiva la griglia.
+
Blocca/Sblocca immagine
ALTF
Attiva o disattiva il refresh dell'area ingrandita.
+
Mantieni queste coordinate
ALTI
Mantiene aggiornata l'area ingrandita ma smette di seguire il puntatore.
+
Rendi la finestra quadrata
ALT/
Torna ad avere una visuale quadrata anche dopo aver ridimensionato la finestra.
+
Diminuisci la dimensione della finestra
ALT-
Riduce la porzione di area ingrandita attorno al puntatore.
+
Aumenta la dimensione della finestra
ALT+
Aumenta la porzione di area ingrandita attorno al puntatore.
MediaPlayer is an application used for viewing multimedia files such as music or video files. It supports different formats.
-
-
Interface
-
-
MediaPlayer is easy-to-use because of its interface. There's no difference in interface while playing music or video.
-
+
MediaPlayer is the default player for all audio and video files. Thanks to it's ffmpeg backend, a plethora of widely used formats are supported. Its simple interface has all the controls you'd expect:
+
The slider of the progress bar allows you to quickly skim to a position, resting the mouse over it shows the current and remaining time of the clip. Clicking on the time display to the right of it, toggles between length, current and remaining time.
+Below that you find the usual controls to skip to the previous track, play/pause, stop and jump to the next track. Then comes a volume control (clicking the speaker symbol toggles muting) and a VU meter.
-
You can control playing media using a set of buttons - previous, play/pause, stop, next. Also, there is a progress bar, a volume controler and even an oscilloscope.
+
Audio and video playback
+
Since there aren't any specific features for for audio playback, we'll go straight to video or general features.
+
+
Available to all media is the File info... (ALTI). It shows information about the currently loaded file, like playing time or details of the audio/video track and its codec.
+
Most of the often used commands from the menus are also available from a right-click context menu on the video area. Convenient when in full-screen mode.
+Under Video you'll find options to zoom the window to various levels or force the aspect ratio to some standard values. Leaving the aspect ration to the default Stream settings should work best for correctly encoded files.
+
MediaPlayer supports subtitles in SRT format. To have them show up under Subtitles, their filenames have to be identical to their video file, with a suffixed language name and ".srt" instead of the video's extension. For example:
Multiple audio tracks, most often used for several languages inside one video file, are available from the Audio track submenu. The Video | Track submenu offers the same when having multiple video streams available.
+
You can toggle the Full screen mode (ALTENTER or F or a double left-click), hide MediaPlayer's window borders and controls with Hide interface (ALTH or a double right-click) or have it's window Always on top (ALTA).
-
Once you play a video file, you can double right-click on the display to hide interface. Double left-click instead causes displaying video in full-screen mode.
+
Playlists
+
MediaPlayer | Playlist... (ALTP) opens a window with the files currently queued up for playback. Double-clicking an entry starts playing it.
+
+
You can add more files by dropping them into the list and rearrange their position via drag & drop. From the Edit menu you can Randomize or Remove (DEL) an entry from the list or delete the actual file with Move to Trash (ALTT).
+
Of course, you can Save a playlist and later Open it again, or start it with simply double-clicking the playlist file.
-
Playing media
+
Settings
+
There are several settings to fine-tune MediaPlayer's behavior:
+
+
The first batch, Play mode, is pretty self-explaining. Start playback automatically, close windows when finished or play clips in a loop.
+
Next are different View options.
+You can opt to Use hardware overlay if available, which cuts down CPU usage but only works for one video window and needs a supporting video card driver.
+You can Scale movies smoothly (when not in overlay mode) which uses very fast filtering to smooth over otherwise blocky pixels when zooming video or watching in full-screen mode.
+Scale controls in full-screen mode if you prefer slightly bigger controls, maybe because you watch the screen from a bit farther away when in full-screen mode.
+Then there are settings for Subtitle size and Subtitle placement. They can be shown at the Bottom of video, which will always have them overlayed over the picture. Or Bottom of window, which allows you to resize the window vertically and have the subtitles appear in the black bar at the bottom instead.
+
The last setting determines the volume of clips whose windows are not currently active. You can have them all blaring at Full volume, at less confusing Low volume or quietly Muted.
-
There are options especially useful while watching DVD video or other files which include different audio/video tracks or have subtitles included. You can change audio tracks from Audio | Track just as Video | Track for various video tracks. You can also make use of subtitles, MediaPlayer supports .srt format. All available subtitles are showed as options in Video | Subtitles menu. The player gets names for this positions from the filename, eg. videoclip.english.srt shows as "english" in the menu.
+
Keyboard controls
+
MediaPlayer offers convenient key combinations to control playback without using the mouse.
+
+
Z
Skip to previous track
+
X
Play
+
C
Pause
+
V
Stop
+
B
Skip to next track
+
+
These keys are assigned to the functions of the control buttons. They are always the bottom left letter keys on the keyboard, i.e. they are used independently of your current keymapping. The above keys correspond to a standard US-american keymap.
+
+
→
Seek forwards
+
SHIFT→
Jump forwards 10 seconds
+
ALT→
Jump forwards 30 seconds
+
←
Seek backwards
+
SHIFT←
Jump backwards 10 seconds
+
ALT←
Jump backwards 30 seconds
-
+
↑
Increase volume
+
↓
Decrease volume
-
You can change the scale by resizing the window or simply from the Video menu. There are 50%, 100%, 200%, 300% and 400% options. There is an option to change the player to full-screen mode or to change ratio of the display.
-
-
Playlists
-
-
MediaPlayer supports playlists. You can either select a few files in Tracker using ALT and launched the application or add other files after launching the one using the drag and drop method. You can get to the playlist from menu - choose MediaPlayer | Playlist and the playlist window will pop-up.
-
-
-
-
You can save the current playlist or open one from the playlist window, of course. There is also a function that lets you to randomize your playlist. Use either Edit | Randomize menu position or ALTR shortcut. You can also both remove any file from playlist and remove it from playlist and put into Trash. This functions are available from Edit menu, too.
-
-
Other options
-
-
If you would like to rate a file, you can do this directly from MediaPlayer, too! Choose a rate from 1 to 10 from Attributes | Rating menu.
-
-
MediaPlayer is also able to show you some information about the file you play. It is available from MediaPlayer | File info... menu.
-
-
-
-
You can configure the application from MediaPlayer | Settings. There are some interesting options concerning looping playback, closing window when playback finishes, size and placement of subtitles or volume level while playing in the background.
-
-
Shortcuts
-
-
There are plenty of shortcuts for this application. SPACEBAR is used to play/pause the playback. You can control the whole playback with one hand, because alternate keys are used - Z to go to the previous track, X to play, C to pause and V to go to the next track. Left/Right cursors are used to seek, they cause 10 seconds seeking while ALT is pressed at the same time. Up and down cursors controls the volume and cause going to the previous/next track while ALT is pressed.
-
-
ALTF activates full-screen mode, ALTP pops-up playlist window, ALTI shows file information, ALTH hides interface, ALTA causes MediaPlayer is always on top, ALTS moves you to the settings window and ALTQ quits the application.
+
ALT↑
Skip to previous Track
+
ALT↓
Skip to next Track
+
Spacebar
Toggle play/pause
+
ALTENTER
Toggle full-screen mode (also done by double left-clicking the video area)
Documentation is still missing. If you want to work on it, please announce it on the Documentation mailing list to avoid duplication.
+
As the name suggests, MidiPlayer is used to playback midi music files. Midi files are special, as they don't contain the actual digitized and in some way encoded music, but only a description of it: Hold this note for that long with this volume and use instrument X for it.
+While this keeps file sizes pretty small, it also follows that depending on the instrument library (the so-called "SoundFont") the results can differ hugely. Also, these SoundFonts tend to be quite large, increasingly so with the number and quality of the instrument samples.
+
Haiku doesn't come with a SoundFont installed, because they are so large and only few people generally need one. Most of those who do, already have high quality or custom SoundFonts. To be able to at least hear something you can install a free one from an optional package. In Terminal, enter: installoptionalpackage TimGMSoundFont
+
To use any other SoundFont, create a link to it in /boot/system/data/synth and name it big_synth.sy.
+
+
MidiPlayer's interface is very simple. Just double-click or drag & drop a midi file and playback starts. You control the volume with the slider and add reverb effects from the Reverb pop-up menu. Activating the scope will show a visualization in form of an oscilloscope running at the top.
No entry, normally launched via
double-clicking a supported file.
-
Posizione:
/boot/system/apps/PackageInstaller
-
Impostazioni:
none
+
Locazione:
/boot/system/apps/PackageInstaller
+
Impostazioni:
nessuna
-
Documentation is still missing. If you want to work on it, please announce it on the Documentation mailing list to avoid duplication.
+
This page is currently only a first draft. Please check back later for a refined version.
+
PackageInstaller is a software installer for BeOS packages in PKG format. It provides an easy-to-use GUI that helps in fast package installation in Haiku.
+
It is being executed automatically when you try to open files with .pkg extension.
+
+
The main window gives access to two configurations:
+
+
type of installation (depending on the developer there might be more than one (standard) installation option).
+
Installation location (only entire partitions/hard disks can be chosen, not custom paths)
+
+
After clicking Install the extraction and installation process will begin.
+
+
At this point warnings and errors can appear saying which libraries and dependencies are missing in order to run the program. It might be required to install these packages before attempting to install desired program.
+
When the installation is complete, package should appear in the Deskbar applications menu.
La traduzione di questa pagina non è stata completata. Per questo motivo le parti non tradotte sono visibili in inglese.
Pe
-
Deskbar:
Applications
-
Posizione:
/boot/apps/Pe/Pe
+
Deskbar:
Applicazioni
+
Locazione:
/boot/apps/Pe/Pe
Documentazione:
/boot/apps/Pe/Documentation.html
Impostazioni:
~/config/settings/pe/*
-
Pe is a sophisticated editor, with its syntax highlighting targeted mainly at programmers and HTML writers. Originally created by Maarten Hekkelmann, it's been open sourced and maintained by Haiku developers. A bugtracker and more information is available at the Pe project page.
-
Find out more about Pe's features in its local documentation.
+
Pe è un editor sofisticato, con la colorazione della sintassi indirizzata prevalentemente ai programmaori e agli scrittori di codice HTML, creato originariamente da Maarten Hekkelmann è successivamente diventato open source e ora è mantenuto dagli sviluppatori di Haiku. Un bugtracker e molte altre informazioni sono disponibili nella pagina ufficiale del progetto Pe.
+
E' possibile trovare molte altre informazioni nella documentazione locale di Pe.
No entry, normally launched via
double-clicking a supported file.
-
Posizione:
/boot/system/apps/ShowImage
+
Locazione:
/boot/system/apps/ShowImage
Impostazioni:
~/config/settings/ShowImage_settings
-
ShowImage is an application used for viewing images in various formats. Its funcionality is not limited only to viewing photos, it can also crop images, show slideshows, rotate and flip images.
-
-
If you want to launch this application, simply double-click on some image on your computer.
-
-
Browse photos
-
-
You are not limited to viewing only the image you used to launch application. You can go both to previous or to next image from the folder using arrows on keybord. You can also zoom using either mouse scroll or shortcuts - ALT+ for zooming in and ALT- for zooming out. High-quality zooming is set by default, but you can disable this function unchecking View | High-quality zooming. This function does very fast bilinear filtering.
-
-
There is a possibility to simply zoom picture to the original size or to fit to the window size. Use View menu or shortcuts - ALT1 to get back to the original size or ALT0 to fit to the window size. From the same menu you can also enable stretching an image to the window.
-
-
-
-
ShowImage does support multiple-page files, such as TIFF. It means you can turn pages while browsing any multiple-page image. Make use of Browse menu or use shortcuts (see screenshot above) for this function.
-
-
To change mode to full-screen, simply choose ALTENTER shortcut.
-
-
Slide show
-
-
You can run slideshow using menu, simply choose View | Slide show. There is an option for changing slide delay from 3 to 20 seconds. Default value is a 3 second delay, but you can change it from View | Slide delay menu.
-
-
Flip and rotate images
-
-
This function is also built-in. If you would like to rotate some image, choose proper position from Image menu or use shortcuts - ALTR will rorate your image clockwise and SHIFTALTR counterclockwise.
-
-
You can also flip images. Image | Flip left to right will flip your image horizontally and Image | Flip top to bottom vertically.
-
-
Set background
-
-
You can set your desktop background directly from ShowImage. Just choose Image | Use as background... and Backgrounds preflet will pop-up.
-
-
Drag and drop
-
-
There is an option to select a piece of an image and create new image file from the selection. Simply press CTRL or ALT and select a fragment you would like to use as a new file and drag the selection to desktop. Also, you can change mode to selection mode, so you will be able to select parts of images using just a left mouse button. This option is available from Edit | Selection Mode
-
-
-
-
Once you use right mouse button to drag the selection, an image-format menu pops-up.
+
ShowImage allows you to view images in all formats that are supported through DataTranslators. New formats are automatically recognized when their translator is added to the system. This has been done for Haiku's vector icon files, WonderBrush images or when WebM images became available, for example.
+ShowImage provides minimal editing features to crop, rotate and flip images and to save them in another format.
+
Viewing
+
+
The View menu offers to start a Slide show of all images in a folder (or query result window) and set a Slide delay from 2 to 20 seconds.
+
Other commands apply to the currently displayed image (without changing the size of the window):
+Original size shows the image with a 100% zoom factor.
+Fit to window shrinks the image back into the window fame, e.g. after having zoomed into it or after resizing the window.
+Zoom in and Zoom out move into and out of the image in 10% steps. Zooming is also done with the mouse wheel; to pan an image bigger than the window, simply left-click and drag your mouse around.
+
Two settings don't just apply to the currently displayed image and are remembered when browsing from one image to the next:
+High quality zooming applies a very fast filter when zooming to reduce jagged lines and produce a smoother result.
+Stretch to window will stretch smaller images to fill the current window frame.
+
Then there's a Full screen mode with an option to Show caption in full screen mode which overlays the file name at the bottom of the image.
+
Lastly, Show tool bar will show/hide the graphical controls:
+
+
From left to right: Previous image, next image, start slide show (in full screen mode), selection mode, original size, fit to window, zoom in, zoom out.
+
Most of the more often used commands are also available from a right-click context menu on the image. Convenient when in full-screen mode.
+
Browsing
+
+
After opening an image you can quickly browse through all the other images in its folder (or query result window) by pressing ↑/↓ or ←/→. You can see the selection change accordingly in the Tracker window.
+
There is a quick way to open the folder of the current image and even navigate to its parent and subfolders. It works just like with drill-down navigating in Tracker by clicking in the info area in the status bar that shows size and format of the current image.
+
Looking at the Browse menu, shows another type of browsing: Some image formats, like TIFF, can contain several pages in one file. Commands like First page and Next page let you navigate those pages.
+
Editing
+
+
The Image menu offers the few image manipulations necessary for an image viewer: rotating and flipping the image. Note however, that the actual image data won't be changed. Only an attribute is added to the file so it'll be shown rotated or flipped the next time you open it.
+
Use as backgroud... will open the Backgrounds preferences to set the current picture as image for your workspaces.
+
Cropping is another feature that's needed sometimes. To define the frame to cut to, you can switch to Selection mode from the Edit menu and drag out a box with your left mouse button. If you don't want to change modes first, you can create this box in "normal mode" by simply holding CTRL while left-click-dragging, which otherwise would just pan the image around.
+Clear selection or ESC will remove the selection box.
+
The following chapter shows how to actually save the cropped area.
+
Saving and converting
+
To save or convert an image into any available format, you can invoke the normal Save as... item from the File menu, select the format and choose a file name.
+Often quicker, especially when the Tracker window with the destination folder is already open, is using drag & drop.
+
+
This is also how the above mentioned cropping is finalized. Either select a frame as described above, or choose Edit | Select all for the whole image. Then drag & drop the selection onto the Desktop or any Tracker window to create a new image clipping in the same format of the original image.
+
To save in another file format, do the dragging with the right mouse button and choose a format from the context menu when dropping the image.
+
Keyboard shortcuts
+
Here's a list of the most useful shortcuts:
+
+
← / ↑
Previous image
+
→ / ↓
Next image
+
DEL
Move to Trash
+
+
Zoom in
+
-
Zoom out
+
0
Original size (100% zoom)
+
1
Fit to window
+
ALTENTER
Toggle full screen mode (also via doubleclick)
+
CTRL
While holding CTRL you can create a selection frame without explicitly switching to selection mode.
StyledEdit is Haiku's simple text editor. Although it saves files in plain text format, additional attributes are written in order to have limited formatting capabilities when viewed with StyledEdit.
~/config/settings/Terminal
-~/.profile - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/system/etc/profile
-~/.inputrc - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/system/etc/inputrc
+~/.profile - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/common/etc/profile
+~/.inputrc - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/common/etc/inputrc
The Terminal is Haiku's interface to bash, the Bourne Again Shell.
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@
Double-clicking into the emtpy part of the tab bar opens a new tab; onto a tab opens a dialog to rename its title. There are several %-designated variables that are explained with a tooltip when you hover the mouse over the text field.
By default, %1d: %p, a tab shows the current directory and, separated by a :, the name of the currently running process (or -- if it's just bash running, probably idling). The screenshot above shows the first tab with a FTP session in the Desktop folder and a second tab idling at home.
-Via Edit|Window title... the Terminal window's title can be edited in a similar way.
+Via Edit | Window title... the Terminal window's title can be edited in a similar way.
Right-clicking a tab shows a context menu to Close tab, Close other tabs or, like double-clicking, Edit tab title....
A Terminal window can be resized like any other window or you use the presets from the Settings | Window size menu. ALTENTER toggles fullscreen mode.
Changed window size and text encoding are only kept choosing Settings | Save as default.
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Pressing OK will save the current settings as defaul
Bash customization
Coming from Unix, there are countless possibilities to customize the bash itself. There are two files that are especially important to the user: .profile and .inputrc
-Both files can be created in the home/ folder and add or override the system defaults that are defined in /boot/system/etc/.
+Both files can be created in the home/ folder and add or override the system defaults that are defined in /boot/common/etc/.
.profile
The .profile is loaded every time you open a new Terminal. It sets all kinds of aliases and variables that will affect bash's behavior and appearance. You'll find many online resources that will detail all possibilities.
La Deskbar è il piccolo pannello che si trova normalmente in alto a destra sullo schermo. La Deskbar di Haiku corrisponde alla barra delle applicazioni di Windows con il pulsante Start. Contiene il menu dal quale si possono sia avviare le applicazioni e sia gestire le varie preferenze, una tray con un orologio ed altri strumenti come una lista dei programmi in esecuzione.
+
La Deskbar è il piccolo pannello che si trova normalmente in alto a destra sullo schermo. La Deskbar di Haiku corrisponde alla barra delle applicazioni di Windows con il pulsante Start. Contiene il menu dal quale si possono avviare le applicazioni e gestire le varie preferenze, una tray con un orologio ed altri strumenti come una lista dei programmi in esecuzione.
La Deskbar si può spostare in ogni angolo dello schermo sia nel bordo superiore che in quello inferiore mantenendo cliccato il mouse sulla zona a puntini a lato della tray e trascinandola nella nuova posizione; può essere anche modificata con un layout più compatto trascinando la zona a puntini sul menu della Deskbar.
One or more LaunchBox applets can be started to organize shortcuts to your favorite applications or documents. You decide if each is shown on all or just the current workspace. They can also serve to quickly open a document in a specific application. For example, you could drag&drop a HTML file onto a text editor in a LaunchBox to open it in the editor instead of its preferred application, the browser.
NetworkStatus shows the status of your network connections. If not yet running, launching the applet will ask if it should open in window mode or live in the Deskbar. In window mode you're able to resize the icon by resizing the window and use the Replicant handle to drag it to the Desktop.
Wherever installed, it's operated via a right-click context menu.
@@ -63,12 +65,12 @@ The first section contains all network devices' names and their state. Clicking
Below is a list of all wireless networks found by the first wireless adapter and an indicator of their signal strength.
Lastly, you can Open network preferences... to change your network configuration or Quit the applet.
-
PowerStatus shows information about the battery level, so it's only useful on mobile computers. If not yet running, launching the applet will ask if it should open in window mode or live in the Deskbar. In window mode you're able to resize the icon by resizing the window and use the Replicant handle to drag it to the Desktop.
diff --git a/userguide/it/desktop-applets/processcontroller.html b/userguide/it/desktop-applets/processcontroller.html
index ff1761b2..82def1c1 100644
--- a/userguide/it/desktop-applets/processcontroller.html
+++ b/userguide/it/desktop-applets/processcontroller.html
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
Su BeOS, il predecessore di Haiku, questa cartella era chiamata /boot/beos/. È possibile incontrarla leggendo della vecchia documetazione (ad esempio quella originale come il BeBook).
-Non bisogna alterare il suo contenuto, qualunque sia il suo nome poiché ogni aggiornamento di Haiku potrebbe aggiungere, rimuovere o sovrascrivere qualsiasi cosa all'interno della cartella. Se si vogliono aggiungere funzionalità, magari altri Add-On del Tracker o dei Translator oppure un altro driver, bisognerà installare i file nella cartella /boot/home/ altrimenti se si vuole rendere disponibile il componente a tutti gli utenti, in /boot/common/. Finché Haiku non sarà multi-utente, questa distinzione non avrà alcun effetto apparente, in quanto non c'è nessun utente con la cartella home. E' sensato invece imparare la via corretta fin dall'inizio nell'eventualità che ci sia il supporto per più utenti.
+Qualunque sia il suo nome, non bisogna alterare ciò che contiene, poiché ogni aggiornamento di Haiku potrebbe aggiungere, rimuovere o sovrascrivere qualsiasi cosa all'interno della cartella. Se si vogliono aggiungere funzionalità, magari altri Add-On del Tracker o dei Translator oppure un altro driver, bisognerà installare i file nella cartella /boot/home/ altrimenti se si vuole rendere disponibile il componente a tutti gli utenti, in /boot/common/. Finché Haiku non sarà multi-utente, questa distinzione non avrà alcun effetto apparente, in quanto non c'è nessun utente con la cartella home. E' sensato invece imparare la via corretta fin dall'inizio nell'eventualità che ci sia il supporto per più utenti.
Dunque, diciamo che se si volesse installare un nuovo translator per l'ultimo formato immagine, non bisognerà semplicemente copiarlo nella rispettiva cartella di sistema. Si faccia presente che non bisogna modificarla.
Invece, è consigliato collocarlo nella directory speculare sotto /boot/common/ oppure /boot/home/config/.
Nel nostro caso la posizione per i translator nella cartella di sistema è:
@@ -100,7 +101,7 @@ If you do want to know more about how things tick in Haiku, have a look at this
Oltre alla directory ~/config/add-ons/, che rispecchia la cartella add-on del sistema per i componenti aggiuntivi come descritto sopra, ci sono altre cartelle di interesse. (A proposito, la tilde ("~") è una scorciatoia per la cartella home, così non bisogna sempre scrivere "/boot/home/" nel terminale.)
~/mail
-
Qui vengono tenute di default le mail dell'utente.
+
Dove vengono tenute di default le mail dell'utente.
~/queries
Le Query, di default, sono tempraneamente memorizzate in questa cartella per 7 giorni.
@@ -117,7 +118,7 @@ If you do want to know more about how things tick in Haiku, have a look at this
~/config/boot/launch/
I link a programmi o documenti in questa cartella partono automaticamente ad ogni avvio del sistema.
-
~/config/fonts/
+
~/config/data/fonts/
Basta copiare un font TrueType o Postscript dentro questa cartella per poterlo utilizzare.
I replicanti sono piccole parti di applicazioni che possono essere integrate in altri programmi.
-A patto che l'opzione della Deskbar Visualizza i Replicant sia stata attivata, si vedrà una parte "replicabile" di un'applicazione dalla sua piccola maniglia, normalmente nell'angolo in basso a destra:
+
Replicants are small self-contained parts of applications that can be integrated into other programs. Provided Deskbar's option to Show Replicants is activated, you'll recognize a replicantable part of an application by its small handle, normally in the bottom right corner:
-
Il luogo più significante che accetta i replicanti è il Desktop: dove tu puoi semplicemente spostare la piccola maniglia su di esso.
-Da ora in poi è parte del Desktop e l'applicazione principale del replicante non deve essere avviata per farlo funzionare.
-Un tasto destro sull'uncino del replicante permette di visualizzare la finestra About dell'applicazione principale e rimuovere il replicante.
-
In caso di difficoltà con un replicante sul Desktop e se non si riesce a rimuoverlo, basta cancellare ~/config/settings/Tracker/tracker_shelf . Sfortunatamente questo rimuoverà
-tutti i replicanti dal Desktop.
The most prominent place that accepts Replicants is the Desktop: You simply drag&drop the little handle onto it. From now on it's part of the Desktop and the Replicant's originating app doesn't have to be started for it to work.
+A right-click on a Replicant handle offers a context menu to show the originating app's About window and to Remove Replicant.
+
Should you experience difficulties with a Replicant on the Desktop and just can't get rid of it, delete ~/config/settings/Tracker/tracker_shelf. Unfortunately, this will remove all Replicants from the Desktop.
Gli Attributi e le Query sono fra le caratteristiche principali di Haiku.
Mentre gli attributi sono utili di per se in quanto permettono di visualizzare delle informazioni aggiuntive, per poter effettuare delle query c'è bisogno che gli attributi vengano indicizzati.
@@ -118,8 +118,8 @@ Creates a new index for the specified attribute.
--copy-from path to volume to copy the indexes from.
-v, --verbose print information about the index being created
-
Solo i nuovi file con questo attributo verranno automaticamente indicizzati!
-Successivamente, i file esistenti devono essere aggiunti manualmente copiandoli ed eliminando gli originali. Oppure puoi usare il comando reindex.
+
Verranno automaticamente indicizzati solo i nuovi file con questo attributo.
+I file esistenti devono essere aggiunti manualmente copiandoli ed eliminando gli originali, altrimenti si può usare il comando reindex.
reindex - Inserisce gli attributi dei file esistenti nel nuovo indice di un volume o di una partizione.
La traduzione di questa pagina non è stata completata. Per questo motivo le parti non tradotte sono visibili in inglese.
Scorciatoie e combinazioni di tasti
-
Di default, i tasti di scelta rapida di Haiku, utili ad invocare i comandi dai menu, non iniziano con il tasto CTRL, ma con ALT. Il motivo è storico, poiché BeOS era originariamente ispirato in qualche modo a MacOS. Dopo essersi abituati ci saranno alcuni vantaggi come ad esempio le combinazioni: ALTC e ALTV che si integrano a pieno con la shell bash del Terminale, dove con CTRLC è possibile il programma in esecuzione.
+
I tasti di scelta rapida di Haiku, utili ad invocare i comandi dai menu, di default iniziano con ALT e non con l'usuale CTRL. Il motivo è storico, poiché BeOS era originariamente ispirato in qualche modo a MacOS. Quando l'utente si sarà abituato ci saranno alcuni vantaggi come ad esempio le combinazioni: ALTC e ALTV che si integrano a pieno con la shell bash del Terminale, dove con CTRLC è possibile terminare il programma in esecuzione.
Potrebbe essere più familiare per l'utente passare al tasto CTRL, è possibile farlo nelle preferenze della Keymap. La guida dell'utente descrive sempre la configurazione di default usando il tasto ALT.
-
Se non si conosce a quali tasti corrispondano OPT e MENU sulla keymap, è sufficiente accedere alle preferenze della Keymap dove è possibile vedere quale combinazioni di tasti viene usata quando viene premuto un tasto sulla tastiera.
+
Se non si conosce a quali tasti corrispondono OPT e MENU sulla mappa dei caratteri, è sufficiente accedere alle preferenze della Keymap dove è possibile vedere quale carettere viene inviato quando si preme un tasto sulla tastiera.
Questa è una tabella delle scorciatoie più usate che sono sempre disponibili, anche se non vi è un menu corrispondente:
+
Questa è una tabella delle scorciatoie più usate, esse sono sempre disponibili anche se non vi è un menu corrispondente:
-
ALTFx
Passa all'Area di lavoro X (Fx è il tasto di funzione corrispondente a tale area di lavoro). Trascina la finestra attiva verso di te aggiungendo il tasto SHIFT
-
CTRLALT← / → / ↑ / ↓
Naviga spazialmente le righe/colonne delle aree di lavoro disponibili. Aggiungi SHIFT per trascinare la finestra attiva verso il nuovo workspace.
Passa allo Spazio di lavoro X (Fx è il tasto di funzione corrispondente a tale area di lavoro), è possibile trascinare la finestra attiva usando il tasto SHIFT.
+
CTRLALT← / → / ↑ / ↓
Permette di navigare spazialmente tra le righe/colonne delle aree di lavoro disponibili, è sufficiente aggiungere SHIFT per trascinare la finestra attiva verso il nuovo workspace.
+
CTRLTAB
Quando viene premuta la combinazione appare il Twitcher.
Esegue lo zoom di una finestra ad un'altra dimensione (dimensione massima per la maggior parte delle applicazioni).
+
ALTW
Chiude la finestra attiva.
CTRLALTZ
Esegue lo zoom di una finestra ad un'altra dimensione (usa la dimensione massima per la maggior parte delle applicazioni).
CTRLALTM
Minimizza la finestra attiva.
CTRLALTH
Nasconde (minimizza) tutte le finestre dell'applicazione attiva.
-
CTRLALTF
Estrae la finestra attiva in primo piano (applicabile soltanto con l'impostazione del mouse Focus Follows Mouse).
-
CTRLALTB
Invia la finestra attiva nella parte posteriore.
+
CTRLALTF
Pulls the active window to the front (only applicable with the mouse setting Focus Follows Mouse).
+
CTRLALTB
Invia la finestra attiva sotto tutte le altre.
ALTQ
Esce da un'applicazione.
PRINT
Cattura subito un'immagine e lancia il pannello Screenshot.
SHIFTPRINT
Cattura un'immagine silenziosamente (senza aprire il pannello), pur rispettando le ultime impostazioni utilizzate.
@@ -91,7 +92,7 @@
ALT↓ o INVIO
Apre la cartella selezionata.
OPT
Tenendolo premuto durante l'apertura di una cartella si chiude automaticamente la cartella superiore. Questo funziona anche quando si naviga con il mouse.
MENU
Apre il menu della Deskbar (chiude con ESC).
-
ALTZ
Annulla l'ultima azione. La cronologia degli annullamenti è limitato solo dalla memoria disponibile. Nota, questo funziona solo per le azioni sullo stesso file, gli attributi cambiati e le impostazioni di autorizzazione non possono essere annullati in questo modo. Inoltre, una volta che un file viene rimosso dal Cestino non è più recuperabile.
+
ALTZ
Annulla l'ultima azione, la cronologia degli annullamenti è limitata solo dalla memoria disponibile. Nota, l'operazione funziona per azioni effettuate sul file stesso, quindi non sarà possibile usarla per annullare modifiche agli attributi oppure ai permessi. Inoltre, quando un file viene rimosso dal Cestino non potrà essere recuperato.
ALTSHIFTZ
Ripristina l'azione appena annullata con ALTZ.
@@ -109,17 +110,17 @@
ALTENTER
Entra/esce dalla modalità a schermo intero.
SHIFT↑ / ↓
Scorre il terminale di uscita su/ giù di una riga.
SHIFTPage↑ / Page↓
Scorre l'output del terminale su/giù di una pagina.
-
TAB
Completamento da Tab. Dopo aver immesso alcune lettere, bisogna premere TAB una volta per auto-completare il nome di un file o un percorso. Se vi è più di una corrispondenza, si ferma dove il nome inizia a differire ed è necessario fornire alcune lettere in più per contraddistinguerlo ulteriormente. Si può anche premere TAB due volte per visualizzare tutte le corrispondenze.
+
TAB
Completamento da Tab, dopo aver immesso alcune lettere, è possibile premere una volta il tasto TAB per auto-completare il nome di un file o di un percorso. Quando c'è più di un elemento, si ferma dove il nome inizia a differire e sarà necessario fornire alcune lettere in più per contraddistinguerlo ulteriormente. Premendo due volte il tasto TAB sarà possibile visualizzare tutte le corrispondenze.
↑ / ↓
Sposta verso l'alto o verso il basso nella cronologia di tutti i comandi precedentemente inseriti.
-
CTRLR
Cronologia della shell Bash. Tutti i comandi digitati vengono memorizzati nel file ~/.bash_history. Si prema CTRLR e si inseririsca un comando, verrà fornita la prima corrispondenza all'interno della cronologia della bash. Si tenga premuto CTRLR fino a che non si troverà la giusta linea di comando e premendo ENTER sarà possibile eseguirlo.
+
CTRLR
Cronologia della bash. Tutti i comandi digitati vengono memorizzati nel file ~/.bash_history. Premendo il tasto CTRLR ed inserendo un comando, verrà fornita la prima corrispondenza all'interno della cronologia della bash. Tenendo premuta la combinazione CTRLR sarà possibile trovare la riga giusta, utilizzando INVIO sarà possibile eseguirla.
È possibile aggiungere o rimuovere elementi da/per una selezione tenendo premuto un tasto di modifica mentre si fa clic su una voce (o file nel caso del Tracker).
+
You can add or remove items to/from a selection by holding down a modifier key while clicking on a entry (or file in case of Tracker).
SHIFT
Questo selezionerà tutto tra il primo elemento selezionato e quello su cui si clicca.
ALT
Aggiunge o rimuove l'oggetto su cui si sta cliccando alla/dalla selezione.
Nella prima tab, Colori, puoi cambiare i colori di diverse parti dell'interfaccia utente. Il colore accetta anche drag&drop da altri programmi, permettendo di prendere colori da, per esempio, WonderBrush, Icon-O-Matic o dal pannello di Backgrounds.
+
Nella prima tab, Colori, si possono cambiare i colori di diverse parti dell'interfaccia utente. Il colore accetta anche drag&drop da altri programmi, permettendo di prendere colori da, per esempio, WonderBrush, Icon-O-Matic o dal pannello di Backgrounds.
@@ -76,9 +76,9 @@
Glyph hinting
An activated Glyph hinting aligns all letters in such a way that their vertical and horizontal edges rest exactly between two pixels. The result is a perfect contrast, especially when dealing with black on white. Text appears crisper. There's also a setting for Monospaced Fonts Only that's especially helpful with low resolution devices like netbooks. Small fonts can look pretty bad when hinting is turned on, but with this setting you still have the advantage of hinting for text editors and Terminal.
-
Osserva le differenze in questi due screenshots, attivando o disattivando il parametro hinting
+
Osservate le differenze che si hanno attivando o disattivando l'hinting in questi due screenshot:
-
Hinting: off
Hinting: on
+
Hinting: disattivato
Hinting: attivato
It should be pointed out that all the Magnify windows on this page are of course rendered themselves with the different options as well. So, you get a real world impression of the settings by comparing, for example, the bold yellow tab title or the text "33 x 15 @ 8 pixels/pixel".
@@ -101,8 +101,8 @@ Antialiasing type
Nel fondo del pannello ci sono due pulsanti:
-
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
-
Annulla
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Appearance preferences.
+
Predefiniti
riporta tutto ai valori predefiniti.
+
Ripristina
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Appearance preferences.
~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces ~/config/settings/Backgrounds settings - stores the panel's window position
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@
Whether an icon label's actual text is black or white depends on the setting of the color picker. A dark color sets the text to white, a light color to black. So, if you assign a very bright image to the background, you should also set the color picker to a bright color in order to have icon labels readable in black. (Or use the outline option above.)
The selected color is also reflected in the Workspaces applet, which ignores images as backgrounds.
-
Annulla
Ripristina le impostazioni presenti all'apertura di Backgrounds.
+
Ripristina
Ripristina le impostazioni presenti all'apertura di Backgrounds.
~/config/settings/* - Every Translator creates its own settings file here after you've changes its defaults. ~/config/settings/system/DataTranslations settings - Stores the panel's window position.
Haiku provides a system that retrieves e-mail regularly via a Mail Service (also known as mail_daemon) and saves each mail as a single text file. It parses the mail and fills its attributes with all necessary header information, like from, to, subject and its unread status. Now it can be queried by you or any application. This system also makes switching e-mail clients easy as all the data and your configuration stays the same.
@@ -71,7 +73,7 @@ The configuration is done in the E-Mail preference panel.
Let's go through the process of setting up an e-mail account.
You start by clicking the Add button to create a new, unnamed account. This opens a panel where you fill in your account info:
@@ -110,7 +112,7 @@ Besides the R5 Daemon Filter that's used for backward
-Spam Filter
+Filtro antispam
The spam filter uses statistical methods to classify a mail as unwanted spam. It assigns a value between 0 and 1 to it and you can decide what are the limits for a genuine mail and what will be considered spam.
You can have that spam rating added to the start of the subject.
diff --git a/userguide/it/preferences/filetypes.html b/userguide/it/preferences/filetypes.html
index dcb37891..4272bb92 100644
--- a/userguide/it/preferences/filetypes.html
+++ b/userguide/it/preferences/filetypes.html
@@ -9,6 +9,8 @@
*
* Authors:
* Humdinger
+ * Translators:
+ * Barrett
*
-->
@@ -31,7 +33,7 @@
~/config/settings/system/app_server/fonts ~/config/settings/Font_settings - Stores the panel's window position.
@@ -60,14 +60,14 @@
Haiku defines three standard fonts for different purposes. You set plain, bold and fixed font types and sizes that will be used throughout the system. Besides these, there's also a separate setting for the font used in menus.
-
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
-
Annulla
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Fonts preferences.
+
Predefiniti
riporta tutto ai valori predefiniti.
+
Ripristina
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Fonts preferences.
You install new fonts by copying them into their respective user folder, i.e. /boot/common/fonts/ or /boot/home/config/fonts/ (see topic Filesystem layout).
+
You install new fonts by copying them into their respective user folder, i.e. /boot/common/data/fonts/ or /boot/home/config/data/fonts/ (see topic Filesystem layout).
La traduzione di questa pagina non è stata completata. Per questo motivo le parti non tradotte sono visibili in inglese.
-
Locale
-
Locale
-
Deskbar:
Preferences
-
Posizione:
/boot/system/preferences/Locale
+
Deskbar:
Preferenze
+
Locazione:
/boot/system/preferences/Locale
Impostazioni:
~/config/settings/Locale settings
-
Documentation is still missing. If you want to work on it, please announce it on the Documentation mailing list to avoid duplication.
+
Haiku's localization system does not only include replacing texts with their translations, but also more complex tasks such as formatting numbers, dates, and times in a way that matches your Locale preferences.
+
If you would like to help with translations or start with a language that is currently missing, please get in contact on the Haiku-i18n mainling list.
+
+Language
+
Haiku has been translated to dozens of languages, unfortunately some translations are not complete yet. For that reason, you can choose more than one language as “Preferred languages”. If some text is missing in a translation, it's replaced with the words of the next preferred language. English is the default fallback (also when not listed).
+
+
In this example, the preferred language is set to Spanish. The first fallback is Italian, and if the text is missing there too, it's back to default English.
+As you can see, expanding a language entry on the left side reveals sub-entries for specific variations or dialects of a language (if available).
+
+Formatting
+
On the Formatting tab you can set up the formatting of date, time, number and currency formats independently from the settings of your preferred language.
+
+
You may be a Spanish fellow located in the Italian speaking part of Switzerland. So, you'd prefer your system in Spanish, but numbers and currency formatted like at work: Swiss/Italian.
+If you're more comfortable with your Spanish names for days and months (think of the modified dates of files, for example), you can override this time-specific formatting with the checkbox at the top to Use month/day-names from preferred language.
+
Granted, the above example is maybe not the most common scenario, but it demonstrates the flexibility of the system.
+
+Options
+
The last tab provides an option that will Translate application and folder names in Deskbar and Tracker. Disable the checkbox if you prefer the graphical interface localized, while retaining the original English names for preference panels, applications and standard folder names.
+
+
Changes are applied immediately, though currently running applications may require to be closed and restarted before showing the new setting.
+
+
Predefiniti
riporta tutto ai valori predefiniti.
+
Ripristina
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Locale preferences.
At the top, you choose which network adapter to configure.
Then you specify if you get your network automatically (via DHCP) or if you're using static addresses. If it's the latter, you'll have to fill out IP Address, Netmask, Gateway and DNS Servers yourself. Otherwise the panel will show the addresses currently set with DHCP.
-
Annulla
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Network preferences.
+
Ripristina
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Network preferences.
~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces ~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/vesa - Only when running in VESA mode. ~/config/settings/Screen_data - Stores the panel's window position.
La traduzione di questa pagina non è stata completata. Per questo motivo le parti non tradotte sono visibili in inglese.
-
Sounds
+
Suoni
-
Deskbar:
Preferences
-
Posizione:
/boot/system/preferences/Sounds
+
Deskbar:
Preferenze
+
Locazione:
/boot/system/preferences/Sounds
Impostazioni:
~/config/settings/Media/MMediaFilesManager
-
You can assign sounds to certain events in the system. Just select the event from the list and choose a sound from the pop-up menu below.
+
È possibile assegnare suoni ad alcuni eventi del sistema, bisogna semplicemente selezionare l'evento dalla lista e scegliere un suono dal menu pop-up.
-
None
will silence an event.
-
Other...
will open a file panel to find a new sound that isn't yet in the menu.
-
You can use any format that's supported by the system. If MediaPlayer can deal with it, so can any other program.
-You can "pre-hear" an event's sound by selecting it and using the Play and Stop buttons.
+
Nessuno
l'evento non produrrà alcun suono.
+
Altro...
aprirà un pannello per trovare un nuovo suono che non è ancora nel menu.
+
Si può usare qualunque formato supportato dal sistema, ad esempio se MediaPlayer può gestire un certo formato, può farlo qualunque altro programma..
+È possibile avere un'anteprima del suono selezionandolo ed usando i bottoni Riproduci e Interrompi.
~/config/settings/RTC_time_settings ~/config/settings/timezone - A link to the current timezone in /boot/system/etc/timezones/*/* ~/config/settings/Time_settings - Stores the panel's window position.
By dragging the red vertical or horizontal lines on the touchpad representation, you set the scroll area (slightly reddish against the grey general touch area). Moving your finger on that part of the pad will move the scrollbars of a window accordingly.
+
By dragging the red vertical or horizontal lines on the touchpad representation, you set the scroll area (slightly reddish against the gray general touch area). Moving your finger on that part of the pad will move the scrollbars of a window accordingly.
To the right are sliders to set the general scroll acceleration and the vertical and horizontal scrolling speed.
The acceleration setting decides how much quicker a list scrolls by if you swish over the scroll area very fast. The scrolling speeds control the general speed when using the scroll area in a "normal" way.
Below the touchpad graphic are checkboxes to enable "Two finger scrolling" for vertical and horizontal scrolling. Move two fingers in parallel vertically or horizontally to move the scrollbars of a window. At least for me, it works best if with one finger from the left and one from the right hand.
If you feel comfortable using this feature, you can dispense with setting scroll areas and instead use the whole pad for normal navigation.
At the bottom is another slider to set the tap click sensitivity. If your taps keep getting ignored, increase the sensitivity. If the system registers clicks all the time, while all you want is to move the mouse pointer, try decreasing it.
-
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
-
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Touchpad preferences.
+
Predefiniti
riporta tutto ai valori predefiniti.
+
Ripristina
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Touchpad preferences.
Here is a tip that's not related to the Touchpad preferences, but fits the general topic:
Did you know that you can do a drag and drop just by using the touchpad, i.e. not using the buttons? Just do a double click without lifting the finger after the second click. The picked up icon will stick to the mouse pointer and you can drag it around by moving your finger. Lifting your finger will drop the icon.
The Tracker preference panel is also available from every Tracker window with the menu Window | Preferences....
-Its functions are discussed in the topic on Tracker.
+
Il pannello delle preferenze del Tracker è disponibile da tutte le finestre con il menu Finestra | Preferenze....
+Le sue funzioni sono trattate nel capitolo riguardante il Tracker.
~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/virtual_memory ~/config/settings/VM_data - Stores the panel's window position.
@@ -61,8 +61,8 @@
Normally, the swap file's written to your boot partition. If you often run into disk thrashing due to the virtual memory system swapping memory in and out, you can try to use a separate harddisk for you swap file. Simply another partition on the same harddisk with your system/data won't help.
Upgrading your RAM is of course the most effective way to go...
-
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
-
Annulla
brings back the settings that were active when you started the VirtualMemory preferences.
+
Predefiniti
riporta tutto ai valori predefiniti.
+
Ripristina
brings back the settings that were active when you started the VirtualMemory preferences.
E' possibile copiare la stringa e incollarla ad altre persone in un'email, su un forum o su IRC per essere usata da altri oppure per un debug.
E' possibile usare questo metodo per costruire una query in modalità Attribute e quindi passare alla modalità Formula, per generare comodamente una stringa di ricerca da utilizzare per una query nel terminale o in uno script.
-
Le query possono essere raffinate inserendo parentesi dove necessario, per rendere ad esempio alcune parti case-sensitive o annulare combinazioni logiche cambiando "==" a "!=" per NOT AND. Tutto quello che serve è una conoscenza basilare delle espressioni regolari e forse alcune nozioni di base sullo scripting.
+
Le query possono essere raffinate inserendo delle parentesi dove necessario, per rendere ad esempio alcune parti case-sensitive o annulare combinazioni logiche cambiando "==" con "!=" per un NOT AND. Tutto quello che serve è una conoscenza basilare delle espressioni regolari e forse alcune nozioni di base sullo scripting.
@@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Questo è un buon modo per ridurre il numero di risultati di ricerca.
La finestra dei risultati
Dopo aver avviato una ricerca, la finestra Find sarà sostituita da una finestra di risultati. Ecco un esempio di query per la stringa "server":
-
Oltre allo sfondo grigio, le finestre dei risultati funzionano esattamente come qualsiasi altra finestra del Tracker. Ma alcune cose hanno bisogno di una spiegazione più dettagliata :
+
Oltre allo sfondo grigio, le finestre dei risultati funzionano esattamente come qualsiasi altra finestra del Tracker. Alcune cose hanno bisogno di una spiegazione più dettagliata :
È possibile aprire la posizione di un file o una cartella con un doppio clic sul percorso del suo attributo.
Con File | Edit Query o ALTG si può ritornare alla finestra di ricerca per ridefinire la query.
@@ -140,22 +140,22 @@ Questo è un buon modo per ridurre il numero di risultati di ricerca.
Si può assegnare il layout di un attributo al risultato di una query per un tipo di file specifico aprendo una cartella contenente il file con l'estensione di cui si vuole creare un modello per organizzare gli attributi che sarebbe comodo avere nei risultati della query.
E' possibile copiare questo layout con Attributes | Copy Layout.
-
Si apra /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates, e successivamente si crei una nuova cartella chiamata group/filetype, sostituendo gli slash con un underscore, esempio "audio_x-mp3". Successivamente si apra la nuova cartella e si incolli il layout precedentemente copiato con Attributes | Paste Layout.
+
Bisogna aprire /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates, e successivamente creare una nuova cartella chiamata group/filetype, sostituendo gli slash con un underscore, esempio "audio_x-mp3". Successivamente aprendo la nuova cartella incollare il layout precedentemente copiato con Attributes | Paste Layout.
Facendo doppio clic su una query salvata verrà avviata la ricerca dei file e si aprirà immediatamente la finestra dei risultati.
-Tuttavia, è possibile che non si desidera effettuare una ricerca con questi esatti parametri, ma è comunque possibile usarli come punto di partenza per modificare la formula.
-Si può creare un modello usando la voce del menu Save Query as Template (si guardi (1) nello screenshot in cima) o trascinando e rilasciando l'icona con il tasto destro del mouse(10) in qualsiasi punto. Facendo doppio clic non si aprirà la finestra dei risultati, ma il pannello di ricerca, che darà la possibilità di cambiare velocemente le stringhe di ricerca o aggiungere e rimuovere gli attributi.
+Tuttavia, è possibile non desiderare di effettuare una ricerca con questi esatti parametri, ma è comunque possibile usarli come punto di partenza per modificare la formula.
+Si può creare un modello usando la voce del menu Save Query as Template (si guardi nello screenshot (1) in cima) o trascinando e rilasciando l'icona con il tasto destro del mouse(10) in qualsiasi punto. Facendo doppio clic non si aprirà la finestra dei risultati, ma il pannello di ricerca, che darà la possibilità di cambiare velocemente le stringhe di ricerca o aggiungere e rimuovere gli attributi.
Ogni volta che si sceglierà di salvare i modelli di query, essi verranno elencati nel menu "query più recenti" del pannello Find.
La traduzione di questa pagina non è stata completata. Per questo motivo le parti non tradotte sono visibili in inglese.
Il Twitcher
Il Twitcher è un selettore di attività che permette saltare tra le applicazioni in esecuzione e tra le loro finestre.
-
E' sufficente premere CTRLTAB per passare tra l'applicazione corrente e l'ultima finestra/applicazione. Premendo CTRLTAB passerà velocemente tra tutte le applicazioni. Oppure tieni premuto CTRLTAB per passare attraverso le applicazioni in esecuzione premendo ripetutamente TAB o ←/→. Se hai bisogno di una specifica finestra di un programma, sposta la sua icona e quindi muoviti attraverso le sue finestre aperte con i tasti ↑/↓.
-
Puoi passare tra tutte le finestre delle applicazioni visibili sullo spazio di lavoro con CTRL~ (che dipende però dalla keymap che stai usando, è il tasto sotto ESC).
+
Just tap CTRLTAB to switch between the current and the last application/window. Tapping CTRLTAB very quickly will switch between all applications. Or press and hold CTRLTAB to go through all running applications by repeatedly hitting TAB or ←/→. If you need to get to a specific window of a program, move to its icon as described and then go through its open windows with the ↑/↓ keys.
+
You cycle through all an applications visible windows on the current workspace with CTRL~ (which, depending on the keymap you're using, is the key below ESC).
E' anche possibile invocare il Twitcher con CTRLTAB e quindi usare il mouse per scegliere l'applicazione o la finestra che salterai quando verra rilasciato il tasto CTRL.
Il Twitcher offre anche alcune scorciatoie da tastiera più avanzate:
Dopo un paio d'ore di duro lavoro, si avrà un piccolo database nel quale è possibile ricercare tutti i film di Christina Ricci che hanno un bel 7+...
-
È possibile determinare il layout dei risultati di uno specifico filetype.
-Per fare questo aprire la cartella contenente i file DVDdb e sistemare a piacere i risultati come dovrebbero essere presentati. In fine copiare questo layout con Attributes | Copy Layout.
+
You can assign a sensible attribute layout for query results of a specific filetype.
+Open the folder containing your DVDdb files and arrange the attributes how you'd like to have query results presented. Copy this layout with Attributes | Copy Layout.
Continuando, aprire la cartella /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates, creandone una nuova e rinominandola group/filetype, rimpiazzando il carattere slash con degli underscore; nel nostro caso sarà "applications_DVDdb".
Per finire si apra una nuova cartella e ci si incolli il layout con Attributes | Paste Layout. Ed ecco il risultato:
The Installer is used to copy Haiku onto another volume.
diff --git a/userguide/jp/applications/list-cli-apps.html b/userguide/jp/applications/list-cli-apps.html
index b8ca3714..9bbf965a 100644
--- a/userguide/jp/applications/list-cli-apps.html
+++ b/userguide/jp/applications/list-cli-apps.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
MediaPlayer is an application used for viewing multimedia files such as music or video files. It supports different formats.
-
-
Interface
-
-
MediaPlayer is easy-to-use because of its interface. There's no difference in interface while playing music or video.
-
+
MediaPlayer is the default player for all audio and video files. Thanks to it's ffmpeg backend, a plethora of widely used formats are supported. Its simple interface has all the controls you'd expect:
+
The slider of the progress bar allows you to quickly skim to a position, resting the mouse over it shows the current and remaining time of the clip. Clicking on the time display to the right of it, toggles between length, current and remaining time.
+Below that you find the usual controls to skip to the previous track, play/pause, stop and jump to the next track. Then comes a volume control (clicking the speaker symbol toggles muting) and a VU meter.
-
You can control playing media using a set of buttons - previous, play/pause, stop, next. Also, there is a progress bar, a volume controler and even an oscilloscope.
+
Audio and video playback
+
Since there aren't any specific features for for audio playback, we'll go straight to video or general features.
+
+
Available to all media is the File info... (ALTI). It shows information about the currently loaded file, like playing time or details of the audio/video track and its codec.
+
Most of the often used commands from the menus are also available from a right-click context menu on the video area. Convenient when in full-screen mode.
+Under Video you'll find options to zoom the window to various levels or force the aspect ratio to some standard values. Leaving the aspect ration to the default Stream settings should work best for correctly encoded files.
+
MediaPlayer supports subtitles in SRT format. To have them show up under Subtitles, their filenames have to be identical to their video file, with a suffixed language name and ".srt" instead of the video's extension. For example:
Multiple audio tracks, most often used for several languages inside one video file, are available from the Audio track submenu. The Video | Track submenu offers the same when having multiple video streams available.
+
You can toggle the Full screen mode (ALTENTER or F or a double left-click), hide MediaPlayer's window borders and controls with Hide interface (ALTH or a double right-click) or have it's window Always on top (ALTA).
-
Once you play a video file, you can double right-click on the display to hide interface. Double left-click instead causes displaying video in full-screen mode.
+
Playlists
+
MediaPlayer | Playlist... (ALTP) opens a window with the files currently queued up for playback. Double-clicking an entry starts playing it.
+
+
You can add more files by dropping them into the list and rearrange their position via drag & drop. From the Edit menu you can Randomize or Remove (DEL) an entry from the list or delete the actual file with Move to Trash (ALTT).
+
Of course, you can Save a playlist and later Open it again, or start it with simply double-clicking the playlist file.
-
Playing media
+
Settings
+
There are several settings to fine-tune MediaPlayer's behavior:
+
+
The first batch, Play mode, is pretty self-explaining. Start playback automatically, close windows when finished or play clips in a loop.
+
Next are different View options.
+You can opt to Use hardware overlay if available, which cuts down CPU usage but only works for one video window and needs a supporting video card driver.
+You can Scale movies smoothly (when not in overlay mode) which uses very fast filtering to smooth over otherwise blocky pixels when zooming video or watching in full-screen mode.
+Scale controls in full-screen mode if you prefer slightly bigger controls, maybe because you watch the screen from a bit farther away when in full-screen mode.
+Then there are settings for Subtitle size and Subtitle placement. They can be shown at the Bottom of video, which will always have them overlayed over the picture. Or Bottom of window, which allows you to resize the window vertically and have the subtitles appear in the black bar at the bottom instead.
+
The last setting determines the volume of clips whose windows are not currently active. You can have them all blaring at Full volume, at less confusing Low volume or quietly Muted.
-
There are options especially useful while watching DVD video or other files which include different audio/video tracks or have subtitles included. You can change audio tracks from Audio | Track just as Video | Track for various video tracks. You can also make use of subtitles, MediaPlayer supports .srt format. All available subtitles are showed as options in Video | Subtitles menu. The player gets names for this positions from the filename, eg. videoclip.english.srt shows as "english" in the menu.
+
Keyboard controls
+
MediaPlayer offers convenient key combinations to control playback without using the mouse.
+
+
Z
Skip to previous track
+
X
Play
+
C
Pause
+
V
Stop
+
B
Skip to next track
+
+
These keys are assigned to the functions of the control buttons. They are always the bottom left letter keys on the keyboard, i.e. they are used independently of your current keymapping. The above keys correspond to a standard US-american keymap.
+
+
→
Seek forwards
+
SHIFT→
Jump forwards 10 seconds
+
ALT→
Jump forwards 30 seconds
+
←
Seek backwards
+
SHIFT←
Jump backwards 10 seconds
+
ALT←
Jump backwards 30 seconds
-
+
↑
Increase volume
+
↓
Decrease volume
-
You can change the scale by resizing the window or simply from the Video menu. There are 50%, 100%, 200%, 300% and 400% options. There is an option to change the player to full-screen mode or to change ratio of the display.
-
-
Playlists
-
-
MediaPlayer supports playlists. You can either select a few files in Tracker using ALT and launched the application or add other files after launching the one using the drag and drop method. You can get to the playlist from menu - choose MediaPlayer | Playlist and the playlist window will pop-up.
-
-
-
-
You can save the current playlist or open one from the playlist window, of course. There is also a function that lets you to randomize your playlist. Use either Edit | Randomize menu position or ALTR shortcut. You can also both remove any file from playlist and remove it from playlist and put into Trash. This functions are available from Edit menu, too.
-
-
Other options
-
-
If you would like to rate a file, you can do this directly from MediaPlayer, too! Choose a rate from 1 to 10 from Attributes | Rating menu.
-
-
MediaPlayer is also able to show you some information about the file you play. It is available from MediaPlayer | File info... menu.
-
-
-
-
You can configure the application from MediaPlayer | Settings. There are some interesting options concerning looping playback, closing window when playback finishes, size and placement of subtitles or volume level while playing in the background.
-
-
Shortcuts
-
-
There are plenty of shortcuts for this application. SPACEBAR is used to play/pause the playback. You can control the whole playback with one hand, because alternate keys are used - Z to go to the previous track, X to play, C to pause and V to go to the next track. Left/Right cursors are used to seek, they cause 10 seconds seeking while ALT is pressed at the same time. Up and down cursors controls the volume and cause going to the previous/next track while ALT is pressed.
-
-
ALTF activates full-screen mode, ALTP pops-up playlist window, ALTI shows file information, ALTH hides interface, ALTA causes MediaPlayer is always on top, ALTS moves you to the settings window and ALTQ quits the application.
+
ALT↑
Skip to previous Track
+
ALT↓
Skip to next Track
+
Spacebar
Toggle play/pause
+
ALTENTER
Toggle full-screen mode (also done by double left-clicking the video area)
As the name suggests, MidiPlayer is used to playback midi music files. Midi files are special, as they don't contain the actual digitized and in some way encoded music, but only a description of it: Hold this note for that long with this volume and use instrument X for it.
+While this keeps file sizes pretty small, it also follows that depending on the instrument library (the so-called "SoundFont") the results can differ hugely. Also, these SoundFonts tend to be quite large, increasingly so with the number and quality of the instrument samples.
+
Haiku doesn't come with a SoundFont installed, because they are so large and only few people generally need one. Most of those who do, already have high quality or custom SoundFonts. To be able to at least hear something you can install a free one from an optional package. In Terminal, enter: installoptionalpackage TimGMSoundFont
+
To use any other SoundFont, create a link to it in /boot/system/data/synth and name it big_synth.sy.
+
+
MidiPlayer's interface is very simple. Just double-click or drag & drop a midi file and playback starts. You control the volume with the slider and add reverb effects from the Reverb pop-up menu. Activating the scope will show a visualization in form of an oscilloscope running at the top.
This page is currently only a first draft. Please check back later for a refined version.
+
PackageInstaller is a software installer for BeOS packages in PKG format. It provides an easy-to-use GUI that helps in fast package installation in Haiku.
+
It is being executed automatically when you try to open files with .pkg extension.
+
+
The main window gives access to two configurations:
+
+
type of installation (depending on the developer there might be more than one (standard) installation option).
+
Installation location (only entire partitions/hard disks can be chosen, not custom paths)
+
+
After clicking Install the extraction and installation process will begin.
+
+
At this point warnings and errors can appear saying which libraries and dependencies are missing in order to run the program. It might be required to install these packages before attempting to install desired program.
+
When the installation is complete, package should appear in the Deskbar applications menu.
@@ -57,43 +57,54 @@ double-clicking a supported file.
設定ファイル:
~/config/settings/ShowImage_settings
-
ShowImage is an application used for viewing images in various formats. Its funcionality is not limited only to viewing photos, it can also crop images, show slideshows, rotate and flip images.
-
-
If you want to launch this application, simply double-click on some image on your computer.
-
-
Browse photos
-
-
You are not limited to viewing only the image you used to launch application. You can go both to previous or to next image from the folder using arrows on keybord. You can also zoom using either mouse scroll or shortcuts - ALT+ for zooming in and ALT- for zooming out. High-quality zooming is set by default, but you can disable this function unchecking View | High-quality zooming. This function does very fast bilinear filtering.
-
-
There is a possibility to simply zoom picture to the original size or to fit to the window size. Use View menu or shortcuts - ALT1 to get back to the original size or ALT0 to fit to the window size. From the same menu you can also enable stretching an image to the window.
-
-
-
-
ShowImage does support multiple-page files, such as TIFF. It means you can turn pages while browsing any multiple-page image. Make use of Browse menu or use shortcuts (see screenshot above) for this function.
-
-
To change mode to full-screen, simply choose ALTENTER shortcut.
-
-
Slide show
-
-
You can run slideshow using menu, simply choose View | Slide show. There is an option for changing slide delay from 3 to 20 seconds. Default value is a 3 second delay, but you can change it from View | Slide delay menu.
-
-
Flip and rotate images
-
-
This function is also built-in. If you would like to rotate some image, choose proper position from Image menu or use shortcuts - ALTR will rorate your image clockwise and SHIFTALTR counterclockwise.
-
-
You can also flip images. Image | Flip left to right will flip your image horizontally and Image | Flip top to bottom vertically.
-
-
Set background
-
-
You can set your desktop background directly from ShowImage. Just choose Image | Use as background... and Backgrounds preflet will pop-up.
-
-
Drag and drop
-
-
There is an option to select a piece of an image and create new image file from the selection. Simply press CTRL or ALT and select a fragment you would like to use as a new file and drag the selection to desktop. Also, you can change mode to selection mode, so you will be able to select parts of images using just a left mouse button. This option is available from Edit | Selection Mode
-
-
-
-
Once you use right mouse button to drag the selection, an image-format menu pops-up.
+
ShowImage allows you to view images in all formats that are supported through DataTranslators. New formats are automatically recognized when their translator is added to the system. This has been done for Haiku's vector icon files, WonderBrush images or when WebM images became available, for example.
+ShowImage provides minimal editing features to crop, rotate and flip images and to save them in another format.
+
Viewing
+
+
The View menu offers to start a Slide show of all images in a folder (or query result window) and set a Slide delay from 2 to 20 seconds.
+
Other commands apply to the currently displayed image (without changing the size of the window):
+Original size shows the image with a 100% zoom factor.
+Fit to window shrinks the image back into the window fame, e.g. after having zoomed into it or after resizing the window.
+Zoom in and Zoom out move into and out of the image in 10% steps. Zooming is also done with the mouse wheel; to pan an image bigger than the window, simply left-click and drag your mouse around.
+
Two settings don't just apply to the currently displayed image and are remembered when browsing from one image to the next:
+High quality zooming applies a very fast filter when zooming to reduce jagged lines and produce a smoother result.
+Stretch to window will stretch smaller images to fill the current window frame.
+
Then there's a Full screen mode with an option to Show caption in full screen mode which overlays the file name at the bottom of the image.
+
Lastly, Show tool bar will show/hide the graphical controls:
+
+
From left to right: Previous image, next image, start slide show (in full screen mode), selection mode, original size, fit to window, zoom in, zoom out.
+
Most of the more often used commands are also available from a right-click context menu on the image. Convenient when in full-screen mode.
+
Browsing
+
+
After opening an image you can quickly browse through all the other images in its folder (or query result window) by pressing ↑/↓ or ←/→. You can see the selection change accordingly in the Tracker window.
+
There is a quick way to open the folder of the current image and even navigate to its parent and subfolders. It works just like with drill-down navigating in Tracker by clicking in the info area in the status bar that shows size and format of the current image.
+
Looking at the Browse menu, shows another type of browsing: Some image formats, like TIFF, can contain several pages in one file. Commands like First page and Next page let you navigate those pages.
+
Editing
+
+
The Image menu offers the few image manipulations necessary for an image viewer: rotating and flipping the image. Note however, that the actual image data won't be changed. Only an attribute is added to the file so it'll be shown rotated or flipped the next time you open it.
+
Use as backgroud... will open the Backgrounds preferences to set the current picture as image for your workspaces.
+
Cropping is another feature that's needed sometimes. To define the frame to cut to, you can switch to Selection mode from the Edit menu and drag out a box with your left mouse button. If you don't want to change modes first, you can create this box in "normal mode" by simply holding CTRL while left-click-dragging, which otherwise would just pan the image around.
+Clear selection or ESC will remove the selection box.
+
The following chapter shows how to actually save the cropped area.
+
Saving and converting
+
To save or convert an image into any available format, you can invoke the normal Save as... item from the File menu, select the format and choose a file name.
+Often quicker, especially when the Tracker window with the destination folder is already open, is using drag & drop.
+
+
This is also how the above mentioned cropping is finalized. Either select a frame as described above, or choose Edit | Select all for the whole image. Then drag & drop the selection onto the Desktop or any Tracker window to create a new image clipping in the same format of the original image.
+
To save in another file format, do the dragging with the right mouse button and choose a format from the context menu when dropping the image.
+
Keyboard shortcuts
+
Here's a list of the most useful shortcuts:
+
+
← / ↑
Previous image
+
→ / ↓
Next image
+
DEL
Move to Trash
+
+
Zoom in
+
-
Zoom out
+
0
Original size (100% zoom)
+
1
Fit to window
+
ALTENTER
Toggle full screen mode (also via doubleclick)
+
CTRL
While holding CTRL you can create a selection frame without explicitly switching to selection mode.
StyledEdit is Haiku's simple text editor. Although it saves files in plain text format, additional attributes are written in order to have limited formatting capabilities when viewed with StyledEdit.
~/config/settings/Terminal
-~/.profile - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/system/etc/profile
-~/.inputrc - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/system/etc/inputrc
+~/.profile - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/common/etc/profile
+~/.inputrc - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/common/etc/inputrc
The Terminal is Haiku's interface to bash, the Bourne Again Shell.
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@
Double-clicking into the emtpy part of the tab bar opens a new tab; onto a tab opens a dialog to rename its title. There are several %-designated variables that are explained with a tooltip when you hover the mouse over the text field.
By default, %1d: %p, a tab shows the current directory and, separated by a :, the name of the currently running process (or -- if it's just bash running, probably idling). The screenshot above shows the first tab with a FTP session in the Desktop folder and a second tab idling at home.
-Via Edit|Window title... the Terminal window's title can be edited in a similar way.
+Via Edit | Window title... the Terminal window's title can be edited in a similar way.
Right-clicking a tab shows a context menu to Close tab, Close other tabs or, like double-clicking, Edit tab title....
A Terminal window can be resized like any other window or you use the presets from the Settings | Window size menu. ALTENTER toggles fullscreen mode.
Changed window size and text encoding are only kept choosing Settings | Save as default.
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Pressing OK will save the current settings as defaul
Bash customization
Coming from Unix, there are countless possibilities to customize the bash itself. There are two files that are especially important to the user: .profile and .inputrc
-Both files can be created in the home/ folder and add or override the system defaults that are defined in /boot/system/etc/.
+Both files can be created in the home/ folder and add or override the system defaults that are defined in /boot/common/etc/.
.profile
The .profile is loaded every time you open a new Terminal. It sets all kinds of aliases and variables that will affect bash's behavior and appearance. You'll find many online resources that will detail all possibilities.
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
WebPositive
Deskbarメニュー:
Applications
場所:
/boot/system/apps/WebPositive
設定ファイル:
~/config/settings/WebPositive/ - Configuration files, cookies, cache and browsing history
-
~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks - Stores every bookmark as a file
+
~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks - All bookmarks as single files
WebPositive, or Web+ for short, is Haiku's native web browser. One part of its name is a tip of the hat to BeOS' simple NetPositive, the other points to its modern foundation: the WebKit. This open source HTML rendering library is at the heart of other mainstream browsers as well, like Safari of Mac OS X and Google's Chrome. By using the ever evolving WebKit, Web+ will be able to keep up with new web technologies.
-
-
-
You'll control your Web browsing with the Locator bar. To go to a Web page, type the URL into the Locator box and either press RETURN or click the Go button to the right of the Locator box. Web+ will suggest previous URLs as you type; you can go through previously typed URL with the UP and DOWN arrow keys. The icons on the Locator bar give you control over the current page, allowing you to go back, forward, stop loading, or return to your Start page.
-
-
If you need to quickly locate content in a page, Web+ includes in-page search. Use Edit | Find or ALTF to call up the Find bar, then type your search phrase and press RETURN. Further presses of RETURN or ALTG will go through the matches on the page. The Match case option restricts matches to those with the same spelling as your search phrase. Besides in-page search, the Edit menu also includes clipboard functions: cut, copy, and paste.
-
-
The View menu offers several functions to set the display of Web pages. First, View | Reload refreshes the Web page so you can see any changes. You set the font size and zoom level of the Web page here as well; you can also choose whether to apply zoom to images as well as text. If you need more room to view the page, you can move into fullscreen mode with View | Fullscreen. Finally, if you want to view the HTML source code of the current page, View | Page source opens up an external editor to edit the source.
-
-
In case you need to find a page you've already accessed, Web+ has the History menu. This menu contains the Back and Forward commands which are in the Locator bar, but it also has a list of all pages in your browsing history, organized by day.
-
-
Last, the Bookmarks menu lets you add the current page as a bookmark and manage your bookmarks in Tracker. It also lets you see all the bookmarks themselves.
-
-
Right-clicking on your Web page or on elements in the page brings up a context menu. In this menu, you can Stop page loading. If you right-click a link, you can Download link to disk, Open, or Open in new tab. You can also Copy link to clipboard for use elsewhere. You can take similar actions with right-clicked images embedded in Web pages: Download image to disk, Copy image to clipboard, or Open image in new window. Right-clicking selected text allows you to Copy to the clipboard.
-
-
In the Status bar at the bottom of WebPositive's interface, you can preview where links will take you. Hover over a link in a Web page and its destination URL will appear in the Status bar. This bar will also show you progress as Web+ loads a new Web page.
You can access the Web+ settings dialog from Window | Settings.
-
-
-
Many of the options are self-explanatory. The WebPositive Start page and Search page can be set here. You can also change which pages appear in new windows and tabs. Finally, you can change the default fonts and add a proxy server in this dialog.
-
The Auto-hide interface in fullscreen mode option will cause the interface to roll out of view if you don't use it for a short time while in fullscreen mode. Likewise, the Auto-hide mouse pointer option removes the mouse pointer from view when you are scrolling through a Web page.
-
-
Web+ currently only uses the Search page as a possible default page for new tabs and windows. It doesn't have built-in Web search; you have to go to your search engine and type in your query there.
These are some commonly used keyboard shortcuts in WebPositive:
+
WebPositive's interface is pretty straight forward: Under a menu bar is another bar with buttons to navigate to the previous and next sites in your browsing history, to stop the loading of a page and (optionally) a button to jump to your starting page.
+Then comes the locator field to enter a site's URL.
+Below this navigating bar appear the webpages. You can open many pages in parallel by loading them into their own tab.
+At the bottom of the window is a status bar, showing the URL of the site being loaded or of the link the mouse pointer is hovering over. While a page is being loaded, a progress bar appears to the right.
+
Settings
+
From the Window menu you can open a Settings panel to configure a few essentials of WebPositive.
+
+
The first tab deals with general settings: What file or URL serves as a Start page, what's used as a Search page, what Download folder is used for stuff you get from the net.
+Two pop-up menus let you decide what page to load - if any - when opening a new window or tab.
+Via the following checkboxes you can avoid showing the tab bar when there's only one page open anyway. WebPositive's interface can be told to automatically hide in full screen mode, and the mouse pointer can be automatically hidden whenever it's not moved for a while.
+Finally, you can decide to include the "Home" button in the navigation bar and set the number of days the browser remembers the sites you have visited in its history.
+
In the second tab you can choose the fonts used for standard, serif, non-serif and monospaced fonts and set their default sizes.
+
The last tab is used to configure a proxy server.
+
Browsing
+
If you have used any browser before, WebPositive shouldn't provide too many surprises. Instead of going through every menu item and feature, let's have a look at just a few points.
+
+
+
New tabs are created with the + button to the right in the tab bar or, if there's still enough space, by double-clicking into an empty area of it. If there are more tabs open than fit into the bar, the <> scroll-buttons become active, allowing you to scroll the tab bar left and right. The ∨ button to the far right hosts a pop-up menu with all open tabs for even quicker navigation.
+
Clicking on a link with the middle mouse button opens the page in a new tab in the background.
+
From the View menu you can Zoom in and Zoom out of a page. There's also an option to Zoom text only, leaving all images with their original size.
+
If you switch to full screen mode and have activated the setting to hide the interface, it will disappear after a second. To slide it temporarily back in, simply move the mouse pointer to the top of the screen.
+
+
While you type in the locator text field, the browser matches the string to sites you have visited in the past and lists them below the text field. You either keep adding more letters to shorten the list of possible sites, or choose an entry with ↑ or ↓. ENTER will load the page. You can also use the button to the far right which also serves to reload a page.
+Strings not recognized as URLs will get looked up with Google, so the locator field doubles as quick shortcut to web searches.
+
Right-clicking opens a context menu which, depending on the object you've clicked on, offers to open the link in a new window or a new tab, download the object etc.
+
Edit | Find shows a find bar at the bottom to start an in-page search. Matches are highlighted in the page.
+
+
After a while you may experience web pages being loaded slower and slower. Not really a bug in the truest sense, it's more an effect of a deficient handling of cookies. Either way, until that is fixed you'll have to manually intervene: Have a look at ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Cookies.curl. This file stores cookies from webpages and slowly grows while surfing the web. Once it's a few dozen kilobytes in size, it starts to slow down browsing. Just delete the file at that point to start with a clean slate.
+
Bookmarks
+
WebPositive's bookmarks are managed as files and folders in ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/. Adding a bookmark will create a new file there. You can quickly open the folder with Manage Bookmarks....
+
+
You can change a bookmark's URL, name, title and enter keywords just like with any other file with attributes. Just make sure you have all their columns displayed via Tracker's Attributes menu, then select a file, press ALTE and start editing the attribute; change attribute columns with TAB. You can sort bookmarks into different folders you create yourself.
+
By using Tracker to manage and navigate bookmarks you can lift its unique features to quickly find what you're looking for.
+Activating Type-ahead filtering in Tracker's preferences, you can instantly trim down your list of bookmarks to matches of your filter-string. A few more ↑ or ↓ to move the selection and pressing ENTER opens the site. Make sure to display all attribute columns to have the filter applied to name, title, URL and keywords.
+
For this to work, all bookmarks should be kept in the ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/ folder and only copies should be sorted into custom subfolders for usage in WebPositive's Bookmarks menu (if at all). Also, actually filling the keywords attribute helps...
+
Downloads
+
Window | Downloads opens a window listing all past and ongoing downloads:
+
+
Currently downloading files are shown with a growing progress bar and, similar to copying files in Tracker, information on the download speed, file size and expected finishing time. Buttons to the right let you Cancel and Restart a download, or Open the file, or Remove its entry from the list. The Remove missing and Remove finished buttons at the bottom do this for all entries in this list. "Missing" are files that were deleted in the meantime.
+
Moving a file that is currently being downloaded to Trash will stop the download. You'll also notice, that its icon becomes "ghosted".
+Generally, WebPositive is very tolerant when it comes to managing files with Tracker. Files can be renamed or moved even while they are being downloaded and even after the download is finished, these changes are reflected in the Downloads window.
+
Ever wondered from what site you downloaded a particular package, image or any other file? You can track that down by opening the file with DiskProbe and have a look at its META:url attribute.
+
Want to have the URL permanently shown in your downloads folder? Just copy a bookmark into it, have the bookmark's URL attribute column displayed and remove the bookmark again.
+
Keyboard shortcuts
+
Here are some useful keyboard shortcuts:
-
ALTT
Opens a new tab.
+
ALTT
Opens a new tab.
ALTW
Closes the current tab.
ALTN
Opens a new window.
SHIFTALTW
Closes the current window.
-
CMD click
Opens the clicked link in a new background tab.
-
ALTR
Refreshes the current page.
+
ALTENTER
Toggles full screen mode.
+
ALTR or F5
Refreshes the current page.
+
ALTH
Opens the home page.
+
ALTD
Shows/hides the Downloads window.
+
ALTF
Shows the find bar for in-page searching (hide with ESC).
One of WebPositive's unique features is its handling of bookmarks.
-
-
-
Web+ stores your bookmarks as files in Haiku's file system, and you can manage them with Tracker: ALTM will bring up your Bookmarks folder in Tracker. The files themselves are blank. Instead, Web+ stores each bookmark's URL and page title as attributes.
-
There are a number of advantages to this format; attribute storage is easy to filter and edit. Make sure that you first make the bookmark attributes visible from the Attributes menu in Tracker first. To add keywords to a bookmark, just right-click the bookmark in Tracker and choose Edit name, then use TAB to navigate to the keywords field. Once you're editing that field, type in your new keywords and press RETURN. You can edit the names, page titles and URLs of existing bookmarks with the same process.
-
-
WebPositive's approach toward bookmarks allows for quick searching. In Window | Preferences in Tracker, go to the Windows tab and choose Enable type-ahead filtering. Now, whenever you are in a bookmark-filled folder in Tracker, you can type phrases from the title, URL, or keywords of the bookmark you want and filter through the results. This tip is especially helpful if you fill in keywords beforehand. Note that it only works for flat folders and not hierarchies, so you will need to copy your bookmarks into one folder to use this.
Web+ also supports managing your downloads in a similar way. The Downloads window appears when you begin a download; you can call it up manually from the Windows menu. From here, you can open, restart, or remove previous downloads.
-
-
-
Much like it does with bookmarks, Web+ stores information about each download as an attribute. The original URL of the download remains an attribute of the file, so you can always return to the source of the file.
-
Web+ will update and adjust to changes to the downloaded files. Notice that sunday.pdf was deleted, so its icon was ghosted out in the Downloads window. documents.html was renamed from its original name of documents, and the Downloads window updated accordingly.
-
-
-
In the Web+ Settings, you can choose a default folder for downloads. However, if you need a download in a different place, just move it while downloading, and Web+ will continue to download. Moving the file to the Trash will cancel the download.
-
Closing Web+ will cancel your current downloads! Web+ will pop up a warning dialog if you have an ongoing download and try to quit.
One or more LaunchBox applets can be started to organize shortcuts to your favorite applications or documents. You decide if each is shown on all or just the current workspace. They can also serve to quickly open a document in a specific application. For example, you could drag&drop a HTML file onto a text editor in a LaunchBox to open it in the editor instead of its preferred application, the browser.
Settings - Horizontal Layout - Icon size
@@ -68,24 +70,24 @@
- Show Window Border - Auto Raise - Show On All Workspaces
-Aligns the buttons horizontally.
-Sets the icon size between 16 and 64 pixel.
-Launches the object only once, even when you (accidentally) double-click.
-Shows the window border.
-LaunchBox pops up if the mouse is near the screen edge.
-Shows the LaunchBox on every workspace.
NetworkStatus shows the status of your network connections. If not yet running, launching the applet will ask if it should open in window mode or live in the Deskbar. In window mode you're able to resize the icon by resizing the window and use the Replicant handle to drag it to the Desktop.
-Wherever installed, it's operated via a right-click context menu.
-
-The first section contains all network devices' names and their state. Clicking on such an entry brings up a window showing its IP, broadcast and netmask address.
-Below is a list of all wireless networks found by the first wireless adapter and an indicator of their signal strength.
-Lastly, you can Open network preferences... to change your network configuration or Quit the applet.
The primary task of the ProcessController applet is to show the activity of your CPU(s) and the amount of used memory. It allows monitoring of individual teams, change their priority, and kill them if the program freezes. In multiprocessor environments it allows you to disable individual processors/cores. When Tracker or Deskbar crash you can restart them from ProcessController's menu.
-
Indicators on the left show each CPU's usage, while the bar on the right shows the memory consumption. Remember that the number of indicators depend on the number of processors/cores in the computer.
-
If not yet running, launching ProcessController asks if it should open in window mode or live in the Deskbar. In window mode you can resize the bar-display by resizing the window and then use the Replicant handle to drag it to the Desktop.
-Wherever it's installed, it's operated via a right-click context menu.
-To remove the applet again from the Deskbar, uncheck Live in the Deskbar in its context menu.
ProcessControllerはまだ実行していない場合に、起動するときにウィンドウモードまたはDeskbarモードを選択してください。ウィンドウモードで、ウインドウのサイズを変更して、Replicantを使ってDesktopにドラッグすることもできます。
+ProcessControllerはコンテキストメニュで使います。
+コンテキストメニューのLive in the Deskbarのチェックボックスをオフにすると、ProcessControllerはDeskbarから削除します。
Quit an application
-
To quit an application just choose its name from the Quit an application menu. This is a clean way to close app, just like clicking its close button. Be careful not to quit system processes like servers or daemons, however. Your system may stop working reliably.
-
Memory usage
+
アプリケーションを終了には、Quit an applicationメニューでアプリケーション名をクリックしてください。この方法は強制終了ではなくて、「閉じる」ボタンをクリックみたいな方法です。でも、システムのプロセス（サーバーとデーモン）を終了しないように注意してください。その場合にシステム全体の実行の停止の可能性があります。
+
メモリ使用量
-
Monitoring memory usage can be rather inaccurate.
-
This menu allows you to monitor memory usage of different teams in your system. Next to the team's name there are two columns: first with the amount reserved for writable memory, while the second shows all memory including read-only space (shared libraries for example).
-
The first row System resources & caches... shows the total amount of memory used by the system and all applications. The length of the blue bar is based on the total physical memory in your computer. The next rows show memory used by each process. Note that the length of the bar is based only on the used part of memory.
The first row System resources & caches... shows the total amount of memory used by the system and all applications. The length of the blue bar is based on the total physical memory in your computer. The next rows show memory used by each process. Note that the length of the bar is based only on the actually used part of the memory.
-
Memory used only by given application (with write access)
Memory including read-only space (can be shared with other applications)
-
-
Threads and CPU usage
-
This menu allows you to change thread priorities, kill teams or debug them.
-
Changes via the commands in this menu reach deep into the system and can cause data loss and system instability. Keep that mouse hand steady!
+
スレッドとCPU使用率
+
このメニューでスレッドの優先度の変更、チームの終了、デバッグもできます。
+
このメニューのコマンドはでーたー損失とシステムの不安定性の結果の可能性があると注意してください。
-
Kernel code
-
User code
-
Idle thread
+
カーネルコード
+
利用者コード
+
待機スレッド
-
At the first level you see team names. By clicking on one, you can kill the whole team. The dark-blue part of the bar is time spent in kernel code, the light-blue part in user code, the green part in the idle thread(s). A bar completely filled with blue means that the team is using all processoring power.
-
The second level shows particular threads of a team. By clicking on one, you can debug or kill it. A bar completely filled with blue means that the thread is pegging one processor/core.
-
The last level of the menu allows you to change a thread's priority. Be careful with that! As a rule of thumb the priority of a thread should be inverse its CPU usage. That is, the more it tries to claim CPU time, the lower should be it's priority. In general, don't mess with an app's priorities; contact its author, that's his business.
-
You install new fonts by copying them into their respective user folder, i.e. /boot/common/data/fonts/ or /boot/home/config/data/fonts/ (see topic Filesystem layout).
ShowImage is an application used for viewing images in various formats. Its funcionality is not limited only to viewing photos, it can also crop images, show slideshows, rotate and flip images.
-
-
If you want to launch this application, simply double-click on some image on your computer.
-
-
Browse photos
-
-
You are not limited to viewing only the image you used to launch application. You can go both to previous or to next image from the folder using arrows on keybord. You can also zoom using either mouse scroll or shortcuts - ALT+ for zooming in and ALT- for zooming out. High-quality zooming is set by default, but you can disable this function unchecking View | High-quality zooming. This function does very fast bilinear filtering.
-
-
There is a possibility to simply zoom picture to the original size or to fit to the window size. Use View menu or shortcuts - ALT1 to get back to the original size or ALT0 to fit to the window size. From the same menu you can also enable stretching an image to the window.
-
-
-
-
ShowImage does support multiple-page files, such as TIFF. It means you can turn pages while browsing any multiple-page image. Make use of Browse menu or use shortcuts (see screenshot above) for this function.
-
-
To change mode to full-screen, simply choose ALTENTER shortcut.
-
-
Slide show
-
-
You can run slideshow using menu, simply choose View | Slide show. There is an option for changing slide delay from 3 to 20 seconds. Default value is a 3 second delay, but you can change it from View | Slide delay menu.
-
-
Flip and rotate images
-
-
This function is also built-in. If you would like to rotate some image, choose proper position from Image menu or use shortcuts - ALTR will rorate your image clockwise and SHIFTALTR counterclockwise.
-
-
You can also flip images. Image | Flip left to right will flip your image horizontally and Image | Flip top to bottom vertically.
-
-
Set background
-
-
You can set your desktop background directly from ShowImage. Just choose Image | Use as background... and Backgrounds preflet will pop-up.
-
-
Drag and drop
-
-
There is an option to select a piece of an image and create new image file from the selection. Simply press CTRL or ALT and select a fragment you would like to use as a new file and drag the selection to desktop. Also, you can change mode to selection mode, so you will be able to select parts of images using just a left mouse button. This option is available from Edit | Selection Mode
-
-
-
-
Once you use right mouse button to drag the selection, an image-format menu pops-up.
+
ShowImage allows you to view images in all formats that are supported through DataTranslators. New formats are automatically recognized when their translator is added to the system. This has been done for Haiku's vector icon files, WonderBrush images or when WebM images became available, for example.
+ShowImage provides minimal editing features to crop, rotate and flip images and to save them in another format.
+
Viewing
+
+
The View menu offers to start a Slide show of all images in a folder (or query result window) and set a Slide delay from 2 to 20 seconds.
+
Other commands apply to the currently displayed image (without changing the size of the window):
+Original size shows the image with a 100% zoom factor.
+Fit to window shrinks the image back into the window fame, e.g. after having zoomed into it or after resizing the window.
+Zoom in and Zoom out move into and out of the image in 10% steps. Zooming is also done with the mouse wheel; to pan an image bigger than the window, simply left-click and drag your mouse around.
+
Two settings don't just apply to the currently displayed image and are remembered when browsing from one image to the next:
+High quality zooming applies a very fast filter when zooming to reduce jagged lines and produce a smoother result.
+Stretch to window will stretch smaller images to fill the current window frame.
+
Then there's a Full screen mode with an option to Show caption in full screen mode which overlays the file name at the bottom of the image.
+
Lastly, Show tool bar will show/hide the graphical controls:
+
+
From left to right: Previous image, next image, start slide show (in full screen mode), selection mode, original size, fit to window, zoom in, zoom out.
+
Most of the more often used commands are also available from a right-click context menu on the image. Convenient when in full-screen mode.
+
Browsing
+
+
After opening an image you can quickly browse through all the other images in its folder (or query result window) by pressing ↑/↓ or ←/→. You can see the selection change accordingly in the Tracker window.
+
There is a quick way to open the folder of the current image and even navigate to its parent and subfolders. It works just like with drill-down navigating in Tracker by clicking in the info area in the status bar that shows size and format of the current image.
+
Looking at the Browse menu, shows another type of browsing: Some image formats, like TIFF, can contain several pages in one file. Commands like First page and Next page let you navigate those pages.
+
Editing
+
+
The Image menu offers the few image manipulations necessary for an image viewer: rotating and flipping the image. Note however, that the actual image data won't be changed. Only an attribute is added to the file so it'll be shown rotated or flipped the next time you open it.
+
Use as backgroud... will open the Backgrounds preferences to set the current picture as image for your workspaces.
+
Cropping is another feature that's needed sometimes. To define the frame to cut to, you can switch to Selection mode from the Edit menu and drag out a box with your left mouse button. If you don't want to change modes first, you can create this box in "normal mode" by simply holding CTRL while left-click-dragging, which otherwise would just pan the image around.
+Clear selection or ESC will remove the selection box.
+
The following chapter shows how to actually save the cropped area.
+
Saving and converting
+
To save or convert an image into any available format, you can invoke the normal Save as... item from the File menu, select the format and choose a file name.
+Often quicker, especially when the Tracker window with the destination folder is already open, is using drag & drop.
+
+
This is also how the above mentioned cropping is finalized. Either select a frame as described above, or choose Edit | Select all for the whole image. Then drag & drop the selection onto the Desktop or any Tracker window to create a new image clipping in the same format of the original image.
+
To save in another file format, do the dragging with the right mouse button and choose a format from the context menu when dropping the image.
+
Keyboard shortcuts
+
Here's a list of the most useful shortcuts:
+
+
← / ↑
Previous image
+
→ / ↓
Next image
+
DEL
Move to Trash
+
+
Zoom in
+
-
Zoom out
+
0
Original size (100% zoom)
+
1
Fit to window
+
ALTENTER
Toggle full screen mode (also via doubleclick)
+
CTRL
While holding CTRL you can create a selection frame without explicitly switching to selection mode.
~/config/settings/Terminal
-~/.profile - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/system/etc/profile
-~/.inputrc - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/system/etc/inputrc
+~/.profile - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/common/etc/profile
+~/.inputrc - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/common/etc/inputrc
The Terminal is Haiku's interface to bash, the Bourne Again Shell.
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@
Double-clicking into the emtpy part of the tab bar opens a new tab; onto a tab opens a dialog to rename its title. There are several %-designated variables that are explained with a tooltip when you hover the mouse over the text field.
By default, %1d: %p, a tab shows the current directory and, separated by a :, the name of the currently running process (or -- if it's just bash running, probably idling). The screenshot above shows the first tab with a FTP session in the Desktop folder and a second tab idling at home.
-Via Edit|Window title... the Terminal window's title can be edited in a similar way.
+Via Edit | Window title... the Terminal window's title can be edited in a similar way.
Right-clicking a tab shows a context menu to Close tab, Close other tabs or, like double-clicking, Edit tab title....
A Terminal window can be resized like any other window or you use the presets from the Settings | Window size menu. ALTENTER toggles fullscreen mode.
Changed window size and text encoding are only kept choosing Settings | Save as default.
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Pressing OK will save the current settings as defaul
Bash customization
Coming from Unix, there are countless possibilities to customize the bash itself. There are two files that are especially important to the user: .profile and .inputrc
-Both files can be created in the home/ folder and add or override the system defaults that are defined in /boot/system/etc/.
+Both files can be created in the home/ folder and add or override the system defaults that are defined in /boot/common/etc/.
.profile
The .profile is loaded every time you open a new Terminal. It sets all kinds of aliases and variables that will affect bash's behavior and appearance. You'll find many online resources that will detail all possibilities.
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
WebPositive
Deskbar:
Applications
Localização:
/boot/system/apps/WebPositive
Definições:
~/config/settings/WebPositive/ - Configuration files, cookies, cache and browsing history
-
~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks - Stores every bookmark as a file
+
~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks - All bookmarks as single files
WebPositive, or Web+ for short, is Haiku's native web browser. One part of its name is a tip of the hat to BeOS' simple NetPositive, the other points to its modern foundation: the WebKit. This open source HTML rendering library is at the heart of other mainstream browsers as well, like Safari of Mac OS X and Google's Chrome. By using the ever evolving WebKit, Web+ will be able to keep up with new web technologies.
-
-
-
You'll control your Web browsing with the Locator bar. To go to a Web page, type the URL into the Locator box and either press RETURN or click the Go button to the right of the Locator box. Web+ will suggest previous URLs as you type; you can go through previously typed URL with the UP and DOWN arrow keys. The icons on the Locator bar give you control over the current page, allowing you to go back, forward, stop loading, or return to your Start page.
-
-
If you need to quickly locate content in a page, Web+ includes in-page search. Use Edit | Find or ALTF to call up the Find bar, then type your search phrase and press RETURN. Further presses of RETURN or ALTG will go through the matches on the page. The Match case option restricts matches to those with the same spelling as your search phrase. Besides in-page search, the Edit menu also includes clipboard functions: cut, copy, and paste.
-
-
The View menu offers several functions to set the display of Web pages. First, View | Reload refreshes the Web page so you can see any changes. You set the font size and zoom level of the Web page here as well; you can also choose whether to apply zoom to images as well as text. If you need more room to view the page, you can move into fullscreen mode with View | Fullscreen. Finally, if you want to view the HTML source code of the current page, View | Page source opens up an external editor to edit the source.
-
-
In case you need to find a page you've already accessed, Web+ has the History menu. This menu contains the Back and Forward commands which are in the Locator bar, but it also has a list of all pages in your browsing history, organized by day.
-
-
Last, the Bookmarks menu lets you add the current page as a bookmark and manage your bookmarks in Tracker. It also lets you see all the bookmarks themselves.
-
-
Right-clicking on your Web page or on elements in the page brings up a context menu. In this menu, you can Stop page loading. If you right-click a link, you can Download link to disk, Open, or Open in new tab. You can also Copy link to clipboard for use elsewhere. You can take similar actions with right-clicked images embedded in Web pages: Download image to disk, Copy image to clipboard, or Open image in new window. Right-clicking selected text allows you to Copy to the clipboard.
-
-
In the Status bar at the bottom of WebPositive's interface, you can preview where links will take you. Hover over a link in a Web page and its destination URL will appear in the Status bar. This bar will also show you progress as Web+ loads a new Web page.
You can access the Web+ settings dialog from Window | Settings.
-
-
-
Many of the options are self-explanatory. The WebPositive Start page and Search page can be set here. You can also change which pages appear in new windows and tabs. Finally, you can change the default fonts and add a proxy server in this dialog.
-
The Auto-hide interface in fullscreen mode option will cause the interface to roll out of view if you don't use it for a short time while in fullscreen mode. Likewise, the Auto-hide mouse pointer option removes the mouse pointer from view when you are scrolling through a Web page.
-
-
Web+ currently only uses the Search page as a possible default page for new tabs and windows. It doesn't have built-in Web search; you have to go to your search engine and type in your query there.
These are some commonly used keyboard shortcuts in WebPositive:
+
WebPositive's interface is pretty straight forward: Under a menu bar is another bar with buttons to navigate to the previous and next sites in your browsing history, to stop the loading of a page and (optionally) a button to jump to your starting page.
+Then comes the locator field to enter a site's URL.
+Below this navigating bar appear the webpages. You can open many pages in parallel by loading them into their own tab.
+At the bottom of the window is a status bar, showing the URL of the site being loaded or of the link the mouse pointer is hovering over. While a page is being loaded, a progress bar appears to the right.
+
Settings
+
From the Window menu you can open a Settings panel to configure a few essentials of WebPositive.
+
+
The first tab deals with general settings: What file or URL serves as a Start page, what's used as a Search page, what Download folder is used for stuff you get from the net.
+Two pop-up menus let you decide what page to load - if any - when opening a new window or tab.
+Via the following checkboxes you can avoid showing the tab bar when there's only one page open anyway. WebPositive's interface can be told to automatically hide in full screen mode, and the mouse pointer can be automatically hidden whenever it's not moved for a while.
+Finally, you can decide to include the "Home" button in the navigation bar and set the number of days the browser remembers the sites you have visited in its history.
+
In the second tab you can choose the fonts used for standard, serif, non-serif and monospaced fonts and set their default sizes.
+
The last tab is used to configure a proxy server.
+
Browsing
+
If you have used any browser before, WebPositive shouldn't provide too many surprises. Instead of going through every menu item and feature, let's have a look at just a few points.
+
+
+
New tabs are created with the + button to the right in the tab bar or, if there's still enough space, by double-clicking into an empty area of it. If there are more tabs open than fit into the bar, the <> scroll-buttons become active, allowing you to scroll the tab bar left and right. The ∨ button to the far right hosts a pop-up menu with all open tabs for even quicker navigation.
+
Clicking on a link with the middle mouse button opens the page in a new tab in the background.
+
From the View menu you can Zoom in and Zoom out of a page. There's also an option to Zoom text only, leaving all images with their original size.
+
If you switch to full screen mode and have activated the setting to hide the interface, it will disappear after a second. To slide it temporarily back in, simply move the mouse pointer to the top of the screen.
+
+
While you type in the locator text field, the browser matches the string to sites you have visited in the past and lists them below the text field. You either keep adding more letters to shorten the list of possible sites, or choose an entry with ↑ or ↓. ENTER will load the page. You can also use the button to the far right which also serves to reload a page.
+Strings not recognized as URLs will get looked up with Google, so the locator field doubles as quick shortcut to web searches.
+
Right-clicking opens a context menu which, depending on the object you've clicked on, offers to open the link in a new window or a new tab, download the object etc.
+
Edit | Find shows a find bar at the bottom to start an in-page search. Matches are highlighted in the page.
+
+
After a while you may experience web pages being loaded slower and slower. Not really a bug in the truest sense, it's more an effect of a deficient handling of cookies. Either way, until that is fixed you'll have to manually intervene: Have a look at ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Cookies.curl. This file stores cookies from webpages and slowly grows while surfing the web. Once it's a few dozen kilobytes in size, it starts to slow down browsing. Just delete the file at that point to start with a clean slate.
+
Bookmarks
+
WebPositive's bookmarks are managed as files and folders in ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/. Adding a bookmark will create a new file there. You can quickly open the folder with Manage Bookmarks....
+
+
You can change a bookmark's URL, name, title and enter keywords just like with any other file with attributes. Just make sure you have all their columns displayed via Tracker's Attributes menu, then select a file, press ALTE and start editing the attribute; change attribute columns with TAB. You can sort bookmarks into different folders you create yourself.
+
By using Tracker to manage and navigate bookmarks you can lift its unique features to quickly find what you're looking for.
+Activating Type-ahead filtering in Tracker's preferences, you can instantly trim down your list of bookmarks to matches of your filter-string. A few more ↑ or ↓ to move the selection and pressing ENTER opens the site. Make sure to display all attribute columns to have the filter applied to name, title, URL and keywords.
+
For this to work, all bookmarks should be kept in the ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/ folder and only copies should be sorted into custom subfolders for usage in WebPositive's Bookmarks menu (if at all). Also, actually filling the keywords attribute helps...
+
Downloads
+
Window | Downloads opens a window listing all past and ongoing downloads:
+
+
Currently downloading files are shown with a growing progress bar and, similar to copying files in Tracker, information on the download speed, file size and expected finishing time. Buttons to the right let you Cancel and Restart a download, or Open the file, or Remove its entry from the list. The Remove missing and Remove finished buttons at the bottom do this for all entries in this list. "Missing" are files that were deleted in the meantime.
+
Moving a file that is currently being downloaded to Trash will stop the download. You'll also notice, that its icon becomes "ghosted".
+Generally, WebPositive is very tolerant when it comes to managing files with Tracker. Files can be renamed or moved even while they are being downloaded and even after the download is finished, these changes are reflected in the Downloads window.
+
Ever wondered from what site you downloaded a particular package, image or any other file? You can track that down by opening the file with DiskProbe and have a look at its META:url attribute.
+
Want to have the URL permanently shown in your downloads folder? Just copy a bookmark into it, have the bookmark's URL attribute column displayed and remove the bookmark again.
+
Keyboard shortcuts
+
Here are some useful keyboard shortcuts:
-
ALTT
Opens a new tab.
+
ALTT
Opens a new tab.
ALTW
Closes the current tab.
ALTN
Opens a new window.
SHIFTALTW
Closes the current window.
-
CMD click
Opens the clicked link in a new background tab.
-
ALTR
Refreshes the current page.
+
ALTENTER
Toggles full screen mode.
+
ALTR or F5
Refreshes the current page.
+
ALTH
Opens the home page.
+
ALTD
Shows/hides the Downloads window.
+
ALTF
Shows the find bar for in-page searching (hide with ESC).
One of WebPositive's unique features is its handling of bookmarks.
-
-
-
Web+ stores your bookmarks as files in Haiku's file system, and you can manage them with Tracker: ALTM will bring up your Bookmarks folder in Tracker. The files themselves are blank. Instead, Web+ stores each bookmark's URL and page title as attributes.
-
There are a number of advantages to this format; attribute storage is easy to filter and edit. Make sure that you first make the bookmark attributes visible from the Attributes menu in Tracker first. To add keywords to a bookmark, just right-click the bookmark in Tracker and choose Edit name, then use TAB to navigate to the keywords field. Once you're editing that field, type in your new keywords and press RETURN. You can edit the names, page titles and URLs of existing bookmarks with the same process.
-
-
WebPositive's approach toward bookmarks allows for quick searching. In Window | Preferences in Tracker, go to the Windows tab and choose Enable type-ahead filtering. Now, whenever you are in a bookmark-filled folder in Tracker, you can type phrases from the title, URL, or keywords of the bookmark you want and filter through the results. This tip is especially helpful if you fill in keywords beforehand. Note that it only works for flat folders and not hierarchies, so you will need to copy your bookmarks into one folder to use this.
Web+ also supports managing your downloads in a similar way. The Downloads window appears when you begin a download; you can call it up manually from the Windows menu. From here, you can open, restart, or remove previous downloads.
-
-
-
Much like it does with bookmarks, Web+ stores information about each download as an attribute. The original URL of the download remains an attribute of the file, so you can always return to the source of the file.
-
Web+ will update and adjust to changes to the downloaded files. Notice that sunday.pdf was deleted, so its icon was ghosted out in the Downloads window. documents.html was renamed from its original name of documents, and the Downloads window updated accordingly.
-
-
-
In the Web+ Settings, you can choose a default folder for downloads. However, if you need a download in a different place, just move it while downloading, and Web+ will continue to download. Moving the file to the Trash will cancel the download.
-
Closing Web+ will cancel your current downloads! Web+ will pop up a warning dialog if you have an ongoing download and try to quit.
By dragging the red vertical or horizontal lines on the touchpad representation, you set the scroll area (slightly reddish against the grey general touch area). Moving your finger on that part of the pad will move the scrollbars of a window accordingly.
+
By dragging the red vertical or horizontal lines on the touchpad representation, you set the scroll area (slightly reddish against the gray general touch area). Moving your finger on that part of the pad will move the scrollbars of a window accordingly.
To the right are sliders to set the general scroll acceleration and the vertical and horizontal scrolling speed.
The acceleration setting decides how much quicker a list scrolls by if you swish over the scroll area very fast. The scrolling speeds control the general speed when using the scroll area in a "normal" way.
Below the touchpad graphic are checkboxes to enable "Two finger scrolling" for vertical and horizontal scrolling. Move two fingers in parallel vertically or horizontally to move the scrollbars of a window. At least for me, it works best if with one finger from the left and one from the right hand.
diff --git a/userguide/pt_PT/preferences/tracker.html b/userguide/pt_PT/preferences/tracker.html
index 2313ba03..72829461 100644
--- a/userguide/pt_PT/preferences/tracker.html
+++ b/userguide/pt_PT/preferences/tracker.html
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@
Помимо обычных терминальных приложений, которые идут вместе с оболочкой bash и которые требуются для POSIX совместимости, также поставляются Haiku-приложения для командной строки. Эти приложения обычно очень полезны при написании сценариев, рекомендуется также изучить тему Bash и написание сценариев.
All commandline applications shipped with Haiku are in either /boot/system/bin or /boot/common/bin. Your own or additionally installed commandline apps should go in ~/config/bin. All these locations are part of the PATH variable and are therefore automatically found.
Here's a list of all commandline applications that are shipped with Haiku. Each with only a short description of what it does, for more detailed information on its usage execute the command with the parameter --help.
Помимо получения обычных скриншотов через клавишу Print Screen, которая помещает изображение текущего экрана в PNG формате в папку /boot/home, это приложение содержит и ряд других полезных настроек.
+
Помимо получения обычных снимков экрана при помощи клавиши Print Screen, которая помещает изображение текущего экрана в формате PNG в папку: /boot/home, это приложение содержит и ряд других полезных настроек.
Помимо очевидных опций - захвата всего экрана (Capture entire screen), либо только активного окна (Capture active window), включая его грани (Include window border) и курсор мыши (Include mouse pointer), также имеется возможность ввести задержку перед снятием скриншота. Эта задержка будет задействована, только если вы снимаете новый скриншот, нажимая кнопку Take Screenshot.
Below that you set the name, format and location for the screenshot that will be used when you click Save. Instead of saving the file to disk you can also decide to Copy to clipboard to be able to paste the shot directly into another application, or take a New screenshot.
The primary task of the ProcessController applet is to show the activity of your CPU(s) and the amount of used memory. It allows monitoring of individual teams, change their priority, and kill them if the program freezes. In multiprocessor environments it allows you to disable individual processors/cores. When Tracker or Deskbar crash you can restart them from ProcessController's menu.
-
Indicators on the left show each CPU's usage, while the bar on the right shows the memory consumption. Remember that the number of indicators depend on the number of processors/cores in the computer.
-
If not yet running, launching ProcessController asks if it should open in window mode or live in the Deskbar. In window mode you can resize the bar-display by resizing the window and then use the Replicant handle to drag it to the Desktop.
-Wherever it's installed, it's operated via a right-click context menu.
-To remove the applet again from the Deskbar, uncheck Live in the Deskbar in its context menu.
-
Quit an application
+
Основная задача апплета ProcessController - показать активность центрального процессора и объем использованной оперативной памяти. Он позволяет производить мониторинг отдельных комманд, назначать им приоритет, а так же принудительно завершать их, если какая-то программа зависнет. В многопроцессорных средах ProcessController позволяет отключить отдельные процессоры или ядра Когда Tracker или Deskbar завершают свою работы из-за ошибки, вы можете перезапустить их коммандой из меню ProcessController.
+
Индикаторы в левой части показывают использование каждого процессора, в то время как полоса в правой части показывает потребление оперативной памяти. Помните, что количество индикаторов зависит от количества процессоров/ядер в компьютере.
+
Если вы запустили ProcessController впервые, апплет спросит вас, должен ли он работать в оконном режиме, либо находиться в трее Deskbar. В оконном режиме вы можете
+изменять размер полосы-индикатора, меняя размер окна, после чего перетащить его на рабочий стол в виде Репликанта
+Вне зависимости от режима функционирования апплета, управление им производится через контекстное меню, вызываемое правым кликом.
+
+Для удаления апплета из трея Deskbar, снимите отметку напротив пункта Live in the Deskbar в контекстном меню.
+
Завершение работы приложения
-
To quit an application just choose its name from the Quit an application menu. This is a clean way to close app, just like clicking its close button. Be careful not to quit system processes like servers or daemons, however. Your system may stop working reliably.
-
Memory usage
+
Для выхода из приложения выберите его имя в меню Quit an application. Это такой же корректный способ, как и нажатие на кнопку закрытия в заголовке окна. Будьте аккуратны, при завершении работы таких процессов как серверы и демоны, их закрытие может привести к нестабильности работы системы.
+
Использование памяти
-
Monitoring memory usage can be rather inaccurate.
-
This menu allows you to monitor memory usage of different teams in your system. Next to the team's name there are two columns: first with the amount reserved for writable memory, while the second shows all memory including read-only space (shared libraries for example).
-
The first row System resources & caches... shows the total amount of memory used by the system and all applications. The length of the blue bar is based on the total physical memory in your computer. The next rows show memory used by each process. Note that the length of the bar is based only on the used part of memory.
+
Мониторинг использования памяти может быть немного неточным.
+
Это меню позволяет оценить объем использованной приложениями памяти в вашей системе. За именем приложения следуют две колонки - объем зарезервированной записываемой памяти и объем памяти, доступной только для чтения (например, общие библиотеки).
+
The first row System resources & caches... shows the total amount of memory used by the system and all applications. The length of the blue bar is based on the total physical memory in your computer. The next rows show memory used by each process. Note that the length of the bar is based only on the actually used part of the memory.
-
Memory used only by given application (with write access)
Memory including read-only space (can be shared with other applications)
-
-
Threads and CPU usage
-
This menu allows you to change thread priorities, kill teams or debug them.
-
Changes via the commands in this menu reach deep into the system and can cause data loss and system instability. Keep that mouse hand steady!
+
Нити и использование ЦП
+
Это меню позволяет менять приоритеты нитей, принудительно завершать программы, либо производить их отладку.
+
Изменения, вносисые этими коммандами происходят глубоко в системе и могут привести к потере данных и нестабильности системы. Так что не промахнитесь мышкой!
-
Kernel code
-
User code
-
Idle thread
+
Код ядра
+
Пользовательский код
+
Простой
-
At the first level you see team names. By clicking on one, you can kill the whole team. The dark-blue part of the bar is time spent in kernel code, the light-blue part in user code, the green part in the idle thread(s). A bar completely filled with blue means that the team is using all processoring power.
-
The second level shows particular threads of a team. By clicking on one, you can debug or kill it. A bar completely filled with blue means that the thread is pegging one processor/core.
-
The last level of the menu allows you to change a thread's priority. Be careful with that! As a rule of thumb the priority of a thread should be inverse its CPU usage. That is, the more it tries to claim CPU time, the lower should be it's priority. In general, don't mess with an app's priorities; contact its author, that's his business.
-
+
На первом уровне вы видите название программ. Кликнув по нему, вы принудительно завершите программу и все ее нити. Темно-синяя часть полосы обозначает время, затраченное на уровне ядра, светло-голубая - затраченное на уровне пользователя, зеленая часть - нить простоя. Полоса, полностью заполненная синим цветом, показывает процесс, полностью занимающий процессор.
+
На втором уровне показаны нити, составляющие процессы. Кликнув по нити вы можете перейти к ее отладке, либо принудительно ее завершить. Полоса, полностью заполненная синим цветом, обозначает нить, занимающую время одного процессора или ядра.
+
Последний уровень меню позволяет вам менять приоритеты нитей. Меняйте его с осторожностью! Как правило, приоритет нити должен быть обратен загрузке процессора: чем больше нити требуется процессорное время, тем ниже должен быть ее приоритет. А вообще, вместо того, чтобы меня приоритет, свяжитесь с автором программы - это его забота.
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ To remove the applet again from the Deskbar, uncheck Live in
Апплет для управления рабочими столами вы найдете в меню Апплет для рабочего стола (Desktop applets) панели задач Deskbar. Оно отображает миниатюрные версии всех рабочих столов. В контекстном меню доступны настройки, названия которых говорят сами за себя. Изменить количество рабочих столов (Change workspace count...) запустит настройки экрана, где вы сможете указать количество рабочих столов и их расположение (количество столбцов и строк).
-
Since the applet is a Replicant, you can resize the window as desired and then drag&drop it by its handle onto the desktop (make sure Show Replicants is activated in the Deskbar menu). Hold SHIFT while resizing to keep your screen's aspect ratio.
+
Поскольку апплет является репликантом, вы можете изменить размер окна и поместить его на рабочий стол (убедитесь, что у вас включена опция Отображать репликанты (Show replicants) в меню панели задач Deskbar). Во время изменения размера удерживайте клавишу SHIFT - это позволит сохранить соотношение сторон.
Прокрутить содержимое терминала вверх/вниз на одну строку.
SHIFTPageUP/PageDOWN
Прокрутить содержимое терминала вверх/вниз на одну страницу.
TAB
После ввода нескольких букв имени файла или пути, если нажмете TAB, то название автодополнится. Если будет более одного соответствия, то дополнение остановится в том месте, где начинается различие в названиях, и вам следует ввести ещё несколько букв. Если вы нажмете TAB дважды, то отобразится список всех соответствий.
Установить новые шрифты можно, скопировав их в соответствующую папку, например, в /boot/common/fonts/ или /boot/home/config/fonts/ (Для того чтобы определить, в какую, смотрите тему иерархия файловой системы).
+
Установить новые шрифты можно, скопировав их в соответствующую папку, например, в /boot/common/data/fonts/ или /boot/home/config/data/fonts/ (Для того чтобы определить, в какую, смотрите тему иерархия файловой системы).
Перевод этой страницы еще не завершен. Пока это не произойдет, незавершенные части будут на английском.
Локализация
@@ -60,11 +61,34 @@
Настройки хранятся по адресу:
~/config/settings/Locale settings
-
Документация отсутствует. Если вы работаете над ней, пожалуйста, сообщите в списке рассылки во избежание двойной работы.
+
Haiku's localization system does not only include replacing texts with their translations, but also more complex tasks such as formatting numbers, dates, and times in a way that matches your Locale preferences.
+
If you would like to help with translations or start with a language that is currently missing, please get in contact on the Haiku-i18n mainling list.
+
+Язык
+
Haiku has been translated to dozens of languages, unfortunately some translations are not complete yet. For that reason, you can choose more than one language as “Preferred languages”. If some text is missing in a translation, it's replaced with the words of the next preferred language. English is the default fallback (also when not listed).
+
+
In this example, the preferred language is set to Spanish. The first fallback is Italian, and if the text is missing there too, it's back to default English.
+As you can see, expanding a language entry on the left side reveals sub-entries for specific variations or dialects of a language (if available).
+
+Formatting
+
On the Formatting tab you can set up the formatting of date, time, number and currency formats independently from the settings of your preferred language.
+
+
You may be a Spanish fellow located in the Italian speaking part of Switzerland. So, you'd prefer your system in Spanish, but numbers and currency formatted like at work: Swiss/Italian.
+If you're more comfortable with your Spanish names for days and months (think of the modified dates of files, for example), you can override this time-specific formatting with the checkbox at the top to Use month/day-names from preferred language.
+
Granted, the above example is maybe not the most common scenario, but it demonstrates the flexibility of the system.
+
+Options
+
The last tab provides an option that will Translate application and folder names in Deskbar and Tracker. Disable the checkbox if you prefer the graphical interface localized, while retaining the original English names for preference panels, applications and standard folder names.
+
+
Changes are applied immediately, though currently running applications may require to be closed and restarted before showing the new setting.
+
+
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
+
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Locale preferences.
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
Applikationer
-
Before diving into all the applications that come with Haiku, let's have a more detailed look at how to install and uninstall programs you downloaded somewhere, for example from a site mentioned on the Welcome page.
-
You should only unpack/install archives within Haiku. If you extract a package under Linux or Windows, for example, and just copy the folder over to Haiku later, all the vital attributes are stripped, because those operating systems don't normally handle meta data.
+
Innan vi dyker ner i alla applikationer som följer med Haiku, låt oss se på hur du installerar och avinstallerar program du laddat ner någonstans, t.ex. från någon av webbplatserna som nämns på Välkommen-sidan.
+
Du bör endast packa upp eller installera arkiv inuti Haiku. Om du öppnar en packad fil i t.ex. Linux eller Windows och bara kopierar innehållet till Haiku senare raderas alla viktiga attribut, eftersom de operativsystemen inte normalt hanterar metadata.
Haiku software always comes as an archive. Most of the time it's a ZIP, some old BeOS packages come in Software Valet's PKG format. Software Valet was able to automatically execute installation scripts, so after double-clicking you just select a destination folder and everything's taken care of.
-If it's a ZIP archive, double-clicking opens Expander where you also set the destination and unpack it. As explained in the topic Filesystem layout, that destination is either
+
Mjukvara till Haiku kommer alltid i en packad fil. För det mesta är det en ZIP-fil, men en del gamla BeOS-paket kommer i Software Valets PKG-format. Software Valet kunde automatiskt köra installationsskript, så efter att du dubbelklickat, välj bara en mapp att installera i så sköts allt automatiskt.
+Om det är en ZIP-fil öppnas den med ett dubbelklick i Expander, där du också väljer en plats att packa upp den till. Som det förklaras i kapitlet Filesystem layout, är den platsen någon av
-
/boot/common/apps/
for applications available to every user
-
/boot/home/apps/
for applications only available to yourself
+
/boot/common/apps/
för applikationer tillgängliga för alla användare
+
/boot/home/apps/
för applikationer tillgängliga bara för dig själv
-
This distinction will only become relevant once Haiku gets multi-user support, of course.
-
Once the archive is unpacked, you should have a look into the newly created folder. Often you find ReadMe files or other documentation of interest.
-
Some programs need further configurations. For example, Tracker Add-Ons, Translators or other system enhancing components have to be put into the right folders. Either you'll find a little script file (often with the suffix .sh) like install that you simply double click to have all taken care of.
-Sometimes you'll find folders that link to the correct destination named "drag [filename] here...". So, you simply follow that instruction and you're done.
-
Most of the time, however, nothing of the sort is necessary and you're done after unpacking.
-Topics Deskbar or LaunchBox describe how to add shortcuts to your newly installed application.
+
Denna särskiljning kommer bil meningsfull först när Haiku får stöd för flera användare.
+
När filen packats upp bör du ta en titt i den nya mappen som skapats. Ofta hittar du en ReadMe-fil, eller annan intressant dokumentation.
+
Några program kräver ytterligare konfigurering. Exempelvis Tracker-tillägg, Translators och andra systemförbättrande komponenter behöver läggas i de rätta mapparna. Antingen hittar du en liten skript-fil (ofta med ändelsen .sh) t.ex. install som du helt enkelt dubbelklickar på för att sköta allt sådant.
+Ibland hittar du en mapp med namnet "drag [filename] here...", som länkar till den korrekta platsen. Följ bara instruktionen så är det klart.
+
För det mesta är det dock inte nödvändigt att göra något extra, och du är klar när filen packats upp.
+Kapitlen Deskbar och LaunchBox beskriver hur du skapar genvägar till dina nyinstallerade applikationer.
Besides the normal commandline tools coming with the bash shell or are necessary to be POSIX compliant, there are a few Haiku-specific commandline applications worth mentioning. These commands are often useful for scripting purposes, see also topic Bash and Scripting.
Förutom de vanliga kommandoradsverktygen som följer med bash, eller krävs för att vara POSIX-kompatibel, finns det några Haiku-specifika kommandoradsapplikationer värda att nämnas. Dessa kommandon är ofta användbara till skriptning, se kapitlet Bash and Scripting.
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
WebPositive
Deskbar:
Applications
Location:
/boot/system/apps/WebPositive
Settings:
~/config/settings/WebPositive/ - Configuration files, cookies, cache and browsing history
-
~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks - Stores every bookmark as a file
+
~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks - All bookmarks as single files
WebPositive, or Web+ for short, is Haiku's native web browser. One part of its name is a tip of the hat to BeOS' simple NetPositive, the other points to its modern foundation: the WebKit. This open source HTML rendering library is at the heart of other mainstream browsers as well, like Safari of Mac OS X and Google's Chrome. By using the ever evolving WebKit, Web+ will be able to keep up with new web technologies.
-
-
-
You'll control your Web browsing with the Locator bar. To go to a Web page, type the URL into the Locator box and either press RETURN or click the Go button to the right of the Locator box. Web+ will suggest previous URLs as you type; you can go through previously typed URL with the UP and DOWN arrow keys. The icons on the Locator bar give you control over the current page, allowing you to go back, forward, stop loading, or return to your Start page.
-
-
If you need to quickly locate content in a page, Web+ includes in-page search. Use Edit | Find or ALTF to call up the Find bar, then type your search phrase and press RETURN. Further presses of RETURN or ALTG will go through the matches on the page. The Match case option restricts matches to those with the same spelling as your search phrase. Besides in-page search, the Edit menu also includes clipboard functions: cut, copy, and paste.
-
-
The View menu offers several functions to set the display of Web pages. First, View | Reload refreshes the Web page so you can see any changes. You set the font size and zoom level of the Web page here as well; you can also choose whether to apply zoom to images as well as text. If you need more room to view the page, you can move into fullscreen mode with View | Fullscreen. Finally, if you want to view the HTML source code of the current page, View | Page source opens up an external editor to edit the source.
-
-
In case you need to find a page you've already accessed, Web+ has the History menu. This menu contains the Back and Forward commands which are in the Locator bar, but it also has a list of all pages in your browsing history, organized by day.
-
-
Last, the Bookmarks menu lets you add the current page as a bookmark and manage your bookmarks in Tracker. It also lets you see all the bookmarks themselves.
-
-
Right-clicking on your Web page or on elements in the page brings up a context menu. In this menu, you can Stop page loading. If you right-click a link, you can Download link to disk, Open, or Open in new tab. You can also Copy link to clipboard for use elsewhere. You can take similar actions with right-clicked images embedded in Web pages: Download image to disk, Copy image to clipboard, or Open image in new window. Right-clicking selected text allows you to Copy to the clipboard.
-
-
In the Status bar at the bottom of WebPositive's interface, you can preview where links will take you. Hover over a link in a Web page and its destination URL will appear in the Status bar. This bar will also show you progress as Web+ loads a new Web page.
You can access the Web+ settings dialog from Window | Settings.
-
-
-
Many of the options are self-explanatory. The WebPositive Start page and Search page can be set here. You can also change which pages appear in new windows and tabs. Finally, you can change the default fonts and add a proxy server in this dialog.
-
The Auto-hide interface in fullscreen mode option will cause the interface to roll out of view if you don't use it for a short time while in fullscreen mode. Likewise, the Auto-hide mouse pointer option removes the mouse pointer from view when you are scrolling through a Web page.
-
-
Web+ currently only uses the Search page as a possible default page for new tabs and windows. It doesn't have built-in Web search; you have to go to your search engine and type in your query there.
These are some commonly used keyboard shortcuts in WebPositive:
+
WebPositive's interface is pretty straight forward: Under a menu bar is another bar with buttons to navigate to the previous and next sites in your browsing history, to stop the loading of a page and (optionally) a button to jump to your starting page.
+Then comes the locator field to enter a site's URL.
+Below this navigating bar appear the webpages. You can open many pages in parallel by loading them into their own tab.
+At the bottom of the window is a status bar, showing the URL of the site being loaded or of the link the mouse pointer is hovering over. While a page is being loaded, a progress bar appears to the right.
+
Settings
+
From the Window menu you can open a Settings panel to configure a few essentials of WebPositive.
+
+
The first tab deals with general settings: What file or URL serves as a Start page, what's used as a Search page, what Download folder is used for stuff you get from the net.
+Two pop-up menus let you decide what page to load - if any - when opening a new window or tab.
+Via the following checkboxes you can avoid showing the tab bar when there's only one page open anyway. WebPositive's interface can be told to automatically hide in full screen mode, and the mouse pointer can be automatically hidden whenever it's not moved for a while.
+Finally, you can decide to include the "Home" button in the navigation bar and set the number of days the browser remembers the sites you have visited in its history.
+
In the second tab you can choose the fonts used for standard, serif, non-serif and monospaced fonts and set their default sizes.
+
The last tab is used to configure a proxy server.
+
Browsing
+
If you have used any browser before, WebPositive shouldn't provide too many surprises. Instead of going through every menu item and feature, let's have a look at just a few points.
+
+
+
New tabs are created with the + button to the right in the tab bar or, if there's still enough space, by double-clicking into an empty area of it. If there are more tabs open than fit into the bar, the <> scroll-buttons become active, allowing you to scroll the tab bar left and right. The ∨ button to the far right hosts a pop-up menu with all open tabs for even quicker navigation.
+
Clicking on a link with the middle mouse button opens the page in a new tab in the background.
+
From the View menu you can Zoom in and Zoom out of a page. There's also an option to Zoom text only, leaving all images with their original size.
+
If you switch to full screen mode and have activated the setting to hide the interface, it will disappear after a second. To slide it temporarily back in, simply move the mouse pointer to the top of the screen.
+
+
While you type in the locator text field, the browser matches the string to sites you have visited in the past and lists them below the text field. You either keep adding more letters to shorten the list of possible sites, or choose an entry with ↑ or ↓. ENTER will load the page. You can also use the button to the far right which also serves to reload a page.
+Strings not recognized as URLs will get looked up with Google, so the locator field doubles as quick shortcut to web searches.
+
Right-clicking opens a context menu which, depending on the object you've clicked on, offers to open the link in a new window or a new tab, download the object etc.
+
Edit | Find shows a find bar at the bottom to start an in-page search. Matches are highlighted in the page.
+
+
After a while you may experience web pages being loaded slower and slower. Not really a bug in the truest sense, it's more an effect of a deficient handling of cookies. Either way, until that is fixed you'll have to manually intervene: Have a look at ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Cookies.curl. This file stores cookies from webpages and slowly grows while surfing the web. Once it's a few dozen kilobytes in size, it starts to slow down browsing. Just delete the file at that point to start with a clean slate.
+
Bookmarks
+
WebPositive's bookmarks are managed as files and folders in ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/. Adding a bookmark will create a new file there. You can quickly open the folder with Manage Bookmarks....
+
+
You can change a bookmark's URL, name, title and enter keywords just like with any other file with attributes. Just make sure you have all their columns displayed via Tracker's Attributes menu, then select a file, press ALTE and start editing the attribute; change attribute columns with TAB. You can sort bookmarks into different folders you create yourself.
+
By using Tracker to manage and navigate bookmarks you can lift its unique features to quickly find what you're looking for.
+Activating Type-ahead filtering in Tracker's preferences, you can instantly trim down your list of bookmarks to matches of your filter-string. A few more ↑ or ↓ to move the selection and pressing ENTER opens the site. Make sure to display all attribute columns to have the filter applied to name, title, URL and keywords.
+
For this to work, all bookmarks should be kept in the ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/ folder and only copies should be sorted into custom subfolders for usage in WebPositive's Bookmarks menu (if at all). Also, actually filling the keywords attribute helps...
+
Downloads
+
Window | Downloads opens a window listing all past and ongoing downloads:
+
+
Currently downloading files are shown with a growing progress bar and, similar to copying files in Tracker, information on the download speed, file size and expected finishing time. Buttons to the right let you Cancel and Restart a download, or Open the file, or Remove its entry from the list. The Remove missing and Remove finished buttons at the bottom do this for all entries in this list. "Missing" are files that were deleted in the meantime.
+
Moving a file that is currently being downloaded to Trash will stop the download. You'll also notice, that its icon becomes "ghosted".
+Generally, WebPositive is very tolerant when it comes to managing files with Tracker. Files can be renamed or moved even while they are being downloaded and even after the download is finished, these changes are reflected in the Downloads window.
+
Ever wondered from what site you downloaded a particular package, image or any other file? You can track that down by opening the file with DiskProbe and have a look at its META:url attribute.
+
Want to have the URL permanently shown in your downloads folder? Just copy a bookmark into it, have the bookmark's URL attribute column displayed and remove the bookmark again.
+
Keyboard shortcuts
+
Here are some useful keyboard shortcuts:
-
ALTT
Opens a new tab.
+
ALTT
Opens a new tab.
ALTW
Closes the current tab.
ALTN
Opens a new window.
SHIFTALTW
Closes the current window.
-
CMD click
Opens the clicked link in a new background tab.
-
ALTR
Refreshes the current page.
+
ALTENTER
Toggles full screen mode.
+
ALTR or F5
Refreshes the current page.
+
ALTH
Opens the home page.
+
ALTD
Shows/hides the Downloads window.
+
ALTF
Shows the find bar for in-page searching (hide with ESC).
One of WebPositive's unique features is its handling of bookmarks.
-
-
-
Web+ stores your bookmarks as files in Haiku's file system, and you can manage them with Tracker: ALTM will bring up your Bookmarks folder in Tracker. The files themselves are blank. Instead, Web+ stores each bookmark's URL and page title as attributes.
-
There are a number of advantages to this format; attribute storage is easy to filter and edit. Make sure that you first make the bookmark attributes visible from the Attributes menu in Tracker first. To add keywords to a bookmark, just right-click the bookmark in Tracker and choose Edit name, then use TAB to navigate to the keywords field. Once you're editing that field, type in your new keywords and press RETURN. You can edit the names, page titles and URLs of existing bookmarks with the same process.
-
-
WebPositive's approach toward bookmarks allows for quick searching. In Window | Preferences in Tracker, go to the Windows tab and choose Enable type-ahead filtering. Now, whenever you are in a bookmark-filled folder in Tracker, you can type phrases from the title, URL, or keywords of the bookmark you want and filter through the results. This tip is especially helpful if you fill in keywords beforehand. Note that it only works for flat folders and not hierarchies, so you will need to copy your bookmarks into one folder to use this.
Web+ also supports managing your downloads in a similar way. The Downloads window appears when you begin a download; you can call it up manually from the Windows menu. From here, you can open, restart, or remove previous downloads.
-
-
-
Much like it does with bookmarks, Web+ stores information about each download as an attribute. The original URL of the download remains an attribute of the file, so you can always return to the source of the file.
-
Web+ will update and adjust to changes to the downloaded files. Notice that sunday.pdf was deleted, so its icon was ghosted out in the Downloads window. documents.html was renamed from its original name of documents, and the Downloads window updated accordingly.
-
-
-
In the Web+ Settings, you can choose a default folder for downloads. However, if you need a download in a different place, just move it while downloading, and Web+ will continue to download. Moving the file to the Trash will cancel the download.
-
Closing Web+ will cancel your current downloads! Web+ will pop up a warning dialog if you have an ongoing download and try to quit.
Attributes are data fields that belong to a file but aren't part of that file, e.g. they are not computed into the file size and can be copied or changed without touching the file itself. The system uses these attributes to store e.g. file size, file type or date of the last modification. This is similar to other operating systems and their filesystems.
-
What's different is that you can add any kind of attribute to any file and display it or make it editable in a Tracker window. You just have to define the kind of attribute you want to add to a file type (e.g. string, integer or time) and give it a name and description.
-
The file itself doesn't even need any contents at all. Take a look at these People files for example:
+
Attribut är datafält som tillhör en fil men inte är en del av filen, d.v.s. de räknas inte med i filstorleken, och kan kopieras eller ändras utan att röra själva filen. Systemet använder dessa attribut till att lagra t.ex. filstorlek, filtyp, och datum för senaste ändringen. Detta liknar andra operativsystem och filsystem.
+
Det som är annorlunda är att du kan lägga till vilken typ av attribut som helst till vilken fil som helst, och visa det eller göra det redigerbart i ett Tracker-fönster. Du behöver bara definera vilken typ av attribut du vill lägga till till filen (t.ex. sträng, heltal eller klockslag) och ge det ett namn och en beskrivning.
+
Filen själv behöver inte ens innehålla något. Se till exempel på de här People-filerna:
-
As you can see, these are all 0-sized files with attached attributes, the E-mail attribute of "John Nox" being edited right in Tracker.
-
If you index these attributes, as People, Email or audio files are by default, they are also searchable with Haiku's fast query system.
+
Som du kan se har alla de här filerna filstorleken 0 och tillhörande attribut. Attributet E-mail, tillhörande "John Nox", redigeras direkt i Tracker.
+
Om du låter attributen vara indexerade, som People- Email- och ljudfiler är som standard, kan de också sökas med Haikus snabba söksystem.
Attributes are displayed quite similar to a database or spreadsheet. Using Tracker you can choose which attributes to display (columns) and sort file listings (rows) accordingly.
-
To do this, open a Tracker window, click on the Attributes menu, and select the attributes you want to display. Alternatively, simply right-click onto a column heading and mark the items in the context menu. You can rearrange the columns by a simple drag&drop of the column heading. Moving a column out of a window, is a fast way to get rid of columns you don't need.
-
Double-click on the line between two attributes in the heading to automatically resize a column to its optimal width.
-
Click on a column heading to toggle the sorting order from ascending to descending. You can establish a secondary sort order by pressing the SHIFT key while clicking on a column heading. You can sort your People files by company and within that order sort by contact name, for instance. See the above screenshot as an example. The secondary sort order is marked by a lighter colored indicator beside the heading.
-
Editing these attributes is as simple as renaming a file: Either click on an entry or press ALTE and move between the attributes with TAB and SHIFTTAB. ESC leaves the editing mode without applying the changes.
+
Attribut visas ganska likt en databas eller ett kalkylark. Med Tracker kan du välja vilka attribut du vill visa (kolumnerna), och sortera fil-listningen (raderna) därefter.
+
För att göra det, öppna ett Tracker-fönster, klicka på menyn Attributes och välj de attribut du vill visa. Alternativt kan du helt enkelt högerklicka på en kolumnrubrik och markera alternativen i popup-menyn. Du kan flytta runt kolumnerna genom att dra i kolumnrubrilen och släppa den där du vill ha den. Du kan släppa en kolumn utanför fönstret för att ta bort den.
+
Dubbelklicka på lnjen mellan två attribut i rubrikraden för att automatisk välja en optimal bredd för kolumnen.
+
Klicka på en kolumnrubrik för att växla mellan stigande eller sjunkande sortering. Du kan bestämma en sekundär sortering genom att hålla ner SHIFT-knappen medan du klickar på en kolumnrubrik. Du kan t.ex. sortera dina People-filer efter företag och i andra hand efter namn. Se skärmbilden ovan för ett exempel. Den sekundära sorteringen visas med en ljusare färg bredvid rubriken.
+
Att redigera attribut är lika enkelt som att byta namn på en fil: Klicka på ett attributfält eller tryck ALTE och flytta mellan attribut med TAB och SHIFTTAB. ESC lämnar redigeringsläget uttan att spara ändringarna.
If you prefer to use the commandline or plan to work with many files using scripting, there are several commands for controlling attributes from Terminal.
+
Om du föredrar att använda kommandoraden eller planerar att arbeta med många filer genom att använda skript finns det flera kommandon för att hantera attribut från Terminal.
listattr lists a file's attributes, but doesn't show the contents of the attributes.
+
listattr listar en fils attribut, men visar inte attributens innehåll.
usage: listattr 'filename' ['filename' ...]
-
From our screenshot example above:
+
Från exemplet i skärmbilden ovan:
~/people ->listattr Clara\ Botters
File: Clara Botters
Type Size Name
@@ -106,25 +106,25 @@ MIME String 21 "BEOS:TYPE"
Raw Data 20 "_trk/pinfo_le"
131 bytes total in attributes.
-
Besides all the "META:*" attributes that hold the contact's information, there are two attributes that are managed by the system:
+
Förutom alla "META:*"-attribut som innehåller kontaktinformationen finns det två attribut som sköts av systemet:
-
BEOS:TYPE holds the file type as a MIME string, here "application/x-person". It determines the default icon and the application that opens the file when you e.g. double click it.
-
"_trk/pinfo_le" is the attribute with which Tracker keeps track of a file's icon position.
+
BEOS:TYPE innehåller filtypen som en MIME-sträng, i det här fallet "application/x-person". Det bestämmer standardikonen och vilken applikation som öppnar filen om du t.ex. dubbelklickar på den.
+
"_trk/pinfo_le" är det attribut Tracker använder för att hålla ordning på filens ikonplacering.
Note the backslash after "Clara". In Terminal you have to "escape" special characters like '"*\$?!. The space between "Clara" and "Botters" is also one of those. Therefore the backslash is really in front of the space character, and not after "Clara".
string, mime, int, llong, float, double, bool, icon, raw
or a numeric value (ie. 0x1234, 42, 'ABCD', ...)
The default is "string"
-
So, say dear Clara took a job with the multi-national Barkelbaer Inc., you fill the formerly empty "Company" attribute with that data (which is of type "string"):
+
Låt säga att vår Clara tog ett jobb i det multinationella företaget Barkelbaer Inc. Du fyller i det hittils tomma attributet "Company" med företagsnamnet (som är av typen "string"):
~/people ->addattr -t string META:company Barkelbaer\ Inc. Clara\ Botters
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
Boot Loader
@@ -75,7 +74,7 @@ Det är också användbart efter att man installerat en mjukvarukomponent som kr
- Disable ACPI
Select debug options
-
Here you'll find several options that help with debugging or getting details for a bug report. Again, a short explanation for each option is displayed at the bottom.
+
Här hittar du flera alternativ som är användbara för felsökning eller för att få detaljer till en buggrapport. Som förut visas en kort förklaring för varje alternativ längst ner på skärmen.
- Enable serial debug output - Enable on screen debug output - Enable debug syslog
diff --git a/userguide/sv_SE/contents.html b/userguide/sv_SE/contents.html
index f559a8d9..b8b763f4 100644
--- a/userguide/sv_SE/contents.html
+++ b/userguide/sv_SE/contents.html
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
Locale
-
Locale
Deskbar:
Preferences
@@ -59,11 +58,34 @@
Settings:
~/config/settings/Locale settings
-
Documentation is still missing. If you want to work on it, please announce it on the Documentation mailing list to avoid duplication.
+
Haiku's localization system does not only include replacing texts with their translations, but also more complex tasks such as formatting numbers, dates, and times in a way that matches your Locale preferences.
+
If you would like to help with translations or start with a language that is currently missing, please get in contact on the Haiku-i18n mainling list.
+
+Language
+
Haiku has been translated to dozens of languages, unfortunately some translations are not complete yet. For that reason, you can choose more than one language as “Preferred languages”. If some text is missing in a translation, it's replaced with the words of the next preferred language. English is the default fallback (also when not listed).
+
+
In this example, the preferred language is set to Spanish. The first fallback is Italian, and if the text is missing there too, it's back to default English.
+As you can see, expanding a language entry on the left side reveals sub-entries for specific variations or dialects of a language (if available).
+
+Formatting
+
On the Formatting tab you can set up the formatting of date, time, number and currency formats independently from the settings of your preferred language.
+
+
You may be a Spanish fellow located in the Italian speaking part of Switzerland. So, you'd prefer your system in Spanish, but numbers and currency formatted like at work: Swiss/Italian.
+If you're more comfortable with your Spanish names for days and months (think of the modified dates of files, for example), you can override this time-specific formatting with the checkbox at the top to Use month/day-names from preferred language.
+
Granted, the above example is maybe not the most common scenario, but it demonstrates the flexibility of the system.
+
+Options
+
The last tab provides an option that will Translate application and folder names in Deskbar and Tracker. Disable the checkbox if you prefer the graphical interface localized, while retaining the original English names for preference panels, applications and standard folder names.
+
+
Changes are applied immediately, though currently running applications may require to be closed and restarted before showing the new setting.
+
+
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
+
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Locale preferences.
By dragging the red vertical or horizontal lines on the touchpad representation, you set the scroll area (slightly reddish against the grey general touch area). Moving your finger on that part of the pad will move the scrollbars of a window accordingly.
+
By dragging the red vertical or horizontal lines on the touchpad representation, you set the scroll area (slightly reddish against the gray general touch area). Moving your finger on that part of the pad will move the scrollbars of a window accordingly.
To the right are sliders to set the general scroll acceleration and the vertical and horizontal scrolling speed.
The acceleration setting decides how much quicker a list scrolls by if you swish over the scroll area very fast. The scrolling speeds control the general speed when using the scroll area in a "normal" way.
Below the touchpad graphic are checkboxes to enable "Two finger scrolling" for vertical and horizontal scrolling. Move two fingers in parallel vertically or horizontally to move the scrollbars of a window. At least for me, it works best if with one finger from the left and one from the right hand.
diff --git a/userguide/sv_SE/preferences/tracker.html b/userguide/sv_SE/preferences/tracker.html
index e30d4d9d..70646635 100644
--- a/userguide/sv_SE/preferences/tracker.html
+++ b/userguide/sv_SE/preferences/tracker.html
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
Перед тим як перейти до додатків, що супроводжують Haiku, спробуємо детально вивчити, як встановити або видалити додатки, котрі Ви скачали, наприклад з одного з сайтів, що згадуються на сторінці Привітання (Welcome).
+
Перед тим як перейти до додатків, що супроводжують Haiku, спробуємо детально вивчити, як встановити або видалити додатки, котрі Ви скачали, наприклад з одного з сайтів, що згадуються на сторінці привітання (Welcome).
Вам слід просто розпакувати архів під Haiku. При розпакуванні вмісту архіву в Linux або Windows, наприклад, і простому копіюванні їх у Haiku, Ви втратите всі важливі атрибути, бо ці системи не вміють правильно обробляти метадані.
Haiku програми завжди постачаються у вигляді архіву. У більшості випадків це ZIP, деякі старі BeOS пакунки існують у форматі Software Valet's PKG. Software Valet дозволяв автоматично виконати інсталяційні скрипти, достатньо було вибрати папку призначення і все належно проходило.
-Якщо це ZIP архів, двоклік відкриє Expander де вказавши папку призначення треба розпакувати його. Як описано в розділі Filesystem layout,цільовими можуть бути
+
Додатки для Haiku завжди постачаються у вигляді архіву. У більшості випадків це ZIP, деякі старі BeOS пакунки існують у форматі Software Valet's PKG. Software Valet дозволяв автоматично виконати інсталяційні скрипти, достатньо було вибрати папку призначення і все належно проходило.
+Якщо це ZIP архів, двоклік відкриє Expander де вказавши папку призначення треба розпакувати його. Як описано в розділі Ієрархія файлової системи, цільовими можуть бути :
/boot/common/apps/
для додатків доступних всім користувачам
/boot/home/apps/
для додатків призначених особисто Вам
-
This distinction will only become relevant once Haiku gets multi-user support, of course.
-
Once the archive is unpacked, you should have a look into the newly created folder. Often you find ReadMe files or other documentation of interest.
-
Some programs need further configurations. For example, Tracker Add-Ons, Translators or other system enhancing components have to be put into the right folders. Either you'll find a little script file (often with the suffix .sh) like install that you simply double click to have all taken care of.
-Sometimes you'll find folders that link to the correct destination named "drag [filename] here...". So, you simply follow that instruction and you're done.
-
Most of the time, however, nothing of the sort is necessary and you're done after unpacking.
-Topics Deskbar or LaunchBox describe how to add shortcuts to your newly installed application.
+
Ця різниця стане актуальною, коли Haiku буде
+багатокористувацькою системою.
+
Після розпаковки архіву було би непогано заглянути всередину тільки но утвореної папки. Дуже часто там поряд с основними файлами можна знайти файл ReadMe і іншу документацію.
+
Після встановлення деякі додатки вимагають подальшого налаштування. Наприклад, придатки Tracker, транслятори або інші компоненти, що розширюють можливості системи, треба покласти у відповідні папки. Деколи це маленький файл сценарій ( звичайно має розширення .sh) типу install який досить запустити двокліком мишки.
+Деколи - папки, що посилаються на потрібне місце розташування. Вони переважно мають назву "drag [filename] here...". Таким чином просто скористайтесь ними і ви зможете легко все налаштувати.
+
Однак у більшості випадків від Вас крім розпаковки архіва нічого не буде вимагатись.
+Теми Deskbar - панель завдань і LaunchBox описують, як додати значок для нових додатків.
If the installation was done with an install script, chances are, there's an uninstall script as well. In that case, double-click it and you're done.
-Otherwise, uninstalling is simply done by deleting the application's folder.
-
This, of course, leaves back possible configuration files in your ~/config/settings folder. This may be on purpose, if you want to keep those settings in case you'll install the program again in the future. Also, when the installation involved those "drag [filename] here..." folders, those files are also left behind.
-
One method to quickly get to all the app's files is to do a quick query for a significant part of the application's name. This will reveal the app's binary, its installation folder and its settings as well as possible links in the Deskbar etc. Simply select all relevant files and delete them.
Якщо для встановлення додатку використовувався сценарій , то і для його видалення він повинен існувати. У цьому випадку досить двокліка мишкою.
+У решті випадків досить просто видалити папку з додатком.
+
Це ясна річ залишає можливість повернути файл настройок, що зберігаються у папці ~/config/settings. Це може стати корисним коли Ви повторно захочете встановити його. Також збережуться файли, що Ви перетягували методом "drag [filename] here..." (дивись вище).
+
Один із способів швидко знайти всі файли, що належать додатку, це зробити запит по назві програми або його частин. Це дозволить виявити бінарний файл додатку, папку куди він встановлений і файли його налаштувань і т. д. Просто виділіть усі відповідні файли і видаліть їх.
Haiku comes with a set of mostly small but essential applications. You'll find all of them at /boot/system/apps/ or /boot/common/apps/. Applications that are not usually launched by a double-click on a data file (e.g. ShowImage for image files) can be found in the Applications menu of the Deskbar.
Haiku постачається з невеликим набором необхідних додатків. Ви можете знайти їх за адресами /boot/system/apps/ або /boot/common/apps/. Додатки, що переважно не запускаються двокліком по файлу (наприклад, ShowImage для перегляду зображень) можуть бути знайдені в меню Додатки (Applications) панелі Deskbar.
Besides the normal commandline tools coming with the bash shell or are necessary to be POSIX compliant, there are a few Haiku-specific commandline applications worth mentioning. These commands are often useful for scripting purposes, see also topic Bash and Scripting.
Окрім звиклих термінальних додатків, що ідуть разом с оболонкою bash і які вимагаються для POSIX сумісності постачаються Haiku-додатки для командної стрічки. Вони часто використовуються для написання скриптів, корисно буде заглянути в тему Bash і написання сценаріїв.
Besides the above listed programs, which are all maintained by the Haiku project, there are a few essential applications bundled in a standard Haiku system. Bugs and feature requests for those have to be filed with the particular maintainer.
Крім додатків,які ми згадували, що підтримуються проектом Haiku, існує ще кілька важливих додатків, що підтримуються сторонніми розробниками. Виявлені помилки і запити на їх покращення просимо відсилати саме до людей які супроводжують ці додатки.
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
Haiku-specific commandline applications
+
Додатки командної стрічки властиві Haiku
-
Location:
/boot/system/bin /boot/common/bin ~/config/bin
+
Розміщення:
/boot/system/bin /boot/common/bin ~/config/bin
-
All commandline applications shipped with Haiku are in either /boot/system/bin or /boot/common/bin. Your own or additionally installed commandline apps should go in ~/config/bin. All these locations are part of the PATH variable and are therefore automatically found.
+
Всі додатки командної стрічки, що постачаються з Haiku знаходяться або в /boot/system/bin або в
+ /boot/common/bin. Ваші власні або додатково встановлені ~/config/bin. Всі ці розміщення є частиною змінної PATH і тому автоматично знаходяться.
The following isn't an exhaustive list of all Haiku-specific CLI apps, it serves just to highlight a few of the most useful to give you a taste. Feel encouraged to explore what's in the bin/ folders on your own a bit. Executing an app with the parameter --help shows the usage of the command and all its various options.
All commandline applications shipped with Haiku are in either /boot/system/bin or /boot/common/bin. Your own or additionally installed commandline apps should go in ~/config/bin. All these locations are part of the PATH variable and are therefore automatically found.
diff --git a/userguide/uk/applications/magnify.html b/userguide/uk/applications/magnify.html
index 0250c352..eab6139b 100644
--- a/userguide/uk/applications/magnify.html
+++ b/userguide/uk/applications/magnify.html
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@
MediaPlayer is an application used for viewing multimedia files such as music or video files. It supports different formats.
-
-
Interface
-
-
MediaPlayer is easy-to-use because of its interface. There's no difference in interface while playing music or video.
-
+
MediaPlayer is the default player for all audio and video files. Thanks to it's ffmpeg backend, a plethora of widely used formats are supported. Its simple interface has all the controls you'd expect:
+
The slider of the progress bar allows you to quickly skim to a position, resting the mouse over it shows the current and remaining time of the clip. Clicking on the time display to the right of it, toggles between length, current and remaining time.
+Below that you find the usual controls to skip to the previous track, play/pause, stop and jump to the next track. Then comes a volume control (clicking the speaker symbol toggles muting) and a VU meter.
-
You can control playing media using a set of buttons - previous, play/pause, stop, next. Also, there is a progress bar, a volume controler and even an oscilloscope.
+
Audio and video playback
+
Since there aren't any specific features for for audio playback, we'll go straight to video or general features.
+
+
Available to all media is the File info... (ALTI). It shows information about the currently loaded file, like playing time or details of the audio/video track and its codec.
+
Most of the often used commands from the menus are also available from a right-click context menu on the video area. Convenient when in full-screen mode.
+Under Video you'll find options to zoom the window to various levels or force the aspect ratio to some standard values. Leaving the aspect ration to the default Stream settings should work best for correctly encoded files.
+
MediaPlayer supports subtitles in SRT format. To have them show up under Subtitles, their filenames have to be identical to their video file, with a suffixed language name and ".srt" instead of the video's extension. For example:
Multiple audio tracks, most often used for several languages inside one video file, are available from the Audio track submenu. The Video | Track submenu offers the same when having multiple video streams available.
+
You can toggle the Full screen mode (ALTENTER or F or a double left-click), hide MediaPlayer's window borders and controls with Hide interface (ALTH or a double right-click) or have it's window Always on top (ALTA).
-
Once you play a video file, you can double right-click on the display to hide interface. Double left-click instead causes displaying video in full-screen mode.
+
Playlists
+
MediaPlayer | Playlist... (ALTP) opens a window with the files currently queued up for playback. Double-clicking an entry starts playing it.
+
+
You can add more files by dropping them into the list and rearrange their position via drag & drop. From the Edit menu you can Randomize or Remove (DEL) an entry from the list or delete the actual file with Move to Trash (ALTT).
+
Of course, you can Save a playlist and later Open it again, or start it with simply double-clicking the playlist file.
-
Playing media
+
Settings
+
There are several settings to fine-tune MediaPlayer's behavior:
+
+
The first batch, Play mode, is pretty self-explaining. Start playback automatically, close windows when finished or play clips in a loop.
+
Next are different View options.
+You can opt to Use hardware overlay if available, which cuts down CPU usage but only works for one video window and needs a supporting video card driver.
+You can Scale movies smoothly (when not in overlay mode) which uses very fast filtering to smooth over otherwise blocky pixels when zooming video or watching in full-screen mode.
+Scale controls in full-screen mode if you prefer slightly bigger controls, maybe because you watch the screen from a bit farther away when in full-screen mode.
+Then there are settings for Subtitle size and Subtitle placement. They can be shown at the Bottom of video, which will always have them overlayed over the picture. Or Bottom of window, which allows you to resize the window vertically and have the subtitles appear in the black bar at the bottom instead.
+
The last setting determines the volume of clips whose windows are not currently active. You can have them all blaring at Full volume, at less confusing Low volume or quietly Muted.
-
There are options especially useful while watching DVD video or other files which include different audio/video tracks or have subtitles included. You can change audio tracks from Audio | Track just as Video | Track for various video tracks. You can also make use of subtitles, MediaPlayer supports .srt format. All available subtitles are showed as options in Video | Subtitles menu. The player gets names for this positions from the filename, eg. videoclip.english.srt shows as "english" in the menu.
+
Keyboard controls
+
MediaPlayer offers convenient key combinations to control playback without using the mouse.
+
+
Z
Skip to previous track
+
X
Play
+
C
Pause
+
V
Stop
+
B
Skip to next track
+
+
These keys are assigned to the functions of the control buttons. They are always the bottom left letter keys on the keyboard, i.e. they are used independently of your current keymapping. The above keys correspond to a standard US-american keymap.
+
+
→
Seek forwards
+
SHIFT→
Jump forwards 10 seconds
+
ALT→
Jump forwards 30 seconds
+
←
Seek backwards
+
SHIFT←
Jump backwards 10 seconds
+
ALT←
Jump backwards 30 seconds
-
+
↑
Increase volume
+
↓
Decrease volume
-
You can change the scale by resizing the window or simply from the Video menu. There are 50%, 100%, 200%, 300% and 400% options. There is an option to change the player to full-screen mode or to change ratio of the display.
-
-
Playlists
-
-
MediaPlayer supports playlists. You can either select a few files in Tracker using ALT and launched the application or add other files after launching the one using the drag and drop method. You can get to the playlist from menu - choose MediaPlayer | Playlist and the playlist window will pop-up.
-
-
-
-
You can save the current playlist or open one from the playlist window, of course. There is also a function that lets you to randomize your playlist. Use either Edit | Randomize menu position or ALTR shortcut. You can also both remove any file from playlist and remove it from playlist and put into Trash. This functions are available from Edit menu, too.
-
-
Other options
-
-
If you would like to rate a file, you can do this directly from MediaPlayer, too! Choose a rate from 1 to 10 from Attributes | Rating menu.
-
-
MediaPlayer is also able to show you some information about the file you play. It is available from MediaPlayer | File info... menu.
-
-
-
-
You can configure the application from MediaPlayer | Settings. There are some interesting options concerning looping playback, closing window when playback finishes, size and placement of subtitles or volume level while playing in the background.
-
-
Shortcuts
-
-
There are plenty of shortcuts for this application. SPACEBAR is used to play/pause the playback. You can control the whole playback with one hand, because alternate keys are used - Z to go to the previous track, X to play, C to pause and V to go to the next track. Left/Right cursors are used to seek, they cause 10 seconds seeking while ALT is pressed at the same time. Up and down cursors controls the volume and cause going to the previous/next track while ALT is pressed.
-
-
ALTF activates full-screen mode, ALTP pops-up playlist window, ALTI shows file information, ALTH hides interface, ALTA causes MediaPlayer is always on top, ALTS moves you to the settings window and ALTQ quits the application.
+
ALT↑
Skip to previous Track
+
ALT↓
Skip to next Track
+
Spacebar
Toggle play/pause
+
ALTENTER
Toggle full-screen mode (also done by double left-clicking the video area)
Documentation is still missing. If you want to work on it, please announce it on the Documentation mailing list to avoid duplication.
+
As the name suggests, MidiPlayer is used to playback midi music files. Midi files are special, as they don't contain the actual digitized and in some way encoded music, but only a description of it: Hold this note for that long with this volume and use instrument X for it.
+While this keeps file sizes pretty small, it also follows that depending on the instrument library (the so-called "SoundFont") the results can differ hugely. Also, these SoundFonts tend to be quite large, increasingly so with the number and quality of the instrument samples.
+
Haiku doesn't come with a SoundFont installed, because they are so large and only few people generally need one. Most of those who do, already have high quality or custom SoundFonts. To be able to at least hear something you can install a free one from an optional package. In Terminal, enter: installoptionalpackage TimGMSoundFont
+
To use any other SoundFont, create a link to it in /boot/system/data/synth and name it big_synth.sy.
+
+
MidiPlayer's interface is very simple. Just double-click or drag & drop a midi file and playback starts. You control the volume with the slider and add reverb effects from the Reverb pop-up menu. Activating the scope will show a visualization in form of an oscilloscope running at the top.
No entry, normally launched via
double-clicking a supported file.
-
Розташування в Tracker:
/boot/system/apps/PackageInstaller
+
Розміщення:
/boot/system/apps/PackageInstaller
Настройки розташовані за адресою:
none
-
Documentation is still missing. If you want to work on it, please announce it on the Documentation mailing list to avoid duplication.
+
This page is currently only a first draft. Please check back later for a refined version.
+
PackageInstaller is a software installer for BeOS packages in PKG format. It provides an easy-to-use GUI that helps in fast package installation in Haiku.
+
It is being executed automatically when you try to open files with .pkg extension.
+
+
The main window gives access to two configurations:
+
+
type of installation (depending on the developer there might be more than one (standard) installation option).
+
Installation location (only entire partitions/hard disks can be chosen, not custom paths)
+
+
After clicking Install the extraction and installation process will begin.
+
+
At this point warnings and errors can appear saying which libraries and dependencies are missing in order to run the program. It might be required to install these packages before attempting to install desired program.
+
When the installation is complete, package should appear in the Deskbar applications menu.
No entry, normally launched via
double-clicking a supported file.
-
Розташування в Tracker:
/boot/system/apps/ShowImage
+
Розміщення:
/boot/system/apps/ShowImage
Настройки розташовані за адресою:
~/config/settings/ShowImage_settings
-
ShowImage is an application used for viewing images in various formats. Its funcionality is not limited only to viewing photos, it can also crop images, show slideshows, rotate and flip images.
-
-
If you want to launch this application, simply double-click on some image on your computer.
-
-
Browse photos
-
-
You are not limited to viewing only the image you used to launch application. You can go both to previous or to next image from the folder using arrows on keybord. You can also zoom using either mouse scroll or shortcuts - ALT+ for zooming in and ALT- for zooming out. High-quality zooming is set by default, but you can disable this function unchecking View | High-quality zooming. This function does very fast bilinear filtering.
-
-
There is a possibility to simply zoom picture to the original size or to fit to the window size. Use View menu or shortcuts - ALT1 to get back to the original size or ALT0 to fit to the window size. From the same menu you can also enable stretching an image to the window.
-
-
-
-
ShowImage does support multiple-page files, such as TIFF. It means you can turn pages while browsing any multiple-page image. Make use of Browse menu or use shortcuts (see screenshot above) for this function.
-
-
To change mode to full-screen, simply choose ALTENTER shortcut.
-
-
Slide show
-
-
You can run slideshow using menu, simply choose View | Slide show. There is an option for changing slide delay from 3 to 20 seconds. Default value is a 3 second delay, but you can change it from View | Slide delay menu.
-
-
Flip and rotate images
-
-
This function is also built-in. If you would like to rotate some image, choose proper position from Image menu or use shortcuts - ALTR will rorate your image clockwise and SHIFTALTR counterclockwise.
-
-
You can also flip images. Image | Flip left to right will flip your image horizontally and Image | Flip top to bottom vertically.
-
-
Set background
-
-
You can set your desktop background directly from ShowImage. Just choose Image | Use as background... and Backgrounds preflet will pop-up.
-
-
Drag and drop
-
-
There is an option to select a piece of an image and create new image file from the selection. Simply press CTRL or ALT and select a fragment you would like to use as a new file and drag the selection to desktop. Also, you can change mode to selection mode, so you will be able to select parts of images using just a left mouse button. This option is available from Edit | Selection Mode
-
-
-
-
Once you use right mouse button to drag the selection, an image-format menu pops-up.
+
ShowImage allows you to view images in all formats that are supported through DataTranslators. New formats are automatically recognized when their translator is added to the system. This has been done for Haiku's vector icon files, WonderBrush images or when WebM images became available, for example.
+ShowImage provides minimal editing features to crop, rotate and flip images and to save them in another format.
+
Viewing
+
+
The View menu offers to start a Slide show of all images in a folder (or query result window) and set a Slide delay from 2 to 20 seconds.
+
Other commands apply to the currently displayed image (without changing the size of the window):
+Original size shows the image with a 100% zoom factor.
+Fit to window shrinks the image back into the window fame, e.g. after having zoomed into it or after resizing the window.
+Zoom in and Zoom out move into and out of the image in 10% steps. Zooming is also done with the mouse wheel; to pan an image bigger than the window, simply left-click and drag your mouse around.
+
Two settings don't just apply to the currently displayed image and are remembered when browsing from one image to the next:
+High quality zooming applies a very fast filter when zooming to reduce jagged lines and produce a smoother result.
+Stretch to window will stretch smaller images to fill the current window frame.
+
Then there's a Full screen mode with an option to Show caption in full screen mode which overlays the file name at the bottom of the image.
+
Lastly, Show tool bar will show/hide the graphical controls:
+
+
From left to right: Previous image, next image, start slide show (in full screen mode), selection mode, original size, fit to window, zoom in, zoom out.
+
Most of the more often used commands are also available from a right-click context menu on the image. Convenient when in full-screen mode.
+
Browsing
+
+
After opening an image you can quickly browse through all the other images in its folder (or query result window) by pressing ↑/↓ or ←/→. You can see the selection change accordingly in the Tracker window.
+
There is a quick way to open the folder of the current image and even navigate to its parent and subfolders. It works just like with drill-down navigating in Tracker by clicking in the info area in the status bar that shows size and format of the current image.
+
Looking at the Browse menu, shows another type of browsing: Some image formats, like TIFF, can contain several pages in one file. Commands like First page and Next page let you navigate those pages.
+
Editing
+
+
The Image menu offers the few image manipulations necessary for an image viewer: rotating and flipping the image. Note however, that the actual image data won't be changed. Only an attribute is added to the file so it'll be shown rotated or flipped the next time you open it.
+
Use as backgroud... will open the Backgrounds preferences to set the current picture as image for your workspaces.
+
Cropping is another feature that's needed sometimes. To define the frame to cut to, you can switch to Selection mode from the Edit menu and drag out a box with your left mouse button. If you don't want to change modes first, you can create this box in "normal mode" by simply holding CTRL while left-click-dragging, which otherwise would just pan the image around.
+Clear selection or ESC will remove the selection box.
+
The following chapter shows how to actually save the cropped area.
+
Saving and converting
+
To save or convert an image into any available format, you can invoke the normal Save as... item from the File menu, select the format and choose a file name.
+Often quicker, especially when the Tracker window with the destination folder is already open, is using drag & drop.
+
+
This is also how the above mentioned cropping is finalized. Either select a frame as described above, or choose Edit | Select all for the whole image. Then drag & drop the selection onto the Desktop or any Tracker window to create a new image clipping in the same format of the original image.
+
To save in another file format, do the dragging with the right mouse button and choose a format from the context menu when dropping the image.
+
Keyboard shortcuts
+
Here's a list of the most useful shortcuts:
+
+
← / ↑
Previous image
+
→ / ↓
Next image
+
DEL
Move to Trash
+
+
Zoom in
+
-
Zoom out
+
0
Original size (100% zoom)
+
1
Fit to window
+
ALTENTER
Toggle full screen mode (also via doubleclick)
+
CTRL
While holding CTRL you can create a selection frame without explicitly switching to selection mode.
~/config/settings/Terminal
-~/.profile - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/system/etc/profile
-~/.inputrc - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/system/etc/inputrc
+~/.profile - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/common/etc/profile
+~/.inputrc - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/common/etc/inputrc
The Terminal is Haiku's interface to bash, the Bourne Again Shell.
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@
Double-clicking into the emtpy part of the tab bar opens a new tab; onto a tab opens a dialog to rename its title. There are several %-designated variables that are explained with a tooltip when you hover the mouse over the text field.
By default, %1d: %p, a tab shows the current directory and, separated by a :, the name of the currently running process (or -- if it's just bash running, probably idling). The screenshot above shows the first tab with a FTP session in the Desktop folder and a second tab idling at home.
-Via Edit|Window title... the Terminal window's title can be edited in a similar way.
+Via Edit | Window title... the Terminal window's title can be edited in a similar way.
Right-clicking a tab shows a context menu to Close tab, Close other tabs or, like double-clicking, Edit tab title....
A Terminal window can be resized like any other window or you use the presets from the Settings | Window size menu. ALTENTER toggles fullscreen mode.
Changed window size and text encoding are only kept choosing Settings | Save as default.
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Pressing OK will save the current settings as defaul
Bash customization
Coming from Unix, there are countless possibilities to customize the bash itself. There are two files that are especially important to the user: .profile and .inputrc
-Both files can be created in the home/ folder and add or override the system defaults that are defined in /boot/system/etc/.
+Both files can be created in the home/ folder and add or override the system defaults that are defined in /boot/common/etc/.
.profile
The .profile is loaded every time you open a new Terminal. It sets all kinds of aliases and variables that will affect bash's behavior and appearance. You'll find many online resources that will detail all possibilities.
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
WebPositive
Deskbar:
Applications
-
Location:
/boot/system/apps/WebPositive
+
Розміщення:
/boot/system/apps/WebPositive
Settings:
~/config/settings/WebPositive/ - Configuration files, cookies, cache and browsing history
-
~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks - Stores every bookmark as a file
+
~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks - All bookmarks as single files
WebPositive, or Web+ for short, is Haiku's native web browser. One part of its name is a tip of the hat to BeOS' simple NetPositive, the other points to its modern foundation: the WebKit. This open source HTML rendering library is at the heart of other mainstream browsers as well, like Safari of Mac OS X and Google's Chrome. By using the ever evolving WebKit, Web+ will be able to keep up with new web technologies.
-
-
-
You'll control your Web browsing with the Locator bar. To go to a Web page, type the URL into the Locator box and either press RETURN or click the Go button to the right of the Locator box. Web+ will suggest previous URLs as you type; you can go through previously typed URL with the UP and DOWN arrow keys. The icons on the Locator bar give you control over the current page, allowing you to go back, forward, stop loading, or return to your Start page.
-
-
If you need to quickly locate content in a page, Web+ includes in-page search. Use Edit | Find or ALTF to call up the Find bar, then type your search phrase and press RETURN. Further presses of RETURN or ALTG will go through the matches on the page. The Match case option restricts matches to those with the same spelling as your search phrase. Besides in-page search, the Edit menu also includes clipboard functions: cut, copy, and paste.
-
-
The View menu offers several functions to set the display of Web pages. First, View | Reload refreshes the Web page so you can see any changes. You set the font size and zoom level of the Web page here as well; you can also choose whether to apply zoom to images as well as text. If you need more room to view the page, you can move into fullscreen mode with View | Fullscreen. Finally, if you want to view the HTML source code of the current page, View | Page source opens up an external editor to edit the source.
-
-
In case you need to find a page you've already accessed, Web+ has the History menu. This menu contains the Back and Forward commands which are in the Locator bar, but it also has a list of all pages in your browsing history, organized by day.
-
-
Last, the Bookmarks menu lets you add the current page as a bookmark and manage your bookmarks in Tracker. It also lets you see all the bookmarks themselves.
-
-
Right-clicking on your Web page or on elements in the page brings up a context menu. In this menu, you can Stop page loading. If you right-click a link, you can Download link to disk, Open, or Open in new tab. You can also Copy link to clipboard for use elsewhere. You can take similar actions with right-clicked images embedded in Web pages: Download image to disk, Copy image to clipboard, or Open image in new window. Right-clicking selected text allows you to Copy to the clipboard.
-
-
In the Status bar at the bottom of WebPositive's interface, you can preview where links will take you. Hover over a link in a Web page and its destination URL will appear in the Status bar. This bar will also show you progress as Web+ loads a new Web page.
You can access the Web+ settings dialog from Window | Settings.
-
-
-
Many of the options are self-explanatory. The WebPositive Start page and Search page can be set here. You can also change which pages appear in new windows and tabs. Finally, you can change the default fonts and add a proxy server in this dialog.
-
The Auto-hide interface in fullscreen mode option will cause the interface to roll out of view if you don't use it for a short time while in fullscreen mode. Likewise, the Auto-hide mouse pointer option removes the mouse pointer from view when you are scrolling through a Web page.
-
-
Web+ currently only uses the Search page as a possible default page for new tabs and windows. It doesn't have built-in Web search; you have to go to your search engine and type in your query there.
These are some commonly used keyboard shortcuts in WebPositive:
+
WebPositive's interface is pretty straight forward: Under a menu bar is another bar with buttons to navigate to the previous and next sites in your browsing history, to stop the loading of a page and (optionally) a button to jump to your starting page.
+Then comes the locator field to enter a site's URL.
+Below this navigating bar appear the webpages. You can open many pages in parallel by loading them into their own tab.
+At the bottom of the window is a status bar, showing the URL of the site being loaded or of the link the mouse pointer is hovering over. While a page is being loaded, a progress bar appears to the right.
+
Settings
+
From the Window menu you can open a Settings panel to configure a few essentials of WebPositive.
+
+
The first tab deals with general settings: What file or URL serves as a Start page, what's used as a Search page, what Download folder is used for stuff you get from the net.
+Two pop-up menus let you decide what page to load - if any - when opening a new window or tab.
+Via the following checkboxes you can avoid showing the tab bar when there's only one page open anyway. WebPositive's interface can be told to automatically hide in full screen mode, and the mouse pointer can be automatically hidden whenever it's not moved for a while.
+Finally, you can decide to include the "Home" button in the navigation bar and set the number of days the browser remembers the sites you have visited in its history.
+
In the second tab you can choose the fonts used for standard, serif, non-serif and monospaced fonts and set their default sizes.
+
The last tab is used to configure a proxy server.
+
Browsing
+
If you have used any browser before, WebPositive shouldn't provide too many surprises. Instead of going through every menu item and feature, let's have a look at just a few points.
+
+
+
New tabs are created with the + button to the right in the tab bar or, if there's still enough space, by double-clicking into an empty area of it. If there are more tabs open than fit into the bar, the <> scroll-buttons become active, allowing you to scroll the tab bar left and right. The ∨ button to the far right hosts a pop-up menu with all open tabs for even quicker navigation.
+
Clicking on a link with the middle mouse button opens the page in a new tab in the background.
+
From the View menu you can Zoom in and Zoom out of a page. There's also an option to Zoom text only, leaving all images with their original size.
+
If you switch to full screen mode and have activated the setting to hide the interface, it will disappear after a second. To slide it temporarily back in, simply move the mouse pointer to the top of the screen.
+
+
While you type in the locator text field, the browser matches the string to sites you have visited in the past and lists them below the text field. You either keep adding more letters to shorten the list of possible sites, or choose an entry with ↑ or ↓. ENTER will load the page. You can also use the button to the far right which also serves to reload a page.
+Strings not recognized as URLs will get looked up with Google, so the locator field doubles as quick shortcut to web searches.
+
Right-clicking opens a context menu which, depending on the object you've clicked on, offers to open the link in a new window or a new tab, download the object etc.
+
Edit | Find shows a find bar at the bottom to start an in-page search. Matches are highlighted in the page.
+
+
After a while you may experience web pages being loaded slower and slower. Not really a bug in the truest sense, it's more an effect of a deficient handling of cookies. Either way, until that is fixed you'll have to manually intervene: Have a look at ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Cookies.curl. This file stores cookies from webpages and slowly grows while surfing the web. Once it's a few dozen kilobytes in size, it starts to slow down browsing. Just delete the file at that point to start with a clean slate.
+
Bookmarks
+
WebPositive's bookmarks are managed as files and folders in ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/. Adding a bookmark will create a new file there. You can quickly open the folder with Manage Bookmarks....
+
+
You can change a bookmark's URL, name, title and enter keywords just like with any other file with attributes. Just make sure you have all their columns displayed via Tracker's Attributes menu, then select a file, press ALTE and start editing the attribute; change attribute columns with TAB. You can sort bookmarks into different folders you create yourself.
+
By using Tracker to manage and navigate bookmarks you can lift its unique features to quickly find what you're looking for.
+Activating Type-ahead filtering in Tracker's preferences, you can instantly trim down your list of bookmarks to matches of your filter-string. A few more ↑ or ↓ to move the selection and pressing ENTER opens the site. Make sure to display all attribute columns to have the filter applied to name, title, URL and keywords.
+
For this to work, all bookmarks should be kept in the ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/ folder and only copies should be sorted into custom subfolders for usage in WebPositive's Bookmarks menu (if at all). Also, actually filling the keywords attribute helps...
+
Downloads
+
Window | Downloads opens a window listing all past and ongoing downloads:
+
+
Currently downloading files are shown with a growing progress bar and, similar to copying files in Tracker, information on the download speed, file size and expected finishing time. Buttons to the right let you Cancel and Restart a download, or Open the file, or Remove its entry from the list. The Remove missing and Remove finished buttons at the bottom do this for all entries in this list. "Missing" are files that were deleted in the meantime.
+
Moving a file that is currently being downloaded to Trash will stop the download. You'll also notice, that its icon becomes "ghosted".
+Generally, WebPositive is very tolerant when it comes to managing files with Tracker. Files can be renamed or moved even while they are being downloaded and even after the download is finished, these changes are reflected in the Downloads window.
+
Ever wondered from what site you downloaded a particular package, image or any other file? You can track that down by opening the file with DiskProbe and have a look at its META:url attribute.
+
Want to have the URL permanently shown in your downloads folder? Just copy a bookmark into it, have the bookmark's URL attribute column displayed and remove the bookmark again.
+
Keyboard shortcuts
+
Here are some useful keyboard shortcuts:
-
ALTT
Opens a new tab.
+
ALTT
Opens a new tab.
ALTW
Closes the current tab.
ALTN
Opens a new window.
SHIFTALTW
Closes the current window.
-
CMD click
Opens the clicked link in a new background tab.
-
ALTR
Refreshes the current page.
+
ALTENTER
Toggles full screen mode.
+
ALTR or F5
Refreshes the current page.
+
ALTH
Opens the home page.
+
ALTD
Shows/hides the Downloads window.
+
ALTF
Shows the find bar for in-page searching (hide with ESC).
One of WebPositive's unique features is its handling of bookmarks.
-
-
-
Web+ stores your bookmarks as files in Haiku's file system, and you can manage them with Tracker: ALTM will bring up your Bookmarks folder in Tracker. The files themselves are blank. Instead, Web+ stores each bookmark's URL and page title as attributes.
-
There are a number of advantages to this format; attribute storage is easy to filter and edit. Make sure that you first make the bookmark attributes visible from the Attributes menu in Tracker first. To add keywords to a bookmark, just right-click the bookmark in Tracker and choose Edit name, then use TAB to navigate to the keywords field. Once you're editing that field, type in your new keywords and press RETURN. You can edit the names, page titles and URLs of existing bookmarks with the same process.
-
-
WebPositive's approach toward bookmarks allows for quick searching. In Window | Preferences in Tracker, go to the Windows tab and choose Enable type-ahead filtering. Now, whenever you are in a bookmark-filled folder in Tracker, you can type phrases from the title, URL, or keywords of the bookmark you want and filter through the results. This tip is especially helpful if you fill in keywords beforehand. Note that it only works for flat folders and not hierarchies, so you will need to copy your bookmarks into one folder to use this.
Web+ also supports managing your downloads in a similar way. The Downloads window appears when you begin a download; you can call it up manually from the Windows menu. From here, you can open, restart, or remove previous downloads.
-
-
-
Much like it does with bookmarks, Web+ stores information about each download as an attribute. The original URL of the download remains an attribute of the file, so you can always return to the source of the file.
-
Web+ will update and adjust to changes to the downloaded files. Notice that sunday.pdf was deleted, so its icon was ghosted out in the Downloads window. documents.html was renamed from its original name of documents, and the Downloads window updated accordingly.
-
-
-
In the Web+ Settings, you can choose a default folder for downloads. However, if you need a download in a different place, just move it while downloading, and Web+ will continue to download. Moving the file to the Trash will cancel the download.
-
Closing Web+ will cancel your current downloads! Web+ will pop up a warning dialog if you have an ongoing download and try to quit.
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
Bash і скрипти
+
Bash і написання скриптів
-
"Скриптинг"- це техніка автоматизаціі процедур Terminal by hand.
-Scripts can range from simply executing a few commands in a specific order to sophisticated pieces of code that solve complex tasks.
+
"Скриптинг"- це техніка автоматизаціі процедур шляхом об'єднання команд і збереження їх у вигляді текстових файлів, які називаються "скриптами" ("сценаріями"). Кожен раз коли Ви запускаєте скрипт, команди обробляються одна за одною так, ніби вони були введені в Терміналі(Terminal) вручну.
+Скрипти можуть змінюватись від простих, що виконують кілька команд в певному порядку, до нетривіальних фрагментів коду, який вирішує надскадні завдання.
Since scripts rely naturally a lot on the shell they are interpreted by, you should first familiarize yourself with the BASH that's used by Haiku. There are many resources online as it's a widely used shell. One nice document is Johan Jansson's Introduction to bash - a tutorial for bash under BeOS.
Враховуючи, що скрипти залежать від оболонки , якою вони інтерпретуються, спробуйте для початку ознайомитись з BASH, що використовується у Haiku. В тенетах існує багато ресурсів про неї, бо вона є досить поширеною. Хорошою настановою послужить робота Йохана Янсона (Johan Jansson) Introduction to bash - a tutorial for bash under BeOS.
After you've learned a few basics about working in the shell, it's time to slowly ease yourself into the world of scripting. Again, you'll find loads of tutorials and reference material online as well as in bookstores. A very nice introduction that's practically tailor-made for Haiku is the online available Scripting Chapter (PDF, 900kb) of Scot Hacker's BeOS Bible.
Після вивчення початків роботи у командній стрічці, настає час випустити себе у світ скриптингу. Знову ж таки силу силенну настанов Ви знайдете і у мережі і на полицях книгарень. Онлайн є доступна книга, що створена спеціально для Haiku Scripting Chapter (PDF, 900kb) від автора BeOS Bible Скота Хакера (Scot Hacker's) .
In Haiku, the system makes of course also use of scripting. Booting and shutting down are typical scripting procedures. These defined sequences can be augmented by the user with certain user scripts.
-If they don't exist already, you'll have to create the needed files yourself. Otherwise simply add your commands where in the process you want them to be executed.
Зрозуміло, що в роботі Haiku теж використовуються скрипти. Завантаження і завершення роботи - типово скриптові процедури. Ці чітко визначені послідовності можуть бути розширені за допомогою користувацьких скриптів
+Якщо вони ще не існують Вам доведеться самостійно їх створити. В іншому випадку просто додайте потрібні команди в те місце де вони повинні виконуватись.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserBootscript will be executed after the system has finished its boot process. For example, you could launch a number of programs that would then be automatically started on every boot up:
/boot/home/config/boot/UserBootscript буде виконаний після того як система завершить процес завантаження. Наприклад, Ви можете додати кілька програм, котрі стартуватимуть при кожному завантаженні:
Remember to end a command with an "&" to start it as a background process, or the script will halt until that command has finished (in this case: the launched app was closed again).
+
Не забудьте додати в кінці команди знак "&" щоб запустити цей процес у фоновому режимі, інакше скрипт зависне , поки ця команда не буде завершена (У нашому випадку, коли запущений додаток буде закрито).
-
A simple alternative to the above for launching applications at boot up is to put links to them in the /boot/home/config/boot/launch directory. This can be done simply by right-clicking on the application you wish to have started automatically, going to Create Link and then navigating to the above directory.
+
Простішою альтернативою для додатків, котрі запускаються під час завантаження - розмістити посилання на потрібні програми в папці/boot/home/config/boot/launch directory. Це можна зробити правим кліком по додатку, котрий Ви бажаєте помістити в автозапуск вибором в меню Створити посилання (Create Link) і переміщенням по папках з використанням навігації до потрібного каталогу.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserShutdownScript will be executed as the first step in the shutdown process. If the script returns a non-zero exit status, the shutdown is aborted.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserShutdownScript буде виконаний в якості початкового етапу процесу завершення роботи.
+Якщо скрипт поверне ненульовий результат після свого закінчення, то завершення роботи буду призупинено.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserShutdownFinishScript is executed as the last step in the shutdown process. Note, that most parts of the system have terminated by the time this script is executed.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserShutdownFinishScript виконується в останню чергу в процесі завершення роботи. Майте на увазі, що більшість елементів системи вже не функціонують під час його виконання.
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
Boot Loader
+
Завантажувач (Boot Loader)
-
Haiku's Boot Loader can help when you experience hardware related problems or want to choose which Haiku installation to start, if you have more than one (maybe on an installation CD or USB stick).
-It's also handy after you installed a software component that acts up and prevents you from booting the system to remove it again. The Disable user add-ons option that's mentioned below, will start Haiku without loading user installed components, e.g. a driver.
-
To enter the Boot Loader options, you have to press and keep holding the SHIFT key before the beginning of Haiku's boot process. If there's a boot manager installed, you can start holding SHIFT before invoking the boot entry for Haiku. If Haiku is the only operating system on the machine, you can begin holding the key while still seeing boot messages from the BIOS.
+
Завантажувач Haiku може допомогти вирішити апаратні проблеми або вибрати яку з систем запустити для встановлення, якщо у Вас більше однієї копії Haiku (установочний CD або USB-карта).
+Він також допоможе при встановленні програмного компонента, котрий перешкоджає успішному завантаженню системи. Опція Заборонити завантаження додатків користувача (Disable user add-ons) запустить систему без компонентів, що встановив користувач, наприклад, без драйвера.
+
Для того щоб зайти в настройки завантажувача необхідно натиснути і утримувати клавішу SHIFT до початку завантаження Haiku. Якщо завантажувач встановлено , то Ви можете починати утримання SHIFT перед вибором загрузочного запису Haiku. Якщо Haiku єдина система на комп'ютер, то утримання можна починати під час початкових повідомлень BIOS.
-
Once it's there, you're offered four menus:
+
Ви побачите три пункти меню:
-
Select boot volume
Choose which Haiku installation to start.
-
Select safe mode options
-
There are several options to try in case of hardware related trouble. When moving the selection bar to an option, a short explanation appears at the bottom of the screen.
+
Вибір загруз. розділу (Select boot volume)
Вибрати з якого розділу запустити Haiku.
+
Вибір опцій безпечного режиму (Select safe mode options
+
Тут Ви знайдете кілька опцій, котрі допоможуть вирішити апаратні проблеми. При виборі опцій в нижній частині екрану відображається короткий її опис.
- Safe mode - Disable user add-ons - Disable IDE DMA
@@ -71,32 +72,33 @@ It's also handy after you installed a software component that acts up and preven
- Disable APM - Disable ACPI
-
Select debug options
-
Here you'll find several options that help with debugging or getting details for a bug report. Again, a short explanation for each option is displayed at the bottom.
+
Вибір опцій відладки (Select debug options)
+
Тут Ви знайдете кілька опцій, котрі допоможуть Вам при пошуку неполадок або при отриманні додаткових відомостей при складанні звіту про помилки. Знову ж таки внизу можна бачити короткий опис для кожної опції.
- Enable serial debug output - Enable on screen debug output - Enable debug syslog
-
If "debug syslog" is enabled, a warm reboot after a crash shows these additional options:
+
Якщо активувати меню "debug syslog", то після горячого перезавантаження ( після зависання системи) з'являться додаткові опції :
- Display syslog from previous session - Save syslog from previous session
-
Select fail safe video mode
If you had to activate the option Use fail-safe video mode, you can set resolution and color depth.
+
Вибір безпечного відео-режиму (Select fail safe video mode)
Якщо Ви активували опцію Use fail-safe video mode, то зможете вибрати роздільчу здатність екрану і глибину кольору.
-
After activating one or more options, you return to the main menu and continue booting, which presents you with this boot screen:
+
Після активації однієї чи більшої кількості опцій поверніться в головне меню і продовжіть загрузку. Ви побачите загрузочний екран
+:
-
If everything works OK, one symbol after another quickly lights up.
-The different symbols roughly correspond to these boot stages:
+
Якщо все гаразд, то іконки будуть швидко запалюватись по черзі.
+Кожна з них відповідає певному етапу загрузки:
-
Atom
Initializing modules.
-
Disk + magnifier
Creating rootfs (/) and mounting devfs (/dev).
-
Plug-in card
Initializing device manager.
-
Boot disk
Mounting boot disk.
-
Chip
Loading CPU specific modules.
-
Folder
Final initialization of subsystems.
-
Rocket
Boot script starting the system.
+
Атом
Ініціалізація модулів.
+
Диск з лупою
Створення кореневої файлової системи (/) і монтування файлової системи пристроїв (/dev).
Deskbar - це маленька панель, що по замовчуванню розташована у верхньому кутку екрана . Вона є аналогом меню Пуск у Віндовс і містить меню з якого ви можете запустити необхідні додатки, настройки, а також трей з годинником. і список запущених додатків внизу.
+
Deskbar - це маленька панель, що по замовчуванню розташована у верхньому кутку екрана . Вона є аналогом меню Пуск у Віндовс і містить меню з якого ви можете запустити необхідні додатки, настройки, а також трей з годинником і список запущених додатків внизу.
-
Ви можете перемістити Deskbar до будь-якого кута або розмістити як панель вздовж верхньої або нижньої межі екрану захопивши за шорстку зону в районі трея іdrag&drop поягнути на нову позицію. Ви також можете згорнути його до компактного вигляду посунувши за шорстку зону в напрямку меню Deskbar.
+
Ви можете перемістити Deskbar до будь-якого кута або розмістити як панель вздовж верхньої або нижньої межі екрану захопивши за шорстку зону в районі трея і drag&drop потягнути на нову позицію. Ви також можете згорнути його до компактного вигляду посунувши за шорстку зону в напрямку меню Deskbar.
Show Replicants - Показує/ховає маленький віджет Replicant переміщує його, видаляє , дає доступ до контекстного меню.
+
Змонтувати (Mount) - Надає ті самі опції що і при правокліку по робочому столу (дивись Mounting Volumes).
+
Настройки Deskbar ... - Відкриває панель конфігурації Deskbar (див. нижче).
+
Завершення роботи (Shutdown) - Пропонує опції Перезавантажити (Restart System) або Вимкнути (Power Off).
+
Недавні додатки, документи, папки - Список додатків, документів, папок, котрі відкривалися недавно (дивись Настройки Deskbar below).
+
Додатки, Демододатки, аплети Deskbar, Настройки - Список додатків, демододатків, аплетів і настройок (дивись Настройки Deskbar нижче).
-Deskbar Preferences
+Настройки Deskbar
-
Menu
-Here you can set the number of recent documents, folders and applications that are shown in their menu in the Deskbar, or if you want to see them at all.
-The button Edit Menu... opens the folder /boot/home/config/be/. In it you'll find the files and folders that appear in the Deskbar, by default these are Applications, Demos, Deskbar Applets, and Preferences.
-You can delete or add entries like links to applications, documents or even queries by simply copying/deleting them to/from this folder.
-
It's even easier to simply drag a file, folder or saved query and drop it where you want it into the Deskbar.
-
Window
+
Меню
+Тут Ви можете виставити кількість додатків, документів, папок, котрі будуть зображатися в меню Deskbar.
+Кнокка Edit Menu... відкриє папку /boot/home/config/be/. В ній ви знайдете файли і папки, щовідображаються в Deskbar, по замовчуванню це Додатки (Applications), Демододатки (Demos), Аплети Deskbar (Deskbar Applets) і Настройки (Preferences).
+Ви можете додати, видалити такі елементи, як додатки, документи, папки і навіть запити шляхом простого копіювання або видалення.
+
Ще простіше - елементарно перенесіть файл, папку, посилання або запит прямо в Deskbar.
+
Вікно
-
Always on top
The Deskbar always stays above all other windows.
-
Auto raise
The Deskbar pops to the front if the mouse pointer touches it.
+
Завжди зверху (Always on top)
Deskbar відображається поверх всіх вікон.
+
Спливати при наведенні
Deskbar з'являється зверху вікон, коли курсор торкнеться його.
-
Applications
+
Додатки
-
Sort running applications
Sorts the list of running programs alphabetically.
-
Tracker always first
Even if you sort alphabetically, the Tracker entry always stays first in the list.
-
Show application expander
Provides a small widget to show/hide all windows of a program directly under its entry in the Deskbar.
-
Expand new applications
Newly launched programs have their windows automatically expanded under their entry in the Deskbar.
+
Сортувати список запущених додатків
Сортувати список запущених додатків по алфавіту.
+
Tracker завжди перший
Навіть коли увімкнене сортування, Tracker буде відображатись першим у списку.
+
Показати expander додатку
Після активації, справа від назви додатку у списку запущених додатків Deskbar, з'явиться стрілочка, котра дозволить звертати/розгортати список вікон додатку.
+
Розкривати нові додатки
Після запуску автоматично відкривається список вікон додатку.
Among other things, the tray is housing the clock. Hover the mouse over it to display the date in a tooltip. Left-click it to show a calendar. Right-click it to hide/show the clock or launch the Time preferences to set it.
-
Any program can install an icon in the tray to provide an interface to the user. The email system, for instance, shows a different symbol when there's unread mail and offers a context menu to e.g. create or check for new mail. ProcessController is another example that uses its icon in the tray to provide information (CPU/memory usage) and to offer a context menu.
+
Окрім іншого в треї розташований годинник. Лівоклік мишки змінює показ часу на дату і навпаки.Правоклік по ньому викликає контекстне меню, з якого можна запустити настройку часу, дати і часової зони.
+
Будь-яка програма може встановити іконку в трей для забезпечення швидкого доступу. Почтовий клієнт, наприклад, показує іншу іконку, коли є непрочитані листи і пропонує контекстне меню.Іншим прикладом є Інспектор процесів (ProcessController) що використовує іконку в треї, яка показує нагрузку процесора, використання пам'яті а також пропонує контекстне меню.
You can change to a specific running application by clicking on its entry in the Deskbar and choosing (one of) its windows, from the submenu. By right-clicking you can minimize or close a window or the entire application.
-
If you activated Expanders in the Deskbar settings, you can expand/collapse the list of windows directly under an application's entry.
-
In front of every application's windows is a symbol providing info on its state. A bright symbol means a window is visible, a dark one that it's minimized. Three lines in front of a symbol shows that it's not on the current workspace.
+
Ви можете звернутись до запущеного додатку, якщо натиснути на нього в списку Deskbar, вибрати будь-яке вікно з підменю.
+Правокліком по додатку Ви можете звернути або закрити вікна додатку або сам додаток.
+
Якщо Ви активували відображення експандера в настройках Deskbar, то зможете згортати/розгортати список вікон додатку.
+
Перед кожним вікном додатку знаходиться іконка, що показує стан вікна. Світла іконка означає що вікно розгорнуте, темна - згорнуте. Три полоски перед іконкою означають, що вікно знаходиться на іншому робочому столі.
One or more LaunchBox applets can be started to organize shortcuts to your favorite applications or documents. You decide if each is shown on all or just the current workspace. They can also serve to quickly open a document in a specific application. For example, you could drag&drop a HTML file onto a text editor in a LaunchBox to open it in the editor instead of its preferred application, the browser.
NetworkStatus shows the status of your network connections. If not yet running, launching the applet will ask if it should open in window mode or live in the Deskbar. In window mode you're able to resize the icon by resizing the window and use the Replicant handle to drag it to the Desktop.
diff --git a/userguide/uk/desktop-applets/powerstatus.html b/userguide/uk/desktop-applets/powerstatus.html
index ba147dcc..845d5282 100644
--- a/userguide/uk/desktop-applets/powerstatus.html
+++ b/userguide/uk/desktop-applets/powerstatus.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
PowerStatus shows information about the battery level, so it's only useful on mobile computers. If not yet running, launching the applet will ask if it should open in window mode or live in the Deskbar. In window mode you're able to resize the icon by resizing the window and use the Replicant handle to drag it to the Desktop.
diff --git a/userguide/uk/desktop-applets/processcontroller.html b/userguide/uk/desktop-applets/processcontroller.html
index d8e9740b..e50fd354 100644
--- a/userguide/uk/desktop-applets/processcontroller.html
+++ b/userguide/uk/desktop-applets/processcontroller.html
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
~/config/settings/* - Every Translator creates its own settings file here after you've changes its defaults. ~/config/settings/system/DataTranslations settings - Stores the panel's window position.
@@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Besides the output quality you can also set a smoothing that will lessen compres
Haiku provides a system that retrieves e-mail regularly via a Mail Service (also known as mail_daemon) and saves each mail as a single text file. It parses the mail and fills its attributes with all necessary header information, like from, to, subject and its unread status. Now it can be queried by you or any application. This system also makes switching e-mail clients easy as all the data and your configuration stays the same.
@@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ If you're on a dial-up connection, you may want to do that On
You install new fonts by copying them into their respective user folder, i.e. /boot/common/fonts/ or /boot/home/config/fonts/ (see topic Filesystem layout).
+
You install new fonts by copying them into their respective user folder, i.e. /boot/common/data/fonts/ or /boot/home/config/data/fonts/ (see topic Filesystem layout).
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
Locale
-
Locale
Deskbar:
Preferences
-
Location:
/boot/system/preferences/Locale
+
Розміщення:
/boot/system/preferences/Locale
Settings:
~/config/settings/Locale settings
-
Documentation is still missing. If you want to work on it, please announce it on the Documentation mailing list to avoid duplication.
+
Haiku's localization system does not only include replacing texts with their translations, but also more complex tasks such as formatting numbers, dates, and times in a way that matches your Locale preferences.
+
If you would like to help with translations or start with a language that is currently missing, please get in contact on the Haiku-i18n mainling list.
+
+Language
+
Haiku has been translated to dozens of languages, unfortunately some translations are not complete yet. For that reason, you can choose more than one language as “Preferred languages”. If some text is missing in a translation, it's replaced with the words of the next preferred language. English is the default fallback (also when not listed).
+
+
In this example, the preferred language is set to Spanish. The first fallback is Italian, and if the text is missing there too, it's back to default English.
+As you can see, expanding a language entry on the left side reveals sub-entries for specific variations or dialects of a language (if available).
+
+Formatting
+
On the Formatting tab you can set up the formatting of date, time, number and currency formats independently from the settings of your preferred language.
+
+
You may be a Spanish fellow located in the Italian speaking part of Switzerland. So, you'd prefer your system in Spanish, but numbers and currency formatted like at work: Swiss/Italian.
+If you're more comfortable with your Spanish names for days and months (think of the modified dates of files, for example), you can override this time-specific formatting with the checkbox at the top to Use month/day-names from preferred language.
+
Granted, the above example is maybe not the most common scenario, but it demonstrates the flexibility of the system.
+
+Options
+
The last tab provides an option that will Translate application and folder names in Deskbar and Tracker. Disable the checkbox if you prefer the graphical interface localized, while retaining the original English names for preference panels, applications and standard folder names.
+
+
Changes are applied immediately, though currently running applications may require to be closed and restarted before showing the new setting.
+
+
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
+
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Locale preferences.
~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces ~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/vesa - Only when running in VESA mode. ~/config/settings/Screen_data - Stores the panel's window position.
~/config/settings/RTC_time_settings ~/config/settings/timezone - A link to the current timezone in /boot/system/etc/timezones/*/* ~/config/settings/Time_settings - Stores the panel's window position.
By dragging the red vertical or horizontal lines on the touchpad representation, you set the scroll area (slightly reddish against the grey general touch area). Moving your finger on that part of the pad will move the scrollbars of a window accordingly.
+
By dragging the red vertical or horizontal lines on the touchpad representation, you set the scroll area (slightly reddish against the gray general touch area). Moving your finger on that part of the pad will move the scrollbars of a window accordingly.
To the right are sliders to set the general scroll acceleration and the vertical and horizontal scrolling speed.
The acceleration setting decides how much quicker a list scrolls by if you swish over the scroll area very fast. The scrolling speeds control the general speed when using the scroll area in a "normal" way.
Below the touchpad graphic are checkboxes to enable "Two finger scrolling" for vertical and horizontal scrolling. Move two fingers in parallel vertically or horizontally to move the scrollbars of a window. At least for me, it works best if with one finger from the left and one from the right hand.
diff --git a/userguide/uk/preferences/tracker.html b/userguide/uk/preferences/tracker.html
index d39bf8e4..60b5f999 100644
--- a/userguide/uk/preferences/tracker.html
+++ b/userguide/uk/preferences/tracker.html
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
Workspaces
+
Робочі простори (Workspaces)
-
Workspaces are virtual desktops, complete with their own resolution, color depth and background. Up to 32 of these workspaces can be set from the Screen preferences.
+
Workspaces є віртуальними робочими столами разом з їх роздільчою здатністю, глибиною кольору і тлом. Аж до 32 таких просторів можна виставити за допомогою настройки Screen.
You switch between workspaces by either clicking into the Workspaces applet (which is seen in the above image) or by using the keyboard shortcut ALTFx, where "x" is the workspace number. It's a good idea to arrange your workspaces in rows of four to mimick the layout of the Fx keys on the keyboard.
+Перемикання робочих просторів (workspaces)
+
Щоб перемістити вікно, просто виберіть його в аплеті Workspaces applet (як показано на знімку вище) або використайте горячі клавіші ALTFx, де "x" є номером робочого простору. It's a good idea to arrange your workspaces in rows of four to mimick the layout of the Fx keys on the keyboard.
Also, clicking on an application or one of its windows in the Deskbar will send you to the workspace it's in.
Another very convenient way is to use CTRLALT←/→/↑/↓ to navigate spatially the rows/columns of the available workspaces. If you additionally hold down SHIFT, the active window will move with you to the new workspace.
You can switch back and forth between two workspaces with ALT` (the actual key depends on the keymap you're using - it is the key below ESC). Again, holding SHIFT will take the active window with you.
Icons are stored as an attribute with their file. However, that doesn't mean that every file has to have this attribute to appear with an icon in a Tracker window: data files inherit their icon from their filetype. To globally change the filetype's icon you use the FileTypes preferences. If you only want to add a special icon to an individual file, you use the FileType Add-On on it instead. See topic Filetypes for more information.
-
Being an attribute, it follows that only filesystems supporting metadata can retain a file's individual icon. So, if you move files off your BFS volume, consider zipping them up so you don't lose icons or other attributes.
Icon-O-Matic is Haiku's icon editor that can save your work as HVIF, SVG or PNG. The icon can also be directly attached as attribute to an existing file or exported as a resource or source file used by developers. Since the application was tailored to the optimized HVIF format, its usage reflects the inner workings of this format.
Other than your normal vector graphics software, you don't deal with separate objects that each include all their specific properties like path, stroke width, stroke and fill color etc. Rather, you assemble your objects ("shapes") from shared paths and colors ("styles") and set certain properties. This re-using of elements is one secret of HVIF's efficiency. Although that imposes some constraints on the icon designer, there are a few advantages, too.
For example, by re-using a path, several objects can be modified together by manipulating this one path. Think of an object and its shadow. Modifying their shared path will change the object itself and automatically its (maybe slightly distorted/translated) shadow.
-
Here's a quick overview of Icon-O-Matic's window:
+
下面是 图标套件 窗口的预览截图：
To create any visible object on the canvas, you need a shape with a path and a style. Conveniently, you can create one, two or all three of those together from the Shape menu. Every kind of object (Paths, Shapes, Transformers, and Styles) has a menu above its list of elements, offering various commands. Every element has certain options that are set in the Properties view.
@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ For example, by re-using a path, several objects can be modified together by man
A path consists of several points which are connected with lines or Bezier curves. To add or change points, make sure the path is selected in the path list.
Simply clicking in the canvas will set the first point. While setting a point, you decide if the resulting line will be straight or curved: a simple click and release produces a straight line, holding down the mouse button and moving the mouse will drag out the handles for a Bezier curve. Of course, you can also change it all later on.
@@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Vice versa, to go from Bezier to a corner-point, hold ALT
Selected points are deleted by pressing DEL or by clicking on any point while holding CTRL.
-
The mouse pointer indicates the current mode:
+
鼠标指针指示栏了当前模式：
@@ -150,40 +150,40 @@ Selected points are deleted by pressing DEL or by click
-
Move point(s)
-
Insert point
-
Add point
-
Delete point CTRL
-
Corner↔Bezier ALT
-
Select points SHIFT
+
移动点
+
插入点
+
添加点
+
删除点 CTRL
+
平滑曲线 ALT
+
选择点 SHIFT
-
You can invoke a context menu by right-clicking a point or a selection of points:
+
您可以通过右键点击某个点或选中点打开一个上下文菜单：
-
Select all
ALTA
Selects all points of the current path.
-
Transform
T
Puts all selected points in a transformation box, so you can move, resize and rotate them together. It works just like with shapes, described a bit further down.
-
Split
Splits selected points into two, one sitting on top of the other.
-
Flip
Rotates selected points by 180°. Only has an effect on Bezier points.
The Path menu offers a few obvious entries to Add Rectangle and Add Circle or to Duplicate or Remove a path. Here are some that may need a bit more explaining:
-
Reverse
If your path isn't "closed" (see Path Properties below), a click into the canvas always creates a new point, connecting it with the last one. "Reverse" will reverse this order and your new point will connect to original start point instead.
-
Clean Up
Most useful with imported SVGs, this function will remove redundant points.
+
撤销
If your path isn't "closed" (see Path Properties below), a click into the canvas always creates a new point, connecting it with the last one. "Reverse" will reverse this order and your new point will connect to original start point instead.
+
清除
Most useful with imported SVGs, this function will remove redundant points.
Rotate Indices Right
ALTR
Practically, this rotates the opening of a path. It's best seen when using a not-closed path with a style and a shape with a stroke transformer. Now, if your path looks like a ⊂ it will rotate like this: ⊂ ∩ ⊃ ∪.
Properties at the bottom left of the window offers all available settings of the currently selected object. A path only has two: a Name and if it's Closed or not.
A shape groups together one or more paths with a style. Practically, it's the object that you'll actually see on the canvas. The grouping is done with the checkboxes in front of the paths and styles: Just select your shape and tick off the desired path(s) and a style.
A shape defines how a path and style is applied, e.g. if the object is filled or only stroked (which is done by using Transformers on the shape, we'll get to that later). Also, a shape can be moved, rotated or resized without touching the used path. That way, you can re-use a single path and get different, but related, shapes.
@@ -198,16 +198,16 @@ Selected points are deleted by pressing DEL or by click
-
Move
-
Resize
-
Rotate
-
Move rotation point
+
移动
+
定义大小
+
旋转
+
移动 旋转点
Shapes lie on top of each other, each is on its own layer, if you will. To reorder them you drag&drop their entry to a different position in the list.
The Shape menu offers the before mentioned possibility to Add Empty, With Path/Style/Path&Style and to Duplicate or Remove a shape. Then, there is:
Reset Transformation
Reverts all the move, resize and rotate transformations you have applied to the shape.
@@ -215,8 +215,8 @@ Selected points are deleted by pressing DEL or by click
If not, "Freeze Transformation" will apply the current shape transformation to the assigned path(s). A future "Reset Transformation" will then return to this new state.
A style can either be a solid color or some type of gradient.
Besides the predefined colors under Swatches, you can mix your own by clicking on the current color. Also, note the slider under the color spectrum which sets the alpha-channel (transparency).
@@ -259,16 +259,16 @@ Besides the predefined colors under Swatches, you can
Of course you can move these indicators to change the gradient to your liking. You can also insert more indicators to add more colors by double-clicking into the gradient. Pressing DEL removes the selected indicator.
You can move, resize and rotate the representing box of a gradient on the canvas until it fits your needs. This works just like with shapes.
There's your usual menu bar at the top, File, Edit, Options. The usage is pretty much self-explaining, so we'll only look at how to save your work.
File | Save As... will save in a special Icon-O-Matic format that retains additional information like the names of paths, shapes and styles. These will be stripped from the actual icon once you export it to save space. It's a good idea to back-up your work like this, because without named objects everything's named "<path>/<shape>/<style>" which makes specific changes tedious.
File | Export As... opens a familiar save panel with a file format pop-up menu at the bottom, offering these choices:
-
HVIF
Haiku Vector Icon Format
-
HVIF RDef
Saves as resource used by programmers
-
HVIF Source Code
Saves as source code used by programmers
-
SVG
Saves as SVG
-
PNG
Saves as a 64px sized PNG
-
PNG Set
Saves as 16, 32 and 64px sized PNGs
-
BEOS:ICON Attribute
Choose a file and set its icon attribute directly
-
META:ICON Attribute
Choose a file and attach the icon as mere meta data
A few things you should keep in mind when working with Icon-O-Matic and some general tips for its usage:
+
在使用图标套件时，您需要注意一些东西，还有一些常用的使用提示：
-
Read the Icon Guidelines to learn about important characteristics of Haiku icons, e.g. perspective, colors and shadows.
-
You should always try to minimize your use of paths, those are the most expensive, file size wise. Re-use paths wherever possible and work with manipulated shapes and their transformers instead. Smart use of gradients can also save space.
Wherever possible, you should activate Snap-to-Grid from the Options menu when editing paths. Path points that align with the 64x64 pixel grid use less storage space. You'll also get the crispest look if points are set on exact pixel borders. For example, it is important to align the most prominent outlines with the 16x16 grid.
Check the preview to see if your icon still looks good in 16x16. You may want to use the Level Of Detail settings described in the Shapes section.
There's an easy way to produce letters, even if Icon-O-Matic doesn't provide such a tool. Just enter the text in a text editor such as StyledEdit, adjust font type and style, and drag&drop or copy&paste the selected text into Icon-O-Matic. This will create the according paths and shapes.
ShowImage is an application used for viewing images in various formats. Its funcionality is not limited only to viewing photos, it can also crop images, show slideshows, rotate and flip images.
-
-
If you want to launch this application, simply double-click on some image on your computer.
-
-
Browse photos
-
-
You are not limited to viewing only the image you used to launch application. You can go both to previous or to next image from the folder using arrows on keybord. You can also zoom using either mouse scroll or shortcuts - ALT+ for zooming in and ALT- for zooming out. High-quality zooming is set by default, but you can disable this function unchecking View | High-quality zooming. This function does very fast bilinear filtering.
-
-
There is a possibility to simply zoom picture to the original size or to fit to the window size. Use View menu or shortcuts - ALT1 to get back to the original size or ALT0 to fit to the window size. From the same menu you can also enable stretching an image to the window.
-
-
-
-
ShowImage does support multiple-page files, such as TIFF. It means you can turn pages while browsing any multiple-page image. Make use of Browse menu or use shortcuts (see screenshot above) for this function.
-
-
To change mode to full-screen, simply choose ALTENTER shortcut.
-
-
Slide show
-
-
You can run slideshow using menu, simply choose View | Slide show. There is an option for changing slide delay from 3 to 20 seconds. Default value is a 3 second delay, but you can change it from View | Slide delay menu.
-
-
Flip and rotate images
-
-
This function is also built-in. If you would like to rotate some image, choose proper position from Image menu or use shortcuts - ALTR will rorate your image clockwise and SHIFTALTR counterclockwise.
-
-
You can also flip images. Image | Flip left to right will flip your image horizontally and Image | Flip top to bottom vertically.
-
-
Set background
-
-
You can set your desktop background directly from ShowImage. Just choose Image | Use as background... and Backgrounds preflet will pop-up.
-
-
Drag and drop
-
-
There is an option to select a piece of an image and create new image file from the selection. Simply press CTRL or ALT and select a fragment you would like to use as a new file and drag the selection to desktop. Also, you can change mode to selection mode, so you will be able to select parts of images using just a left mouse button. This option is available from Edit | Selection Mode
-
-
-
-
Once you use right mouse button to drag the selection, an image-format menu pops-up.
If you simply want to find all files and folders on your mounted disks that match a certain pattern, simply leave the search method at by Name, enter the search term into the text box and press ENTER.
You start by setting the filetype from All files and folders to, for example, Text | E-mail and change the search method to by Attribute.
-
This adds a pop-up menu to the left of the textbox and the buttons Add and Remove under that. From the menu you choose which attribute to query. With Add and Remove you can query additional attributes or remove them again. These attributes can be logically linked with AND/OR.
This is your Find window when you're looking for all emails Clara Botters has sent to you in the last two months that had in the subject "vibraphone" or "skepticality".
-As you see, searching through time-based attributes supports some useful phrases: besides for the "last 2 months", you could also use "today", "yesterday", "Monday" or "last Monday" (which would be the Monday last week), or "last 2 minutes/hours/days/weeks".
-A good way to cut down the number of search results.
Typing in a formula query by hand is daunting and really quite unpractical. It still has its uses.
-
Take the above query by attribute of Clara's mails concerning vibraphones etc. If you have all the attributes and their search terms set, try switching to by Formula mode and be overwhelmed by this one line query string:
You could copy and paste the string into an email, forum or IRC for others to use or debug.
-
You can use this method to construct a query in Attribute mode and then switch to Formula mode, to comfortably generate a search string to use for a query in Terminal or a script.
-
You can fine tune your query by inserting parenthesis where needed, make parts case-sensitive or negate logical combinations by changing. e.g. "==" to "!=" for a NOT AND. All you need is a basic understanding of regular expressions and maybe some scripting basics.
After you start a search, the Find window will be replaced by a result window. Here is an example that queried for "server":
+
在启动搜索之后，查找窗口将会被结果窗口取代，下面是 "server" 的查询结果示例：
-
Besides the gray background, result windows work exactly like any other Tracker window. Some things are worth noting:
+
除了灰色的背景，结果窗口和其他的文件浏览器窗口相似。有待提醒内容如下：
-
You can open the location of a file or folder by double clicking on its path attribute.
-
With File | Edit Query or ALTG you get back to your Find window to refine your query.
-
A query is live, i.e. if a file that matches your search criteria appears or disappears from your system, this change is reflected in your results in real-time.
+
您可以双击文件路径属性打开其所在位置。
+
使用 文件 | 编辑查询 或 ALTG 快捷键，您可以返回查找窗口以调整查询。
+
查询是实时的，即如果匹配搜索条件的文件在系统中出现或消失，将会实时的反馈到您的结果。
-
You can assign a sensible attribute layout for query results of a specific filetype. Open a folder containing files of the filetype you'd like to create a template for and arrange the attributes how you'd like to have query results presented. Copy this layout with Attributes | Copy Layout.
-
Open /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates, create a new folder named group/filetype, replacing the slash with an underscore, e.g. "audio_x-mp3". Open the new folder and paste in the previously copied layout with Attributes | Paste Layout.
If you double click a saved query, the file search is at once started and the result window opens immediately. However, you may not want to search with these exact search parameters, but use it as starting point to only slightly tweak the formula.
-By using the Save Query as Template menu item (see (1) in screenshot at the top) or drag&dropping the icon (10) anywhere with the right mouse button, you can create just such a template. Double clicking it won't open a result window, but the Find panel, giving you the opportunity to quickly change search strings or add/remove attributes.
-
Wherever you choose to save query templates, they'll be listed in the Find panel's menu of recent queries.
同其他的应用程序一样 (桌面及其上图标的后台仅仅是一个具有全屏窗)，Tracker与它的窗口出现在桌面栏，并且可以关闭和重启。 The easiest way to quit and restart a crashed or frozen Tracker (or a wayward Deskbar) is to call the Team Monitor.
Moving through your folders is one of Trackers main purposes, just like the file managers on other platforms. Haiku's Tracker has some unique features that will help you doing that efficiently.
Instead of double-clicking your way down folder after folder, there's a better way to drill down:
+
出了不断地双击文件夹，还有一种更好的方法可以进行文件导航：
-
Right-click onto a folder, and at the top of the usual context menu you'll find a submenu of the current folder that let's you navigate down a level. Just move down the hierarchy until you find the file or folder you're looking for and click on it to open it. The above shows the contents of the folder /boot/home/config/.
-If you do the above while dragging a file with you, it will be moved to where you eventually drop it.
-
A similar method can be used from any Tracker window:
Click on the area in the lower left, where the number of items is listed, and you'll get submenus for every level above your current location. From there you can drill down through the folders as usual.
-
Note, that the Desktop is always the topmost level as that is where Tracker shows mounted volumes. So, if you want to go to another disk, you first have to navigate to the top (Desktop) and cross over to your other disk from there.
-
You'll get the same submenu-navigating when you drag a file over a folder. After a short while of hovering, a submenu pops up and you can drill down to your destination. If you initiated the drag with the right mousebutton, you can choose between copying, moving or linking the file when you release the mouse.
You may be familiar with the concept from file managers of other operating systems: typing the first few letters of a filename will jump to the first file matching these starting characters. Haiku took the idea a step further. If there isn't a file starting with those letters it will jump to the first file including the string anywhere in its name. And if there's nothing with the string in its filename, the attributes are searched next.
In the above example, there are many files starting with "Haiku logo", rendering simpler approaches to typing ahead quite useless. In Haiku however, typing "web" jumps right to its first occurence in "Haiku logo - website". The characters you enter appear in the bottom left corner where you normally find the item count of all files in the folder. A second after entering a character, the display jumps back to normal and you're ready for a new type ahead search.
Instead of jumping to a file while typing, there's also the option to filter out all files not matching your type-ahead string. This can improve clarity dramatically, especially when dealing with crowded folders. By using SHIFTSPACE as delimiter, you can even filter on multiple strings.
-Contrary to type-ahead jumping, the filtering will stick until you press ESC or close the window (or leave the folder if you're using Single Window Navigation).
-This type-ahead filtering is set in the Tracker preferences.
The Window menu offers a number of other functions:
+
窗口 菜单还提供了很多其他的功能：
-
Resize Window (ALTY) - Resizes the window to its ideal size.
-
Clean Up (ALTK) - Aligns all icons to an invisible grid. Hold down SHIFT and the menu becomes Clean Up All which additionally sorts all icons alphabetically.
Close (ALTW) - Closes the window. Hold down SHIFT and the menu becomes Close All which closes every Tracker window.
-
Close All in Workspace (ALTQ) - Closes every Tracker window in the current workspace. A useful shortcut if you forgot to hold the OPT key while clicking through folders and all those still open Tracker windows clutter your workspace.
Sometimes you just want to rearrange a few icons without doing a complete Clean Up (ALTK). In that case, you select these icons and start to drag them to their new location. Before you drop them there, keep ALT pressed. This will align the icons to the invisible grid.
-
The rest of the functions are pretty self-explanatory, leaving the Tracker preferences.
+
有时候您可能希望重新排列图标，而不是使用 保持对齐 来排列所有（ALTK）。在这种情形下，您可以选中图标，然后将其拖拽到新的位置即可。在拖拽之时，需要按下 ALT 按键。这样将会对其图标到隐藏网格。
Window | Preferences... opens a panel that offers a number of settings that, where not obvious, should become clear once tried out. Since all settings are applied live, you'll immediately see the changes.
- So, in short, the not so obvious settings:
Desktop - Decide if all mounted disks appear directly on the Desktop or in a window after clicking a single Disk icon sitting on the Desktop.
-
Windows - You can set Single Window Navigation, i.e. a double-clicked folder doesn't open in its own window, but inside the already open window instead, replacing the view of it's parent folder. This is not the same as clicking while holding the OPT key, as described above, because you'll lose the per window saved position and size.
+
Before you switch Tracker to Single Window Navigation mode, because that may feel more familiar to you, we recommend giving the menu based browsing a try first, as that may actually work much faster for you after getting used to. On the other hand, single window browsing offers a Navigator where you can enter or copy&paste a path name and use back, forward and up buttons.
-
Activating Type-ahead filtering will filter the contents of a Tracker window while you type to only display the files matching your string in their name or any currently displayed attribute. See above.
-
Date and Time - Set date and time formats.
-
Trash - Set the behavior when deleting a file.
-
Volume Icons - Set the color of an optional indicator of free space that's shown besides a disk's icon.
Choosing Edit Templates... opens the folder /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Tracker New Templates. Creating a file in that folder will offer its filetype with the file's name and other attributes as template in the New menu. Here, there's a file "Text" with the filetype text/plain. See topic Filetypes for more info.
-
Open With... - A submenu offers all applications that can handle this filetype.
+
The preferred application that would open the file when double-clicked, is checkmarked. This submenu lists first those applications that can handle the exact filetype, in this case it's a text file, the type text/plain. Next come all applications that can handle that supertype in general, here text/*. Last in the list are those that can deal with any file. If you don't click on an app in the submenu, but on the Open With... entry instead, a panel opens:
Here you'll again find the programs that were listed in the submenu. By selecting one and clicking the Open and Make Preferred button, you changed the preferred application for every file of that filetype, here text/plain.
The panel presents info on the selected file and lets you set the default application and, after you expanded that part of the panel, permissions and owner. Clicking on the path will open it in a Tracker window.
-
Edit Name, Duplicate and Move to Trash - lets you rename or duplicate a file or put the selected file(s) to the trash.
-
Move to, Copy to and Create Link - lets you move, copy or link the selected file(s) using the submenu navigating method. Holding SHIFT while invoking the menu offers the option to create a relative link.
-
Cut, Copy and Paste - lets you cut, copy and paste files using the clipboard. By holding SHIFT while invoking the menu you can Copy/Cut more files, maybe from another folder that you can paste somewhere else later. Also, while holding SHIFT you can paste the copied files in the clipboard as links.
-
Identify - will sniff out and set the type of files if they didn't have one before, e.g. if you transferred a file with wget which doesn't set a filetype itself. Holding SHIFT while invoking the menu changes the item to Force Identify which identifies the filetype and corrects it if it was false before.
-
Add-Ons - offers you every generic Tracker add-on and those that can handle the selected file(s). See topic Tracker Add-ons for more information.
When you copy, move or delete files, Tracker shows its progress with a status window. If you initiate more than one transaction, each job gets its own status display.
To the right are two buttons to pause or stop a transaction entirely. Sometimes it can be useful to temporarily pause a large transaction. For example, you may need to quickly launch a large application. Copying large amounts of data chokes your harddisk's IO bandwidth and thus delays your workflow.
Stürzen lebenswichtige Server wie der App Server, der Registrar oder der Input Server ab, bekommt man nicht den gewöhnlichen Crash-Hinweis zu sehen. Stattdessen wird der gesamte Bildschirm weiß und der gdb wird gestartet, der seine Ausgabe direkt auf den Bildschirm schreibt. Unter Umständen kann man immer noch die Maus bewegen, die daraufhin das Weiß und die gdb Ausgabe übermalt. Noch laufende Anwendungen wie ProcessController oder die Uhr in der Deskbar, tun das vielleicht auch noch.
+
Stürzen lebenswichtige Server wie der App Server, der Registrar oder der Input Server ab, bekommt man nicht den gewöhnlichen Crash-Hinweis zu sehen. Stattdessen wird der gesamte Bildschirm weiß und der gdb wird gestartet, der seine Ausgabe direkt auf den Bildschirm schreibt. Unter Umständen kann man immer noch die Maus bewegen, die daraufhin das Weiß und die gdb Ausgabe übermalt. Noch laufende Anwendungen, wie ProcessController oder die Uhr in der Deskbar, tun das vielleicht auch noch.
Außer dass alles etwas unansehnlicher und unbequemer ist, gilt eigentlich das gleiche wie für Bugs in Anwendungen. Am wichtigsten ist das sichern eines "backtrace" mittels bt. Weil man den Text ja nicht mehr irgendwohin kopieren kann, müsste man die Ausgabe per Kamera festhalten.
@@ -152,7 +153,7 @@ Auf dem Bildschirm werden einige Seiten Text ausgegeben, von denen aber nur die
Nachdem ein Fehler gemeldet wurde wird sich ein Entwickler ihm annehmen und bewerten. Da es sich bei allen Entwicklern um Freiwillige handelt, die in ihrer Freizeit programmieren, kann es durchaus etwas dauern, bis man eine Rückmeldung erhält. Je mehr Informationen man einer Fehlermeldung beifügt oder nachreicht, um so leichter ist es für den Programmierer, diesen zu beheben.
+
Nachdem ein Fehler gemeldet wurde, wird sich ein Entwickler ihm annehmen und bewerten. Da es sich bei allen Entwicklern um Freiwillige handelt, die in ihrer Freizeit programmieren, kann es durchaus etwas dauern, bis man eine Rückmeldung erhält. Je mehr Informationen man einer Fehlermeldung beifügt oder nachreicht, um so leichter ist es für den Programmierer, diesen zu beheben.
Wenn man einen Fehler gemeldet hat ist es damit nicht abgeschlossen, eigentlich ist es erst der Anfang und man wird Teil des Entwicklungs-Prozesses von Haiku. Es ist durchaus möglich und eigentlich auch zu erwarten, dass sich ein Entwickler meldet, um näheres zu den Umständen des Fehler-Reports zu erfahren. Hier gilt wieder: je mehr man dem Entwickler helfen kann, um so leichter tut er sich mit der Fehlerbehebung. Erst wenn der Fehler als 'fixed' - also behoben - markiert ist, kann man sich zurücklehnen, mit dem guten Gefühl etwas beigetragen zu haben.
WEP Verschlüsselung ist durch das Kommandozeilen-Programm setwep verfügbar. Es ist ein Provisorium, um sich in ein nicht oder per WEP verschlüsseltes Netzwerk einzuklinken. setwep funktioniert mit 64- und 128-bit WEP und unterstützt Passwörter als Text und Hex-Werte (siehe WEP Info weiter unten).
-
Der Gebrauch ist: setwep Geräte_Pfad [ssid] [key].
-
In nachfolgenden Beispielen gehen wir von einer Netzwerkkarte "/dev/net/iprowifi3945/0" und einem Funknetzwerk mit dem Namen "haikuwifi" aus.
-
Beispiel 1: Verbindung mit einer 64-bit WEP Verschlüsselung und einem Hex-Passwort
Neben unverschlüsselten Netzwerken unterstützt Haiku auch mittels WEP Schlüssel verschlüsselte Netze. WEP ist allerdings eine bereits veraltete Verschlüsselungsmethode, also nicht wirklich sicher.
+
Vom Terminal aus lassen sich mit dem Befehl ifconfig vorhandene Funknetze auflisten und mit einem Verbindung aufnehmen ("join") oder wieder trennen ("leave"):
Der Wifi_Geräte_Pfad wird in den Netzwerk Einstellungen angezeigt oder mit dem Befehl ifconfig -a im Terminal.
+
Nachfolgend einige Beispiele wie mit einem Funknetzwerk namens wifitopia eine Verbindung hergestellt wird. Als Netzwerkkarte wird /dev/net/iprowifi3945/0 angenommen.
+
Alle Funknetzwerke auflisten:
+
ifconfig /dev/net/iprowifi3945/0 list
+
Verbindung mit einem unverschlüsselten Funknetzwerk:
Nach dem Hochfahren kann man sich auch automatisch mit einem durch seine SSID benannten Netzwerk verbinden. Dazu müssen Funknetzwerke und die entsprechenden Passwörter in der Datei /boot/common/settings/network/wireless_networks in folgendem Format abgelegt werden:
+
network wifitopia {
+ password DasPasswort
+}
+
Legt man diese Konfigurationsdatei nicht an, verbindet sich das System automatisch mit dem ersten unverschlüsselten Netzwerk, das es findet.
Momentan gibt es noch keine WPA Verschlüsselung unter Haiku. Es existiert allerdings vorläufiger und unvollständiger Code für eine WPA Implementierung. Um weiter zu kommen, müsste er in den wpa_supplicant Build-Prozess integriert und Kompilier- und Laufzeitfehler behoben werden.
+
Momentan gibt es noch keine WPA Verschlüsselung unter Haiku. Ein großer Schritt in diese Richtung wurde allerdings bereits unternommen.
Um die Firmware für Intel ipw2100, Intel ipw2200/2225/2915, Broadcom 43xx & Marvell 88W8335 zu installieren, started man
+
Um die Firmware für Intel ipw2100, Intel iprowifi2200/2225/2915, Broadcom 43xx & Marvell 88W8335 zu installieren, startet man
~> install-wifi-firmwares.sh
-
Die Intel ipw2100/2200 benötigen zur Installation keine Internetverbindung, da es die Lizenzbestimmungen erlauben die Original-Firmware gleich mitzuliefern. Sie verlangen jedoch eine Zustimmung des Benutzer vor ihrer Installtion. Für Broadcom 43xx & Marvell 88W8335 ist hingegen eine funktionierende Internetverbindung nötig, da die entsprechenden Dateien mit der Firmware Haiku nicht beiliegen dürfen.
+
Die Intel ipw2100 und iprowifi22xx benötigen zur Installation keine Internetverbindung, da es die Lizenzbestimmungen erlauben, die Original-Firmware gleich mitzuliefern. Sie verlangen jedoch eine Zustimmung des Benutzers vor ihrer Installtion. Für Broadcom 43xx & Marvell 88W8335 ist hingegen eine funktionierende Internetverbindung nötig, da die entsprechenden Dateien mit der Firmware Haiku nicht beiliegen dürfen.
Leute, die ihr eigenes Haiku Image bauen, können ihre build/jam/UserBuildConfig entsprechend anpassen. Details dazu und eventuelle Updates zum WLAN-Thema finden sich in der Online-Version dieses Dokuments (Englisch).
Wer die Firmware runterladen muss, aber unter Haiku keine Internetverbindung hat, kann das in diesem Online Dokument angebotene Shell Skript benutzen. Damit werden alle nötigen Dateien heruntergeladen und in ein Zip gepackt, das man unter Haiku in /boot entpacken kann. Dann stehen alle Dateien zur Verfügung, die von install-wifi-firmwares.sh benötigt werden.
Danke, für das Interesse an Haiku! Wir hoffen, dass wir durch die zweite öffentliche Version neue Entwickler für unser Projekt begeistern können und Anwendern die Möglichkeit geben, Haiku kennenzulernen. Natürlich ist diese Alpha Version noch lange nicht vollständig oder gar fehlerfrei und sie erfüllt auch noch nicht die Ziele, die wir uns selbst gesteckt haben, aber sie zeigt, warum wir uns in diesem Projekt so engagieren und es ermöglicht anderen, das große Potential von Haiku zu erkunden.
+
Danke, für das Interesse an Haiku! Wir hoffen, dass wir durch die dritte öffentliche Version neue Entwickler für unser Projekt begeistern können und Anwendern die Möglichkeit geben, Haiku kennenzulernen. Natürlich ist diese Alpha Version noch lange nicht vollständig oder gar fehlerfrei, und sie erfüllt auch noch nicht die Ziele, die wir uns selbst gesteckt haben, aber sie zeigt, warum wir uns in diesem Projekt so engagieren und es ermöglicht anderen, das große Potential von Haiku zu erkunden.
Alle schwerwiegenden Fehler sind, soweit bekannt, beseitigt. Da es sich aber trotz alle dem um eine Alpha-Version handelt, muss man davon ausgehen, dass es noch Fehler gibt, die noch nicht entdeckt wurden.
+
Alle schwerwiegenden Fehler sind, soweit bekannt, beseitigt. Da es sich aber trotz alledem um eine Alpha-Version handelt, muss man davon ausgehen, dass es noch Fehler gibt, die noch nicht entdeckt wurden.
Diese Alpha-Version sollte nicht für wirklich kritische Aufgabe verwendet werden! Obwohl es unwahrscheinlich ist, kann Datenverlust nicht ausgeschlossen werden!
-
Einer der Hauptgründe für diese Alpha-Version ist, das System möglichst vielen Leuten zum Testen anbieten zu können. Nur so ist es möglich, alle Fehler zu finden und Verbesserungsvorschläge zu erhalten. Deshalb sollte nicht gezögert werden, Fehler auch zu im Bug Tracker zu melden (nachdem man dessen Suchfunktion benutzt hat, um Doppeleinträge zu vermeiden).
+
Einer der Hauptgründe für diese Alpha-Version ist, das System möglichst vielen Leuten zum Testen anbieten zu können. Nur so ist es möglich, alle Fehler zu finden und Verbesserungsvorschläge zu erhalten. Deshalb sollte nicht gezögert werden, Fehler auch im Bug Tracker zu melden (nachdem man dessen Suchfunktion benutzt hat, um Doppeleinträge zu vermeiden).
WLAN funktioniert im gewissen Rahmen. Momentan kann man nur ungeschützte oder WEP verschlüsselte Funknetzwerke nutzen. Wegen verschiedener Lizenzbedingungen der unterschiedlichen Hersteller, ist gegebenenfalls eine manuelle Installation der Firmware nötig. Eine Liste der unterstützten Geräte und Hinweise für sie eventuell erforderliche Installation befindet sich auf der WLAN Seite (auch online auf Englisch).
+
WLAN funktioniert in gewissem Rahmen. Momentan kann man nur ungeschützte oder WEP verschlüsselte Funknetzwerke nutzen. Wegen verschiedener Lizenzbedingungen der unterschiedlichen Hersteller, ist gegebenenfalls eine manuelle Installation der Firmware nötig. Eine Liste der unterstützten Geräte und Hinweise für eine eventuell erforderliche Installation befindet sich auf der WLAN Seite (auch online auf Englisch).
Da Haiku eine Reimplemention des BeOS R5 ist, sind die API die gleichen (mit einigen Erweiterungen). Deshalb ist die Dokumentation im Be Book immernoch eine hilfreiche Quelle. Dankenswerterweise hat die Firma ACCESS, die alle Rechte von Be Inc. übernommen hat, einer Veröffentlichung des Be Book zugestimmt.
+
Da Haiku eine Reimplementierung des BeOS R5 ist, sind die API die gleichen (mit einigen Erweiterungen). Deshalb ist die Dokumentation im Be Book immer noch eine hilfreiche Quelle. Dankenswerterweise hat die Firma ACCESS, die alle Rechte von Be Inc. übernommen hat, einer Veröffentlichung des Be Book zugestimmt.
Diese Informationen sollten einen guten Einstieg in die Materie vermitteln:
@@ -111,7 +112,7 @@ Dazu benutzt man einen Befehl im Terminal: installoptionalpackage -h er
Um sich mit anderen Entwickler und Anwendern auszutauschen, muss man nur an den Diskussionen im IRC, unseren Foren oder Mailinglisten teilnehmen. Wie üblich, wenn sich mehrere Menschen unterhalten, sollte eine gewisse Etikette eingehalten werden.
+
Um sich mit anderen Entwicklern und Anwendern auszutauschen, muss man nur an den Diskussionen im IRC, unseren Foren oder Mailinglisten teilnehmen. Wie üblich, wenn sich mehrere Menschen unterhalten, sollte eine gewisse Etikette eingehalten werden.
Thank you very much for checking out Haiku! This is our second public release. We hope to attract new developers to our project and give future users a chance to check out Haiku. We realize that this alpha release does not yet fully live up to the goals that we have set for ourselves and doesn't offer all the features and well-rounded end-user experience planned for the final R1 version. However, we hope that this release lets you discover Haiku's great potential and that you share our excitement.
+
Thank you very much for checking out Haiku! This is our third public release. We hope to attract new developers to our project and give future users a chance to check out Haiku. We realize that this alpha release does not yet fully live up to the goals that we have set for ourselves and doesn't offer all the features and well-rounded end-user experience planned for the final R1 version. However, we hope that this release lets you discover Haiku's great potential and that you share our excitement.
Muchas gracias por probar Haiku. Este es nuestro segundo lanzamiento público. Esperamos atraer nuevos desarrolladores a nuestro proyecto y darle a los futuros usuarios una oportunidad para probar Haiku. Estamos conscientes de que esta versión alpha no cumple del todo los objetivos que nos hemos propuesto y no ofrece todas las características ni la experiencia de usuario bien formulada que fueron planificadas para la versión R1 final. No obstante, esperamos que esta versión le permita descubrir el gran potencial de Haiku, y que comparta nuestra emoción.
+
Thank you very much for checking out Haiku! This is our third public release. We hope to attract new developers to our project and give future users a chance to check out Haiku. We realize that this alpha release does not yet fully live up to the goals that we have set for ourselves and doesn't offer all the features and well-rounded end-user experience planned for the final R1 version. However, we hope that this release lets you discover Haiku's great potential and that you share our excitement.
Merci beaucoup d’essayer Haiku ! Voici notre seconde version publique. Nous espérons encourager de nouveaux développeurs à nous rejoindre et donner aux futurs utilisateurs la possibilité d’essayer Haiku. Nous sommes conscients que cette version alpha ne remplit pas tous les objectifs que nous nous sommes fixés et ne fournit pas toutes les fonctionnalités et l’expérience utilisateur attendues pour la version R1 finale. Néanmoins, nous espérons que cette version (même inachevée) vous permettra de découvrir le potentiel de Haiku et de partager notre enthousiasme.
+
Merci beaucoup d’essayer Haiku ! Voici notre troisième version publique. Nous espérons encourager de nouveaux développeurs à nous rejoindre et donner aux futurs utilisateurs la possibilité d’essayer Haiku. Nous sommes conscients que cette version alpha ne remplit pas tous les objectifs que nous nous sommes fixés et ne fournit pas toutes les fonctionnalités et l’expérience utilisateur attendues pour la version R1 finale. Néanmoins, nous espérons que cette version (même inachevée) vous permettra de découvrir le potentiel de Haiku et de partager notre enthousiasme.
Grazie per aver deciso di provare Haiku! Questa è la nostra seconda release al pubblico. Speriamo di attrarre nuovi sviluppatori al nostro progetto e dare agli utenti futuri una possibilità di provare Haiku. Ci rendiamo conto che quest'alpha release non è ancora completamente all'altezza degli obiettivi che ci siamo fissati e non offre tutte le funzionalità e un'esperienza piacevole e bilanciata per l'utente finale pianificate per la versione R1 definitiva. Comunque, speriamo che questa release ti faccia scoprire il grande potenziale di Haiku e ti faccia condividere il nostro entusiasmo.
-
+
Thank you very much for checking out Haiku! This is our third public release. We hope to attract new developers to our project and give future users a chance to check out Haiku. We realize that this alpha release does not yet fully live up to the goals that we have set for ourselves and doesn't offer all the features and well-rounded end-user experience planned for the final R1 version. However, we hope that this release lets you discover Haiku's great potential and that you share our excitement.
Thank you very much for checking out Haiku! This is our third public release. We hope to attract new developers to our project and give future users a chance to check out Haiku. We realize that this alpha release does not yet fully live up to the goals that we have set for ourselves and doesn't offer all the features and well-rounded end-user experience planned for the final R1 version. However, we hope that this release lets you discover Haiku's great potential and that you share our excitement.
Thank you very much for checking out Haiku! This is our second public release. We hope to attract new developers to our project and give future users a chance to check out Haiku. We realize that this alpha release does not yet fully live up to the goals that we have set for ourselves and doesn't offer all the features and well-rounded end-user experience planned for the final R1 version. However, we hope that this release lets you discover Haiku's great potential and that you share our excitement.
+
Thank you very much for checking out Haiku! This is our third public release. We hope to attract new developers to our project and give future users a chance to check out Haiku. We realize that this alpha release does not yet fully live up to the goals that we have set for ourselves and doesn't offer all the features and well-rounded end-user experience planned for the final R1 version. However, we hope that this release lets you discover Haiku's great potential and that you share our excitement.
Большое спасибо за проявленный интерес к Haiku! Это наш второй публичный релиз, мы надеемся привлечь новых разработчиков к нашему проекту и дать будущим пользователям шанс увидеть Haiku в деле. Понятно, что этот альфа-релиз далеко не полностью соответствует намеченным нами целям, и не предоставляет все функции, которые мы собирались дать конечному пользователю, запланировав их для финальной версии R1. Однако мы надеемся, что этот релиз позволит вам заметить большой потенциал Haiku, и вы найдёте немного времени для её изучения.
+
Thank you very much for checking out Haiku! This is our third public release. We hope to attract new developers to our project and give future users a chance to check out Haiku. We realize that this alpha release does not yet fully live up to the goals that we have set for ourselves and doesn't offer all the features and well-rounded end-user experience planned for the final R1 version. However, we hope that this release lets you discover Haiku's great potential and that you share our excitement.
Thank you very much for checking out Haiku! This is our second public release. We hope to attract new developers to our project and give future users a chance to check out Haiku. We realize that this alpha release does not yet fully live up to the goals that we have set for ourselves and doesn't offer all the features and well-rounded end-user experience planned for the final R1 version. However, we hope that this release lets you discover Haiku's great potential and that you share our excitement.
Tack så mycket för att du testar Haiku! Detta är vår tredje publika utgivning. Vi hoppas kunna locka till oss nya utvecklare till vårt projekt och ge framtida användare en chans att testa Haiku. Vi förstår att denna alfa utgåva ännu inte når upp till dom mål som vi har satt upp för oss själva och erbjuder därmed inte all funktionallitet och den fulländade användarupplevelsen som är planerad för den slutgiltiga R1 versionen. Hur som helst, vi hoppas att denna utgåva låter dig upptäcka Haiku's stora potensial och att du kommer att dela vår förtjusning.
Vi har arbetat hårt för att åtgärda alla möjliga buggar som har kunnat förhindra en utgivning. Men eftersom detta är en alfa-utgåva så finns det fog för att det är många oupptäckta buggar kvar.
+
Vi rekommenderar inte att använda alfa-versioner i ett produktionssystem. Din data kan mycket väl ändras, eller helt enkelt förstöras.
One of the main reasons for releasing an alpha version is to attract more people to test the system and discover bugs or provide suggestions for future enhancements. Please file bugs and enhancements in our bug tracker after using its search function to avoid duplicates.
The first release(s) of Haiku will be very much like the BeOS R5, the operating system it is reimplementing. If you never experienced it, have a look at these links:
Because of our binary and source compatibility, many BeOS applications run on Haiku (you may have to install the optional package "beoscompatibility" for some programs, see below). After downloading a package, simply unzip it (double clicking opens Expander) to /boot/apps/ and start the application from there.
Popular software repositories are:
@@ -90,12 +92,12 @@ You'll have to run a command in Terminal: installoptionalpackage -h exp
Wifi does work to some extent. At the moment you can only connect to unencrypted or WEP encrypted wireless networks. Due to several different licensing policies of different vendors, a manual installation process for the firmware may be required. A list of working devices and instructions for installation can be found on our Wifi page (also online).
Since Haiku is a reimplementation, the API is still the same as for BeOS R5 (with some additions). Therefore the documentation in the Be Book is still a valid resource. Thanks to ACCESS, who owns the rights to former Be Inc. property, we are allowed to provide a copy of the Be Book.
There are additional resources that should help you getting started:
@@ -108,7 +110,7 @@ You'll have to run a command in Terminal: installoptionalpackage -h exp
Get in contact with other developers and users and join the discussions on IRC, in our forums or the mailing lists. When many different people come together, rules have to established to keep communication effective. Please respect our Mailing List Etiquette.
Thank you very much for checking out Haiku! This is our second public release. We hope to attract new developers to our project and give future users a chance to check out Haiku. We realize that this alpha release does not yet fully live up to the goals that we have set for ourselves and doesn't offer all the features and well-rounded end-user experience planned for the final R1 version. However, we hope that this release lets you discover Haiku's great potential and that you share our excitement.
+
Thank you very much for checking out Haiku! This is our third public release. We hope to attract new developers to our project and give future users a chance to check out Haiku. We realize that this alpha release does not yet fully live up to the goals that we have set for ourselves and doesn't offer all the features and well-rounded end-user experience planned for the final R1 version. However, we hope that this release lets you discover Haiku's great potential and that you share our excitement.
Ми провели значну роботу по виявленню і усуненню помилок ("багів") , однак це лише альфа-реліз і в ньому можлива присутність деякої кількості невиявлених помилок.
+
Ми не рекомендуємо використовувати альфа версії у якості основної операційної системи. В наші дані з великою ймовірністю можуть бути внесені небажані зміни, вони можуть бути спотворені або навіть знищені .
-
One of the main reasons for releasing an alpha version is to attract more people to test the system and discover bugs or provide suggestions for future enhancements. Please file bugs and enhancements in our bug tracker after using its search function to avoid duplicates.
+
Одна з основних причин випуску альфа-версії є бажання привернути більше користувачів для тестування і виявлення помилок, а також отримання від них пропозицій для подальшого покращення Haiku. Прохання залишати звіти про найдені помилки і пропозиції з покращення ОС в нашій системі відслідкування помилок (bug tracker) , але тільки після попереднього пошуку, для уникнення появи дублікатів.
The first release(s) of Haiku will be very much like the BeOS R5, the operating system it is reimplementing. If you never experienced it, have a look at these links:
Перші релізи Haiku будуть схожі по функціоналу і зовнішньому вигляду на BeOS R5, яку ми і намагалися відтворити. Якщо Ви ніколи нею не користувались варта скористатись такими посиланнями:
Because of our binary and source compatibility, many BeOS applications run on Haiku (you may have to install the optional package "beoscompatibility" for some programs, see below). After downloading a package, simply unzip it (double clicking opens Expander) to /boot/apps/ and start the application from there.
Так як ОС бінарно і на рівні коду сумісна з BeOS, багато з додатків працюють у Haiku (для деяких програм доведеться встановити пакет "beoscompatibility" , дивись нижче). Після закачки просто розпакуйте його (подвійним кліком для відкриття архіву в Expander) в/boot/apps/ і запускайте додаток.
HaikuPorts - maintains patches for ported software
-
OsDrawer - hosts native BeOS and Haiku open source software projects
+
Haikuware - сайт з додатками, що орієнтовані на Haiku
+
BeBits - найпопулярніший каталог програм для BeOS ( останнім часом і для Haiku).
+
HaikuPorts - бібліотеки, що необхідні для портування додатків.
+
OsDrawer - сховище для додатків з відкритим кодом підBeOS і Haiku, що знаходяться на стадії розробки.
-
There are also so-called Optional Packages, which are used by Haiku's build system. It is not intended for end users to manually extract and install them. Instead, a utility script is provided, installoptionalpackage. This script is meant to bridge the gap while Haiku's package management is still under construction. It will allow you to install most of the available Optional Packages.
-You'll have to run a command in Terminal: installoptionalpackage -h explains its usage.
+
Також існують так звані додаткові пакети (Optional Packages), що використовуються при побудові Haiku. Вони не призначені для скачування і встановлення кінцевим користувачем, однак є сервісний скрипт installoptionalpackage, котрим можна скористатись поки менеджер пакетів знаходиться в стані розробки. Він дозволить встановити більшість додаткових пакетів.
+Досить у терміналі набрати команду: installoptionalpackage -h , що описує як ним зкористатись.
Wifi does work to some extent. At the moment you can only connect to unencrypted or WEP encrypted wireless networks. Due to several different licensing policies of different vendors, a manual installation process for the firmware may be required. A list of working devices and instructions for installation can be found on our Wifi page (also online).
Wifi зараз підтримується частково. У даний момент можливе підключення до незахищених мереж або до таких, що захищені WEP шифруванням . Через різну ліцензійну політику виробників, доведеться вручну встановлювати мікропрограму (firmware) . Список приладів, що підтримуються можна знайти на нашій сторінці Wifi (також наживо).
Since Haiku is a reimplementation, the API is still the same as for BeOS R5 (with some additions). Therefore the documentation in the Be Book is still a valid resource. Thanks to ACCESS, who owns the rights to former Be Inc. property, we are allowed to provide a copy of the Be Book.
Так як Haiku є відтворенням, API її таке ж як у BeOS R5 (з деякими виключеннями), Тому документація у Be Book все ще актуальна. Завдяки компанії ACCESS, котрій належать права на інтелектуальну власність Be Inc., нам дозволено поширювати Be Book.
-
There are additional resources that should help you getting started:
+
Існують інші ресурси, що допоможуть почати вивчення:
Get in contact with other developers and users and join the discussions on IRC, in our forums or the mailing lists. When many different people come together, rules have to established to keep communication effective. Please respect our Mailing List Etiquette.
Ви можете звязатися з розробниками , іншими користувачами, приєднатися до обговорення на IRC каналах, нашому форумі або в списках розсилки. Коли маса людей спілкується разом необхідно дотримуватись деяких правил для збереження ефективності спілкування. Почитайте Етикет списків розсилки.
The Intel ipw2100 and iprowifi22xx will install without an internet connection, as the licensing terms allow Haiku to distribute the original firmware archives. However, they do require acknowledgment by the end-user prior to their installation. The Broadcom 43xx and Marvell 88W8335 will require an active internet connection, as the files containing their respective firmwares cannot be distributed with Haiku.
Italiano
Русский
Español
Svensk
日本語
Українська
中文 ［中文］
Italiano
Русский
Español
Svensk
日本語
Українська
中文 ［中文］
MediaPlayer
+
+
+
+
+
-
-
English
+
WebPositive
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
-
-
-
-
NetworkStatus
PowerStatus
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
Locale
-
-
-
-
Deutsch
Deutsch
ActivityMonitor
-
BePDF
CDPlayer
-
CharacterMap
-
Haiku-specific commandline applications
CodyCam
-
DeskCalc
DiskProbe
DiskUsage
DriveSetup
-
-
-
Expander
Icon-O-Matic
-
@@ -136,7 +139,7 @@ Vice versa, to go from Bezier to a corner-point, hold 
-
Installer
-
Magnify
-
Mail
MidiPlayer
+
+
Pe
People
PoorMan
Screenshot
SoundRecorder
StyledEdit
Terminal
TextSearch
TV
Vision
LaunchBox
-
Appearance
Backgrounds
DataTranslations
Deskbar
E-mail
@@ -110,7 +112,7 @@ Besides the 
FileTypes
Fonts
Keyboard
Keymap
Media
Mouse
Network
Printers
Screen
ScreenSaver
Sounds
-
Time
Touchpad
Tracker
VirtualMemory
English
-
diff --git a/userguide/it/workspaces.html b/userguide/it/workspaces.html
index 35eb66cf..34e149c3 100644
--- a/userguide/it/workspaces.html
+++ b/userguide/it/workspaces.html
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@
Português
Português
-
ProcessController
The primary task of the ProcessController applet is to show the activity of your CPU(s) and the amount of used memory. It allows monitoring of individual teams, change their priority, and kill them if the program freezes. In multiprocessor environments it allows you to disable individual processors/cores. When Tracker or Deskbar crash you can restart them from ProcessController's menu.
-
-
Français
Français
WonderBrush
-
-
图片查看器
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Italiano
Русский
Español
Svensk
日本語
Українська
中文 ［中文］
Deutsch
Português
Français